this file is provided free of charge from the who needs it ... · pdf filestart...

180
This file is provided FREE OF CHARGE from the electromaniacs.com community You are free to distribute this file to other persons who needs it , but without of charge Also on http://electromaniacs.com you can find thousands of service manuals , schematics free of charge

Upload: ngothien

Post on 11-Mar-2018

215 views

Category:

Documents


2 download

TRANSCRIPT

This file is provided FREE OF CHARGE from the electromaniacs.com community You are free to distribute this file to other persons who needs it , but without of charge Also on http://electromaniacs.com you can find thousands of service manuals , schematics free of charge

DEFLECTION CIRCUIT CHECK

START TROUBLESHOOTING

TV startsfor a moment

with EHT (at least 1s)and attempts

3 starts.

ERROR CODE28 Signal by LED.

Short circuit TL71?sCollector to GROUND.

Horizontaldeflection

repair routine

Horizontaldeflection

repair routine

Verticaldeflection

repair routine

Verticaldeflection

repair routine

Check for open circuit

Open circuit DL74

Open circuit TL71

horizontal deflectionstage components.

Check safetycircuit components

TL71,72, etc.

Check BCL componentsCL09. DL09, CL08

TL02,TL59

TV now OK ?

TV now OK ?

Check DL75

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

DEFLECTION CIRCUIT CHECK

HORIZONTAL DEFLECTIONREPAIR ROUTINE

Open circuit pin 8 IP95 orshort pin 4 of IP95 to GNDCheck the U-TIMER ~ 9vUSYS ~ 70v / 5VUP ~ 5v

+UA ~ 12v / U-VIDEO ~ 100v

No deflection problem!refer to power supply

OK?

Check H_Drivecomponents RL35,

RL36,TL31,TL32,TL33

Check H drive pulseon pin1 of LL32.

Connect pin 8 or removeshort on pin 4 of IP95.Short circuit TL34 B/E.

Short TL71 Col. to GND.Check for H_Drive onRV18, breifly visiable.

TV now OK ?

TV now OK ?

Go to 1

TV now OK ?

Open circuit either pin10 of the DST or JL60.

Check power supplyvoltage as again.

Check TL34 DL21,CL21 CL24, DST

Check Short TL34 B/E.Check retrace pulseon the collector TL34

(probe 100:1)

Yes

No

No

Yes

Yes

No

Yes

NoIV01repair routine

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

DEFLECTION CIRCUIT CHECK

OK?

OK?

No

Yes

No

Yes

Yes

No

1

Verticaldeflection

repair routine

Check DST output voltagesthese should be least at 50%of the nominal value. Check5VON, VSUPPLY,VRETRACE

Check for short circuit DSTsupply lines 5Vdst, Vsupply,Vretrace check TL34, LL32

Check Modulator components

Check the following, ZL11/13ZL14, DL11/13/14, TL14

Check flyback voltage on pin 8 of the DST.

Check DL09, DL19, DV09

Check the Line Flybackpulse (LFB) during start-up.

Briefly visible?

OK?

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

DEFLECTION CIRCUIT CHECK

No

No

Yes

Yes

No

Yes

Yes Yes

Yes

No

VERTICAL DEFLECTION STAGEREPAIR ROUTINE

NoIV01repair routine

V supplyand V retracewas OK or

>50% duringstart?

OK ?

OK ?

OK ?

OK ?

Vertival retrace visible on pin 7 IF01 during

start ?

Check the following items:-RL11/13, ZL11/13, DL11/13.

Check vertical guard signalon pin 34 of IV01, pulsewith U>4V during retrace

and <4V during scan visible.

Change IF01

NO vertical problem !!

Check Vetical Deflection IC pin resistance with TV "OFF"V supply (pin 3) > 5KOhm

V retrace (pin 6) > 50KOhmOutput A (pin 7) ~ 5,7KOhmOutput B (pin 4) ~ 5,7KOhm

Check pin 1 and 2 of IF01vertical amplifier during start-up.

At pin 1 approx. 3V DC and avisible sawtooth signal,on pin 2 approx. 3V DC.

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

DEFLECTION CIRCUIT CHECK

No

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

Yes

No

Yes

No

Yes

IV 01REPAIR ROUTINE

Is +8vpresent on

pins 23 & 53 ofIV01 at switch

"On" ?

+5Von pin 55

& 6,8V on pin 19IV01

Sawtoothsignal on pin 4

IV01 duringstart ?

Pin 58 <6v& pin 3 <3V

of IV01 duringstart ?

Check CC01,CI57 or IV01 defective.

Check RV01, CV03, RC02,CC03. Also check for short

circuits on IV01 supply pins?

Power supply or µP problem

IC not initialised or defect.Check crystals, bus protocol.

Check safety circuit andEHT compensation signal

IV01 defect. ?

I2C Bustransmissionvisible during

start ?

Bus blocked or µP problem

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

SECONDARY DC-VOLTAGES

11V

0,5A

U-VIDEO

U-SYS

+UA

U-TIMER

CHASSIS ICC17

+

DP82

DP84

DP80

DP93

All measurements in this chapter must be done WITHOUT the mains supply connected to the TV.Test circuit:The external voltage source is provided by a variable DC-power supply with its output voltage set to 11V and the current limitation set to 500mA's. The negative terminal of the DC-power supply must be directly connected to the chassis secondary ground plane.The positive terminal of the DC-power supply is first connected to an ammeter and then the anode of an isolation diode. The cathode of the isolation diode is then connected to the load on the chassis as shown below. Measure the current drawn by each load tested.

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

No

Yes

Yes

No

Yes

No

Yes

No

Yes

No

Yes

No

Yes

No

STANDBY POWER SUPPLY - PRIMARY SIDE

230VAC atBP01 ?

CP10=310VDC

Check mainsplug-in &

mains switch

FP01 BlownCheck mainssupply filter &bridge rectifier

CathodeDP22=5.2V

CathodeDP20=42V

CheckIP20 pin 1

for a 62kHz signal

CP63=9.7V

Replace FP01& check TP50

& RP15

Check Standbyrectifier DP16-19RP20 and DP20

Check CP26and DP22

Replace IP20

Check TP21& LP20

Primary side ofStandby Power Supply

should be OK.

Short circuit pins 3 and 4of LP50 and switch

"ON" the mains supply.

Important information:If the over-voltage circuit was activated,you will have to change the fuse resistor atlocation RB/LB06 on the CRT-board.

General: All measurements must betaken with the TV connected to the mains supply via an Isolation Transformer.

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

DEGAUSSING CIRCUIT

No

No

Check degauss circuit.Switch "ON" the TV.

VoltageRP12 < 1.8V

Check whetherDP14 is

short circuit

Checkconnector BP15& posistor RP15

VoltageCP13 > 4.5V Check RP10

Check whetherDP14 is

open circuit

VoltageRP12 > 1.2V

CheckTP14 and TP15

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

SECONDARY DC-VOLTAGES

11V

0,5A

U-VIDEO

U-SYS

+UA

U-TIMER

CHASSIS ICC17

+

DP82

DP84

DP80

DP93

All measurements in this chapter must be done WITHOUT the mains supply connected to the TV.Test circuit:The external voltage source is provided by a variable DC-power supply with its output voltage set to 11V and the current limitation set to 500mA's. The negative terminal of the DC-power supply must be directly connected to the chassis secondary ground plane.The positive terminal of the DC-power supply is first connected to an ammeter and then the anode of an isolation diode. The cathode of the isolation diode is then connected to the load on the chassis as shown below. Measure the current drawn by each load tested.

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

No

Yes

No

Yes

No

Yes

No

Yes

No

Yes

Short circuit pins 3 & 4 ofLP50, short circuit CP69.

Switch"ON" mains supply

Checkvoltage acrossRP76 = 3.3V

Check the Keyboard PCB, DK01, CK02, GE01 (LED)

and GK01 (IR-receiver)

Checkvoltage acrossRP76 < 3.3V

voltage atcathode of IP61goes from > 5V

to < 2.5V

Check the connection tothe Keyboard and the

voltages on KDB17000

Check IP50and IP61

Regulation circuit OK.

Solder a 10Kresistor from CP63

to gate IP61

Cathode IP61 > 5V

Gate of IP61 < 2V

Check Standby rectifierDP16-19 and RP20

Replace IP61

Important information:If the over-voltage circuit was activated,you have to replace the fuse resistor atlocation RB/LB06 on the CRT-board.

General: All measurements must betaken with the TV connected to the mainssupply via an Isolation Transformer.

After finishing this test, please remove the short circuitsfrom pins 3/4 of LP50 and CP69 also remove the 10k resistor.

STANDBY POWER SUPPLY - SECONDARY SIDE

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

No

Yes

Yes

POWER SUPPLY - SECONDARY SIDE : U-VIDEO

NoTestcurrent

>200mA?s

No short circuiton U-VIDEO

Remove the cableinserted at BL02(to CRT-board)

Check on CRT-board the video amplifier IB01,

DB30/31, DB50/51 & DB70/71.Reconnect cable in BL02

Replace DP82

Connect the test circuitto the cathode of DP82.

Testcurrent

>200mA?s

Important information:If the over-voltage circuit was activated,you have to replace the fuse resistor atlocation RB/LB06 on the CRT-board.

General: All measurements must betaken with the TV connected to the mainssupply via an Isolation Transformer.

After finishing this test, please replace cable BL02 and remove the test circuit.

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

No

Yes

Yes

POWER SUPPLY - SECONDARY SIDE : U-SYS

No No short circuiton U-SYS.

Replace DP80

Testcurrent

>500mA?s

RemoveJL60/LL60

Testcurrent

>500mA?sCheck TL34

Connect the test circuitto the cathode of DP80.

Important information:If the over-voltage circuit was activated,you have to replace the fuse resistor atlocation RB/LB06 on the CRT-board.

General: All measurements must betaken with the TV connected to the mainssupply via an Isolation Transformer.

After finishing this test, please replace JL60/LL60 and remove the test circuit.

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

POWER SUPPLY - SECONDARY SIDE : U-TIMER

No No

Yes Yes

No No

Testcurrent

>200mA?s

Measure +8V rail(at pin 8 of IP95)

>1.3V Remove LL31

CheckDP93 and IP95

Connect pin 4 of IP95 to ground.Connect the test circuit to the

cathode of DP93.

Testcurrent

>200mA?s

Check line drivercircuit, TL32, etc.

Voltage at pin 9 of IP95

= 5.1V

Check +5VUPand 5V_VCC rails

Connect pins 4and 9 of IP95.

Testcurrent

>500mA?s

No short circuiton U-TIMER

Voltage at pin 8 of IP95

= 8.1V

Check voltage at pin 4 of IP95 andDP94 and CP96.

Check +8V railto AP, DP, OS,

SCART and KDBImportant information:If the over-voltage circuit was activated,you have to replace the fuse resistor atlocation RB/LB06 on the CRT-board.

General: All measurements must betaken with the TV connected to the mainssupply via an Isolation Transformer.

After finishing this test, please replace LL31, remove thelink between pins 4 and 9 of IP95 and remove the test circuit.www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

No

Yes

Yes

POWER SUPPLY - SECONDARY SIDE : +UA

No

No

Testcurrent

>200mA?s

No short circuiton +UA rail.

Remove JP03

Remove DP84

Connect pin 4 of IP95 to ground.

Connect the test circuit tothe cathode of DP84.

Testcurrent

>200mA?s

Replace AudioAmplifier IS80.

Testcurrent

>200mA?sReplace DP84

Check IP87

Check U-TIMER rail.

Important information:If the over-voltage circuit was activated,you have to replace the fuse resistor atlocation RB/LB06 on the CRT-board.

General: All measurements must betaken with the TV connected to the mainssupply via an Isolation Transformer.

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

ICC17First issue 07 / 98

100U0CA119

100U0CA118

10U0CA113

10U0CA112

470U0CA109

4U7CA008

4U7CA007

4U7CA003

4U7CA004

1MI0CA043

1MI0CA054

100U0CA078

100U0CA074

100U0CA080

220U0CA105

1U0CA103

1U0CA104

470U0CA044

470U0CA053

4U7CA093

4U7CA092

1U0CA094

1U0CA095

470U0CA035

1MI0CA032

1U0CA024

4U7CA014

4U7CA013

1U0CA016

1U0CA015

470U0CA036

1MI0CA031

1U0CA023

470R0RA105

4R7RA042

22K0RA047

22K0RA040

4R7RA049

4R7RA041

4R7RA050

22K0RA039

22K0RA048

BA004

12345

1K0RA118

1K0RA119

47K0RA111

47K0RA109

120K0RA107

470R0RA008

470R0RA007

100K0RA005

100K0RA006

100K0RA002

100K0RA001

470R0RA003

470R0RA004

22K0RA076

1K0RA056

1K0RA045

1K0RA055

1K0RA046

10K0RA070

10K0RA071

6K8RA112 10K0

RA114

10K0RA1156K8

RA113

33R0RA116

33R0RA117

120K0RA106

100K0RA150

BA00511121314

BA005789

10

AM/DP.17000.00 1N0CA106

1N0CA107

1N0CA005

1N0CA006

1N0CA002

1N0CA001

22N0CA058

1N0CA115

1N0CA114

1N0CA101

1N0CA102

22N0CA061

22N0CA064

22N0CA060

1N0CA056

1N0CA045

1N0CA091

1N0CA090

470P0CA097

470P0CA096

1N0CA012

470P0CA017

470P0CA018

1N0CA011

LL4148DA071

LL4148DA070

LL4148DA075

LL4148DA074

BC857BTA080

BA00812

BA00912

BA00612

BA00712

100N0CA034

100N0CA033

LL4148DA073

LL4148DA083

BZX55C3V6DA024

BZX55C3V6DA023

+

-IN-

IN+OUT

VCC

VEE

IA003

6

57

8

4

+

-IN-

IN+OUT

VCC

VEEMC33076/P1

2

31

8

4

4K7RA093

10K0RA072

120K0RA073

4K7RA074

22K0RA077

1K2RA078

10K0RA079

120MI0RA080

6K8RA082

5K6RA083

5K6RA081

100R0RA0281K0

RA032

15K0RA024

10K0RA026

18K0RA030

15K0RA029

1K0RA096

1K0RA097

100R0RA027

1K0RA031

18K0RA022

560R0RA037

560R0RA036

4K7RA094

15K0RA023

18K0RA025

4K7RA014

4K7RA013

4K7RA015

4K7RA095

4K7RA016

560R0RA035

560R0RA038

18K0RA021

1K0RA017

1K0RA018

4K7RA092

BC847BTA077

BC847BTA072

BC847BTA022

BC847BTA021

100N0CA042

100N0CA049

100N0CA041

100N0CA050

TDA7269IA002

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

89

10

11

TDA7269IA001

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

89

10

11

BA001BS003

BS02

1

1

23456789

10

10

BA005

4 5 6

BA005

1 2 3

SA001

1

2

3

4

5

6

BA002

11

233

Heatsink

GndRight

Left

Mute

Right

Left

Headphones

Cinch output Cinch output

Left Right

GND+ UA

Surround

Center R

Center L

Center

Center

Headph LHeadph R

Mute Surr.

Mute L/R

Surround

Surround

Subwoofer

Subwoofer

Surround

Left

Left

Left

Right

Right

Right

SUB AMDP

ICC17

AUDIO MODULE DOLBY PROLOGIC

AMDP

AUDIO SIGNAL MODULE DOLBY PROLOGIC - MODULE AUDIO DOLBY PROLOGIC - DOLBY PROLOGIC VERSTÄRKER - MODULO AUDIO DOLBY PROLOGIC ESQUEMA DEL MÕDULO AMPLIFICADOR DE AUDIO

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

ICC17First issue 07 / 98

I2C

CL

I2C

DA

AGND

DGND

+5VA

+5VDDGND

RES

ETQ

+8V

AGND

DA

CM

C

DA

CM

SU

B

DA

CC

2L

DA

CM

SU

RR

AGND

+8V

AN

AIN

-

AGND

AGND

AN

AIN

1+

AGND

AD

RS

EL

AG

ND

+5V

A

+8V

+5VD

DGND

+5V

D

AN

AIN

2+

DGND +5VD

DGND

MO

NO

IN

VR

EFTO

P

SC

1IN

RS

C1IN

L

SC

2IN

R

SC

2IN

L

SC

3IN

RS

C3IN

L

CA

PLM

CA

PLA

SC

1O

UTL

SC

1O

UTR

SC

2O

UTL

SC

2O

UTR

AG

ND

C

SC

4IN

R

DGND

XTA

LO

UT

XTA

LIN

220N0CS201

CS21010U0

CS202

10N0

CS

207

100N

0

1N0

CS106

CS105

100N0

10N0

CS104

1N0

CS103

10N0CS102

10U0CS211

220N0CS101

10U

0C

S206

CS203

1N0

CS205

100N0

Rig

ht

Subw

oofe

r

Cente

r

Mute

L/R

Surr

ound

Mute

Surr

.

Headph L

Headph R

SC

4IN

L

64 33

10N0

CS204

1 32Left

AGND

DA

CM

L

DA

CM

R

DC

TR

OU

T1

DC

TR

OU

T0

DA

CA

LD

AC

AR

1

111213141516171819

2

2021222324252627

28

29

3

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

4

40

41

42

43

44

45

46474849

5

50515253545556575859

6

6061

64

65

66

67

68

69 770

71

72 8 9

AVSUP

STANDBYQ

TESTEN

ADRSELDCTROUT0DCTROUT1

AUDCLOUTDMACSYNC

XTALOUTXTALIN

ANAIN2+ANAIN-

ANAIN1+AVSUP

AHVSSCAPLMAHVSUPAVHSUPCAPLASC1OUTLSC1OUTRVREF1VREF1SC2OUTLSC2OUTRASG3TESTNEUDACMSUBDACMLDACMRVREF2VREF2

AVSS

AVSS

MON

OIN

VREF

TOP

VREF

TOP

SC1I

NRSC

1INL

ASG0

SC2I

NRSC

2INL

ASG1

SC3I

NRSC

3INL

ASG3

SC4I

NRSC

4INL

AGND

CAH

VSS

DVSU

P

I2CC

LI2

CDA

I2SC

LI2

SWS

I2SD

AOU1

I2SD

AIN1

ADRD

A

ADRW

SAD

RCL

DVSU

P

DVSS

DVSS

I2SD

AIN2

RESE

TQDA

CAR

DACA

L

NP

NP

NPNPNP

106263

71

72

65

66

67

68

69

70 6541 2 3 7 8 9

MSP3410D(DIE)

IS100

CS

209

100N

0

3U

3C

S208

AGND

1

BS001

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

11

12

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

30

29

28

27

26

25

24

23

22

21

20

19

18

17

16

15

14

13

12

11

10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

19

18

17

16

15

14

13

32

BS002

31

9 10

10

8654321

1

BS003

1

TP2

1 TP1

7PINS of MSP

PINS of MSP

DGND

1011121314151617181920212223242526

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

43

4546474849

5

5051525354555657585960

61

62

64

65

66

67 8

STANDBYQVREF2 ADRSEL

AUDCLOUT

XTALOUTXTALINTESTEN

AVSUP

SC1OUTLSC1OUTRVREF1VREF1SC2OUTLSC2OUTRASG3

VREF2

AHVS

S

27

AVSU

PAV

SSAV

SSM

ONOI

NVR

EFTO

PVR

EFTO

PSC

1INR

SC1I

NLAS

G1SC

2INR

SC2I

NLAS

G2SC

3INR

SC3I

NLAG

NDC

AHVS

S

44

NP

NPNPNP

7 963 2 3 4 6

I2CC

LI2

CDA

I2SC

LI2

SWS

I2SD

AOU1

I2SD

AIN1

NPDVSU

PDV

SUP

DVSS

DVSS

I2SD

AIN2

RESE

TQI2

SDAO

U2

68 1

NC NC NC

DACC2RDACC2L

DACC1RDACC1L

CAPLC2AHVSUPAHVSUP

DCTRIO0DCTRIO1

DCTRIN

NCNCNC

CAPLC1

168 643263 97 867

66

65

64

62

61 5

DPL3518(DIE)

IS200

DGND

+5VD

SUB AMDP 17001 00

AMDPBA001

SUB AUDIO MODULE DOLBY PROLOGIC

SUB AMDP

5558

SUB AUDIO SIGNAL MODULE - SUB MODULE AUDIO - AUDIO SIGNAL SUBMODUL - SUB MODULO AUDIO

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

GND

OUT

Vss

GK01

12 3

TFMK1330-D-T

DK01BZX55C5V1

SK031 2

3 4

GE01

1

23

LU5351-JM

A2

A1C

JK01

RE03

100R0RK02

270R0

RK011K0

CK0222U0

DE01BZX55C2V7

SK021 2

3 4

SK041 2

3 4

SK011 2

3 4

JK02

BK01

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Vol-

Vol+

PR+

PR-

KEYB_A

U_STBY

+8V

IR

+5V_STBY

KEY_IN_2

KEYB_B

KEY_IN_1

KDB 17000 00

16VR

G

BJ10

1

2

3

4

5

6

BQ09

1

2

3

4

5

CJ2022P0

470P0CQ06

BQ12

1

2

345

78 RQ05

330R0RQ01

330R0RQ03

330R0

RQ04330R0

RQ02330R0

RQ06 330R0

CQ043N3

CQ033N3

CJ011U0

CJ021U0

CQ0210U0

CQ0110U0

CJ05NI

CJ04470P0

CJ03470P0

BJ04123456

FCB.17000.00

RJ0347K0

RJ0675R0

RJ05220R0

RJ20220R0

RJ0447K0

RJ2175R0

470P

0CQ

05

BJ111

2

3

45

R

L

CHROMA

FCB-GND

VIDEO

FCB 17001 00

L

L

R

R

R

LAUDIO

VIDEO

CHROMA.

VIDEO

KEY BOARD AND FRONT CONNECTOR BOARDMODULE PRISE EN FACADE ET INTERCONNEXION DU CLAVIER

TASTATUR UND FRONT ANSCHLUSSPLATTE - PIASTRA CONNESSIONE PLACA TECLADO Y CONECTORES FRONTALES

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

GENERAL INFORMATION - LED BEHAVIOUR

LED FLASHES

Message transmission.The Error codes are signalled by the TV’s red LED.

Count the number of flashes : error code is two burst seperated by a pause of 0.7sec. and repeated four times..There is 1.7 sec. between each codes sequence .

orange pause

green pause

green

orange

red pause

off

0,7 sec. 1,7 sec.

2 4

3 4

0,7 sec.

0,7 sec.

1,7 sec.

1,7 sec.

250ms250ms

0,7 sec. 1,7 sec.

off pause

red

CODES DEFAUTS

IC TDA8855H DOES NOT ANSWER14

AUDIO PROCESSOR NO LONGER RESPONDING.15

SDA LINE BEING HELD LOW21

CLOCK JAMMED AT LOW LEVEL, SCL LINE JAMMED AT LOW LEVEL.23

SWITCHED 5V NOT AVAILABLE25

TUBE DOES NOT GET WARM IN TIME26

THE DETECTION SYSTEM HAS DETECTED PROTECTION ON MORE THAN THREE OCCASIONS(DOES THIS MEAN THAT A PROBLEM HAS BEEN DETECTED ON THE BREATING LINE?).

27

SCANNING PROBLEM AFTER 2 S, THE PROGRAM TRIES TO PERFORM A START.28

THE NVM CHIP DOES NOT ANSWER 34

WRONG NVRAM ADDRESS PASSED TO THE BUS-HANDLER36

UNEXPECTED LEVEL ON NMI (INTERRUPT) LINE FOUND (POSSIBLE CAUSE : TUBE FLASHOVER)37

BUS (DATA LINE) NOT RECOVERABLE41

currently all known ICC17 TV sets are fitted with a Bicoloured LED, the red part is the Standby LED whilst, the green part is directly connected to the switched +8V supply. Therefore,the colour of the LED will depend upon the state of this voltage,the chart below gives the corresponding LED-colours:

LED-port switched +8V off on

on green orangeoff off red

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

+USYS: System voltage

+U_VIDEO: Video drive voltage for the CRT board

+ STDBY_ ON: Standby data (0V standby , 0.6v switched ON)

+5V DST: 5v unregulated voltage from the DST

to supply the tuner and audio MSP device

+5V ON: 5v regulated voltage from the DSTto supply the tuner and audio MSP device

+5V UP : Microprocessor supply voltage

BCL: Beam current limiting information

CVBS: Composite video / luminance signal

CVBS_OUT: Composite video output

CVBS_TXT: Composite video for teletext extraction

DEGAUSS: Degauss signal

EW : East / West

FORMAT / BC: Full white control DATA depending on16/9 selected format

HDRV: Horizontal deflection signal

HTR1 / HTR2: Heater voltage from the DST to CRT PCB

LFB: Line Fast Blanking

MUTE : Mutes audio amplifiers

PO: “Power ON “ IP95 : reset activated and output = 8v“PO” = 5v when TV is working in normally

POWER_FAIL: Detection of mains supply and deflection stage failures

RESET: Microprocessor reset signal

SAFETY: Safety information from the deflection stage

SCL: Serial Clock

SDA : Serial Data

SIF: Sound IF

TRAP_INFO: 31.4Mhz IF trap activation

U_ STANDBY: Standby voltage

U_DRIVER: Horizontal sync signal from TDA8855H

U_TIMER: 11v voltage used during “Switch ON “ phaseand “Wake Up“ mode

V FLB: Vertical flyback reference for the microprocessor

V GUARD: Safety data generated by the vertical amplifierTDA 8351

V_RETRACE: 42 / 48volts (depending on tube type) generated bythe DST and used for vertical blanking

V_SUPPLY: 13.5 to 15.5 volts (depending on tube type) generated by the DST

LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS - LISTE DES ABREVIATIONS- ABKÜRZUNGENLISTA DELLE ABBREVIAZIONI - LISTA DE ABREVIACIONES

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

1

1716

32

MX27C200MC-12

MPS3400C-PP-C6

TDA 8139

ST24C08-MTS3702CD

MC7812/CTBT806 -600CSTP6 NA60F1

B C E

BC 847BBC 857BBCR141BCR191

DTC113ZKDTC144EK

TN1401

BF 422BF423

2SA1020Y2SC2236Y

BC 337BC 546BBC 547B

BD241C

E B C

E

BC

MPS750

TDA8351

BUH516TH16

33

32 14

13

16453

52

TDA8855H

ST92R195

1 24

25

40

4164

65

80

8109

11

1 2

5 6

3 4

7

TDA7269

1 25

7

9

3

46

8

TDA6107Q

INTEGRATED CIRCUITS AND TRANSISTORS OUTLINE - CIRCUITS INTEGRES ET TRANSISTORS

INTEGRIERTE SCHALTUNGEN UND TRANSISTOREN - CIRCUITI INTEGRATI TRANSISTOR

CIRCUITOS INTEGRADOS Y TRANSISTORES

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

Audio baseband processing of the MSP3410

SCA RT 1SCA RT 2SCA RT 3MONO

FM

NICA M

SBUS12

SBUS34

I2S

DC-FM1

DC-FM2OFF 50u N

J17

J17

J17

SC1 OUT

SC2 OUTA

QP L

A

A

AEFFECT S LS OUT

BEEP

HP OUT

I2S OUT

QP R

17 16

S_DA

_OUT

S_DA

_IN

S_CL

S_ID

I2S_

DA_O

UT

I2S_

DA_I

N

I2S_

CL

I2S_

WS

SBUS Interface

SCART Switching Facilities

IDENT

FM1

FM1

LS L

S1..4

I2S L/R

LS R

Headphone L

Headphone R

Scart_L

Scart_RScart_L

Scart_R

SC1_OUT_L

SC1_OUT_R

SC2_OUT_L

SC2_OUT_R

DACA_L

DACA_R

DACN_L

DACN_R

FM2NICAM1NICAM2

I2S Interface

DEMODULATOR

Sound IF

A/DA/D

D/A

D/A

D/A

D/A

D/A

D/A

DFP

MSP3410ANA_IN1+

ANA_IN2+

Sound IF

SC1_IN_L

SC1_IN_R

SC2_IN_L

SC2_IN_R

SC3_IN_L

SC3_IN_R

Mono_IN

58

60

55

52

53

50

49

46

47

1520 13 14 11 12

26

25

29

34

33

28

37

36

Detection part of the MSP 3410

IDENT A MDemodu-

lation

StereoDetection

Filter

BilingualDetection

Filter

LevelDetect

LevelDetect

StereoDetectionRegister

INTEGRATED CIRCUITS BLOCK DIAGRAMS - SYNOPTIQUES INTERNES DES CIRCUITS INTEGRES - INTEGRIERTE SCHALTUNGEN BLOCKSCHALTBILDER

SCHEMA A BLOCCHI DEI CIRCUITI INTEGRATI - VISTA INTERNA DE LOS CIRCUITOS INTEGRADOS

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

VIF AMPLIFIER + PLL DEMOD

AGC FOR IF+ TUNER

POL

TOP

SCLTUNER SDA+8V

AFC

IDENTIF.

I2C - BUSTRANSCEIVER

SYNC SEP.+1st LOOP

VCO+CONTROL

2nd LOOP HOR. OUT

EW - GEOMETRYHOR. OUT

AGC

AM

OU

T

INT

ER

CA

RR

. O

UT

PAL/NTSCSECAM

DECODER

BASE-BANDDELAY LINE

RGB-2 INPUTRGB/YUVMATRIX

CD MATRIXSAT. CONTROL

SKIN TINT

AFC VIDEOAMPLIFIER

CONTROLDAC's

VERICAL SYNC.SEPARATOR

H / VDIVIDER

VERTICALGEOMETRY

VIDEO IDENT VIDEO MUTE

CHROM TRAP+ BANDPASS

FILTERTUNING

CONTINUOUSCATHODE

CALIBRATOR

RGB CONTROLBLUE STRETCH

OUTPUT

SIFAMPLIFIER

QSS MIXERAM DEMOD.

CVBS Y/CSWITCH

CVBS

CV

BS

IN

CV

BS

OU

T

CV

BS

OU

T

CV

BS

/YC

HR

.

SOUNDTRAP

SWITCH

LUMA DELAYPEAKINGCORING

BLACK STRETCHRGB MATRIX

BLACK CURR.

BEAM CURR.

V-DRIVE

H-DRIVE

EHT

EW

RGB-1 INPUT

1

15

22

10 27 11 16 2924 54 26 20 21 53 51 50 55 49 41

R2Fsc G2 B2 BL2

42 43 44 40 45 39

35

30

34

31

32

33

63

3

62

565718 59 28 25 61 19 581771413 6

64

R1

R

G

B

G1

B1

BL1

36

37

38

4746

60

8

9

2

MUTE

IF - IN

SIF - IN

SW.OUT

SW

SW

SAT

REF

WH

ITE

P

BR

I

CO

NT

R.

HUE

SW.OUT

5323

V U Y

TDA8855H

IV01 TDA 8855H

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

BLOCKDIAGRAM: audio module dolby prologic

I A 0 0 13

6

2

47

1 1

Mute Circuit

SA 0 0 1

BA005a

BA007

BA006

BA005a

IA0023

6

2

47

11

Mute Circuit

+ Us

Left

Right

BA005b

BA008/BA009

I A 0 0 3

B A 0 0 4

BA005c

Ex t ernal speaker

Internal speaker

Ex t ernal speaker

Internal speaker

Surround

Center

Headphones

Subwoofer

5

5

+ Us

Cur rent L imi ter

Surround

L& R

BA005d

Lef t

Right

Surround

Center

Subwoofer

Headphones L& R

M ute_surr

M ute_L/ R

M ute

+ U a

GND

B A 0 0 2

B A 0 0 1

BLOCK DIAGRAM (AUDIO MODULE DOLBY PROLOGIC) SCHEMA SYNOPTIQUE (AUDIO MODULE DOLBY PROLOGIC) BLOCKSCHALTBILD (AUDIO MODULE DOLBY PROLOGIC)SCHEMA A BLOCCI (AUDIO MODULE DOLBY PROLOGIC)

ESQUEMA DE BLOQUES (AUDIO MODULE DOLBY PROLOGIC)

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

ICC17First issue 07 / 98

+5V

IIC Bus

RESET MSP

+8V

SIF

AV1 in

AV2 in

AV3 in

AM AF

MSP 3410 D

2

AV1 out

AV2 out

2

2

2

IIC Bus DPL 3520

RESETQ

+5V

IISBus

Dolby Prologic COB(IS40)

Left

Right

Headphone Left

Headphone Right

Mute L/R

Mute Surround

Center

Surround

Subwoofer

BS003Clock

Block diagram Dolby Prologic

+5V

IIC Bus

RESET MSP

+8V

SIF

AV1 in

AV2 in

AV3 in

AM AF

MSP 3410 D

Headphones

Loudspeakers2

AV1 out

AV2 out

MuteCircuit

MUTE+UA

TDA 7269

2

2

2 2

2

2 22

2

IIC Bus DPL 3518

RESETQ

+5V

IISBus

Virtual DolbyCOB

Block diagram Virtual Dolby

Demod.

A/D

D/A

D/A

RightLeft

Left Right

Headphone

Loudspeaker

IF inputI2S out

D/A

D/A

SurroundNot

Center Subwoofer

Channel 1

Channel 2

Used

I2S1 in

AM and I2S1 in I2S out

Audio_clockMS P 3410 D DP L 3520 A

Scart in

SwitchingPart

I/O

Mute L/R Mute Surr

DSP

(Dolby + effect)

Interface requirement audio part with Dolby Prologic

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

120 130 140 150 160 170 180110

210

310

410

510

610

710

810 820 830 840 850 860 870 880

720 730 740 750 760 770 780

620 630 640 650 660 670 680

520 530 540 550 560 570 580

420 430 440 450 460 470 480

320 330 340 350 360 370 380

220 230 240 250 260 270 280

CHARGING PROBLEM DISPLAY FUNCTION PROBLEM ABNORMAL NOISE REMOTE CONTROL PROBLEM PHYSICAL DAMAGE GENERAL FUNCTION PROBLEM SPECIAL REQUIREMENTSPOWER PROBLEM

NO RECEPTION

NO PICTURE

NO COLOUR

NO AUDIO

NO MECHANICAL OPERATION

NO DATA PROCESSING

NO PRINTER OPERATION ERRONEOUS PRINTER POOR PRINT QUALITY NOISY PRINTING UNSTABLE PRINTER OPERATION RIBBON/PAPER PROBLEMS FAULTY FONT/CHARACTER

FAULTY DATA PROCESSING DATA DISPLAY PROBLEM DATA READ/WRITE PROBLEM SPECIAL DATA PROCESSING

IRREGULAR MECHANICAL SPEED PROBLEM MECHANICAL NOISE DAMAGE TO SOFTWARE MECHANICAL OPERATION LENS PROBLEM

AUDIO LEVEL PROBLEM AUDIO QUALITY NOISY AUDIO UNSTABLE AUDIO POOR AUDIO RECORDING POOR SPECIAL AUDIO STEREO/MULTI MODE

COLOUR LEVEL PROBLEM POOR COLOUR QUALITY NOISY COLOUR UNSTABLE COLOUR POOR COLOUR RECORDING SPECIAL COLOUR FUNCTION

PICTURE LEVEL PROBLEM PICTURE QUALITY PROBLEM PICTURE NOISE UNSTABLE PICTURE POOR PICTURE RECORDING SPECIAL PICTURE FUNCTION PICTURE DISPLAY/PICKUP

POOR RECEPTION TRANSMISSION PROBLEM NOISY RECEPTION/ UNSTABLE RECEPTION/ TUNING PROBLEM SPECIAL COMMUNICATION SPECIAL RECEPTION PROBLEM

12112212X

131132 133 134 135 136 137 138 13913X

141142 143 144 145 14614X

151152 153

15415X

161162 163 164 165 166 167 168 16916A 16B

16C16X

171172 173 174 175 176 177

17817X

181182 183 184 185 18618X18Z

111112 113 114

115116 117

11811911A 11B 11X

211212 213 214 215 216 217 218 21921X

311312 313 314 315 316 31731X

411412 413 41441X

511512 51351X

611612 613 614 615 616 617 618 61961A 61X

711712 713 714 715 716

71771871X

811812813

821

822

831832833

84184284X

851852853

861862863

881882883

721722 723 724 725 726

72772872X

731732 733 734

735736 73773X

761762 76376X

771772 77377X

621622 623 624

625626

627628 62962A 62X

63163263X

641642 643 644 645 646 64764X

661662 663 664 665 666 66766X

671672 673 674 675 676 677 678 67967A 67X

681682 683 68468X

521522 523 524 52552X

531532 533 53453X

541542 543 544 545 546 547 54854X

551552 553 554 555 55655X

561562 563

56456556X

571572 573 574 575 576 577 57857X

581582 583

58458558X

42142242X

431432 433 434 435 436 437 43843X

441

44244X

451452 453 45445X

46146X

47147247X

321322 323 324 325 326 32732X

331332 333 334 335 336 337 338 33933A 33X

341342 343 344 345 346 347 34834X

351352 353 354

355356 357 358

35935A 35B 35X

361362 363

364365 366

36X

371372 373

374375

376377 378 37937A 37B 37X

381382 383 384

38538X

221222 223 224 225 226 227 228 22922X

231232 233 234

235

23X

241242 24324X

25125225X

261262 263 26426X

271272 273 274 275 276 277 27827X

281282 283 284 285 286 287 28828X

NO BATTERY CHARGINGINCOMPLETE BATTERY CHARGE OTHER CHARGING PROBLEM

FAULTY TIMER/COUNTER DISPLAYFAULTY LAMP/LED OPERATION FAULTY LEVEL METER OPERATION FAULTY ON-SCREEN DISPLAY OPERATION ELECTRONIC TUNING DISPLAY FAULT MECHANICAL TUNING DISPLAY FAULT FAULTY TIME CODE DISPLAY FAULTY ALARM/ERROR DISPLAY DISPLAY DIM OTHER DISPLAY FUNCTION PROBLEM

CRT DISCHARGING NOISEEHT DISCHARGING NOISE NOISY CABINET NOISY TRANSFORMER NOISY COMPONENT(S) RATTLE OTHER ABNORMAL NOISE

NO REMOTE CONTROL OPERATIONINCORRECT REMOTE CONTROL OPERATION REMOTE CONTROL PROGRAMMING/LEARNING MODE PROBLEMPOOR REMOTE CONTROL SENSITIVITY OTHER REMOTE CONTROL PROBLEM

DAMAGED CABINETDAMAGED HANDLE DAMAGED CONTROL KNOB(S)/BUTTON(S) DAMAGED DOOR/COVER DAMAGED SEAL DAMAGED PLUG OR SOCKET DAMAGED LENS DAMAGED CARTRIDGE OR STYLUS DAMAGED ANTENNA DAMAGED CRT OR VIEWFINDER MISSING COMPONENT(S) OR ORNAMENTALPARTSPRINTED MARKINGS ERASED/PEELED OFF OTHER PHYSICAL DAMAGE

FAULTY CLOCK FUNCTIONFAULTY SLEEP FUNCTION FAULTY TIMER PROGRAMMING FAULTY TIMER RECORDING SOFTWARE PROGRAMMING PROBLEM FAULTY RECORD MUTE OPERATION FAULTY PROGRAMMED PLAYBACKOPERATIONFAULTY MEMORY FUNCTION OTHER GENERAL FUNCTION PROBLEM

TEST AND CHECKGENERAL OVERHAUL SYSTEM/FREQUENCY CONVERSION INITIAL SETUP REQUESTED MODIFICATION/CIRCUIT CHANGE WRONG SET IN CARTON OTHER SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS SYMPTOM NOT AVAILABLE

NO POWER ON ACNO POWER WHEN USING AC-ADAPTER NO POWER WHEN USING DRY BATTERIES NO POWER WHEN USING RECHARGEABLEBATTERIESNO POWER FROM SOLAR CELL NO POWER WHEN USING A CAR BATTERY SHORT OPERATION TIME/SHORT BATTERYLIFEPOWER-OFF FUNCTION NOT WORKING NO SWITCH-ON FROM STANDBY POWERS UP, BUT NO OPERATION CYCLIC POWER ON/OFF OTHER POWER PROBLEM

POOR AM RECEPTIONPOOR FM RECEPTION POOR SW RECEPTION POOR VHF RECEPTION POOR UHF RECEPTION POOR BS RECEPTION POOR CS RECEPTION POOR HDTV RECEPTION POOR QPS RECEPTION OTHER 'POOR RECEPTION' PROBLEM

NO TRANSMISSIONPOOR TRANSMISSION TRANSMISSION LEVEL TOO HIGH NO TRANSMISSION BETWEEN BASE UNITAND HANDSETPOOR TRANSMISSION BETWEEN BASE UNITAND HANDSETOTHER TRANSMISSION PROBLEM

LINE NOISEOSCILLATION INTERSTATION INTERFERENCE OTHER NOISE RECEPTION/TRANSMISSIONPROBLEM

TUNING DRIFTFADING OTHER UNSTABLE RECEPTION/TRANSMISSION PROBLEM

MANUAL TUNING PROBLEMAUTOMATIC TUNING PROBLEM INCORRECT TUNING TUNING MEMORY PROBLEM OTHER TUNING PROBLEM

FAULTY DIALLINGFAULTY CHANNEL SELECTION FAULTY AUTO-ANSWER OPERATION FAULTY MESSAGE READ-OUT FUNCTION FAULTY AUTODIAL MEMORY FAULTY SPEECH PROCESSING NO RINGING TONE WEAK RINGING TONE OTHER SPECIAL COMMUNICATIONPROBLEM

FAULTY STEREO RECEPTIONFAULTY MAIN CHANNEL (A) FUNCTION FAULTY SUB-CHANNEL (B) FUNCTION FAULTY SSB RECEPTION FAULTY RDS/VPS OPERATION FAULTY TELETEXT RECEPTION FAULTY SATELLITE/RTTY RECEPTION FAULTY FAX OPERATION OTHER SPECIAL RECEPTION PROBLEM

NO AM RECEPTIONNO FM RECEPTION NO SW RECEPTION NO VHF RECEPTION NO UHF RECEPTION NO BS RECEPTION NO CS RECEPTION NO HDTV RECEPTION NO QPS RECEPTION OTHER 'NO RECEPTION' PROBLEM

NO PICTURE IN E TO E MODENO PICTURE IN PLAYBACK MODE NO PICTURE IN VIEWFINDER NO PICTURE, ONLY RASTER NO RASTER, BLACK PICTURE ONLY HORIZONTAL LINE ONLY VERTICAL LINE OTHER 'NO PICTURE' PROBLEM

NO COLOUR IN E TO E MODENO COLOUR IN PLAYBACK MODE NO COLOUR IN VIEWFINDER NO COLOUR IN PART OF PICTURE OTHER 'NO COLOUR' PROBLEM

NO SOUND IN E TO E MODENO PLAYBACK OF OUTGOING MESSAGE(S) NO PLAYBACK OF INCOMING MESSAGE(S) OTHER 'NO AUDIO' PROBLEM

NO DISC ROTATIONNO FORWARD OPERATION NO REVERSE OPERATION NO FAST FORWARD OR REWIND FUNCTION NO LOADING NO UNLOADING OR EJECTING OF TAPE NO AUTO SHUT-OFF OPERATION TONEARM DOES NOT MOVE DISC NOT BEING EJECTED MAGAZINE DOES NOT EJECT OTHER 'NO MECHANICAL OPERATION'PROBLEM

NO INITIAL SCREENSYSTEM DOES NOT RESET SYSTEM DOES NOT BOOT UP NO OPERATION FROM PLUG-IN MODULE NO KEYBOARD OPERATION NO OPERATION FROM OTHERINPUT/OUTPUTNO DATA STORAGE OPERATION NO DATA COMMUNICATION OTHER 'NO DATA PROCESSING' PROBLEM

NOT PRINTINGNO COMMUNICATION WITH PRINTERPAPER NOT LOADING

814 NO PAPER FEED815 NO IMAGE FIXATION81X OTHER NO PRINTER OPERATION PROBLEM

PRINT IMAGE REVERSED (NEGATIVE/POSITIVE)IRREGULAR PAPER FEED

823 ERRONEOUS PRINT MODE SWITCHING82X OTHER PRINTER OPERATION PROBLEM

INCORRECT PRINTING POSITIONLOW PRINT CONTRASTEXCESSIVE PRINT CONTRAST

834 BLURRED PRINT IMAGE835 PRINT IMAGE NOT SHARP836 DOTS MISSING-IN PRINT IMAGE83X OTHER PRINT QUALITY PROBLEM

PRINTING NOISE LINESDIRTY PRINTINGOTHER NO I S Y P R I N T I N G PROBLEM

UNSTABLE PAPER LOADINGUNSTABLE MULTI-PAPER LOADINGINCORRECT LINE

85X OTHER UNSTABLE PRINTER OPERATION PROBLEM

-UP OF CHARACTERS

RIBBON BROKENRIBBON STUCK/STICKINGRIBBON DERAILED

864 PAPER STUCK/STICKING TO MECHANISM865 PAPER JAM86X OTHER RIBBON/PAPER PROBLEM

INCORRECT CHARACTERSINCORRECT CHARACTER SIZEFONT LOADING PROBLEM

88X OTHER FAULTY FONT/CHARACTER FUNCTION PROBLEM

INCORRECT DATASYSTEM RESET WHILE BEING USED SYSTEM LOCKS OUT/CRASHES FAULTY OPERATION OF PLUG-IN MODULE FAULTY KEYBOARD OPERATION FAULTY OPERATION OF OTHERINPUT/OUTPUTFAULTY DATA STORAGE OPERATION FAULTY DATA COMMUNICATION OTHER 'FAULTY DATA PROCESSING'PROBLEM

INCORRECT CHARACTER DISPLAYMISSING DISPLAY CHARACTERS FAULTY GRAPHIC DISPLAY FAULTY SWITCHING BETWEEN GRAPHIC/CHARACTER MODEFAULTY PROMPT/CURSOR OPERATION DATA DISPLAY COLOUR INCORRECT NO PAGING OR SCROLL MODE OTHER DATA DISPLAY PROBLEM

FORMATTING PROBLEMDATA ON STORAGE MEDIUM BEING LOST FRAME MEMORY PROBLEM OTHER DATA READ/WRITE PROBLEM

FAULTY SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODEFAULTY WORD PROCESSING FUNCTION FAULTY GRAPHIC EDIT FUNCTION OTHER 'SPECIAL DATA FUNCTION' PROBLEM

IRREGULAR ROTATIONIRREGULAR FORWARD MODE IRREGULAR REVERSE OPERATION IRREGULAR FAST FORWARD OR REWINDFUNCTIONIRREGULAR LOADING IRREGULAR UNLOADING OR EJECTING OFTAPEIRREGULAR AUTO SHUT-OFF OPERATION IRREGULAR TONEARM MOVEMENT IRREGULAR EJECTION OF DISC IRREGULAR DIRECTION CHANGE OTHER 'IRREGULAR MECHANICALOPERATION' PROBLEM

SPEED TOO FASTSPEED TOO SLOW OTHER SPEED PROBLEM

ROTATION NOISEMOTOR NOISE WIND NOISE TAPE SQUEALING FAN NOISE DISC SCRAPING NOISY TAPE LOADING OTHER MECHANICAL NOISE PROBLEM

TAPE GETS SCRATCHEDDISC GETS SCRATCHED TAPE GETS CHEWED/WRINKLED TAPE JAMMED OR BROKEN TAPE GETS CURLED SLACK TAPE TAPE STICKING OTHER SOFTWARE DAMAGE PROBLEM

FAULTY START/STOP OPERATIONFAULTY PAUSE OPERATION FAULTY AUTOMATIC PROGRAM SEARCH FAULTY CUE/REVIEW MODE FAULTY SLOW MOTION OPERATION FAULTY HIGH-SPEED SCANNING MODE FAULTY SPEED COPY FUNCTION FAULTY REPEAT OPERATION FAULTY RECORD REVIEW MODE FAULTY AMS OPERATION OTHER MECHANICAL OPERATION PROBLEM

FOCUS PROBLEMZOOM PROBLEM IRIS PROBLEM MACRO PROBLEM OTHER LENS PROBLEM

LOW AUDIO LEVELEXCESSIVE AUDIO LEVEL BALANCE PROBLEM FADER PROBLEM AUDIO LEVEL REMAINING OTHER AUDIO LEVEL PROBLEM

POOR FREQUENCY RESPONSEDISTORTED AUDIO NO OR POOR TREBLE NO OR POOR BASS OTHER AUDIO QUALITY PROBLEM

HUMHISS CROSSTALK STATIC, POP OR CLICK NOISE BUZZ SCRATCHING NOISE IGNITION NOISE MULTIPATH NOISE OTHER AUDIO NOISE PROBLEM

JUMPING OR REPEATING AUDIOAUDIO PUMPING OR BREATHING AUDIO DROPOUTS CYCLIC AUDIO MUTING WOW AND FLUTTER HOWLING/ACOUSTIC FEEDBACK OTHER UNSTABLE AUDIO PROBLEM

AUDIO NOT BEING RECORDEDNO ERASURE PROTECTION FOR AUDIO PREVIOUS AUDIO RECORDING NOT BEINGERASEDUNWANTED ERASURE OF AUDIO MESSAGE NOT BEING RECORDED OTHER AUDIO RECORDING PROBLEM

FAULTY FADE OPERATIONFAULTY ECHO OPERATION FAULTY MIXING OPERATION FAULTY REPEAT MODE OPERATION FAULTY AUDIO PROCESSING FAULTY SYNC RECORDING OPERATION FAULTY DBB/DOL OPERATION FAULTY NOISE REDUCTION OPERATION OTHER SPECIAL AUDIO FUNCTIONPROBLEM

NO STEREO OPERATIONPOOR CHANNEL SEPARATION DIFFERENCE IN PHASE BETWEENCHANNELSPROBLEM WITH SURROUND SOUND MODE PROBLEM WITH PCM AUDIO MODE OTHER STEREO/MULTI MODE PROBLEM

WEAK COLOUREXCESSIVE COLOUR OTHER COLOUR LEVEL PROBLEM

SOME OR ALL COLOURS MISSINGPOOR WHITE BALANCE HUE PROBLEM PURITY ERROR LANDING ERROR CONVERGENCE ERROR REGISTRATION ERROR PITCH MOIR… OTHER COLOUR QUALITY PROBLEM

COLOUR NOISE ON A BLACK & WHITEPICTURECOLOUR STREAKING OTHER COLOUR NOISE PROBLEM

COLOUR FLASHINGHUE CONSTANTLY CHANGING FLICKERING COLOUR COLOUR NOT LOCKED OTHER UNSTABLE COLOUR PROBLEM

NO COLOUR RECORDINGOTHER COLOUR RECORDING PROBLEM

FAULTY AUTOMATIC WHITE BALANCEFAULTY COLOUR EFFECTS FUNCTION OTHER SPECIAL COLOUR FUNCTIONPROBLEM

PICTURE TOO DARKPICTURE TOO BRIGHT CONTRAST TOO LOW CONTRAST TOO HIGH SATURATED WHITE OR BLACK LEVEL SHADING ON PICTURE ONLY PARTIAL PICTURE OTHER PICTURE LEVEL PROBLEM

POOR PICTURE RESOLUTIONPOOR FOCUS RINGING ON PICTURE EXCESSIVE SMEAR/LAG POOR LINEARITY OR GEOMETRY PICTURE SIZE INCORRECT INCORRECT CENTRING OF PICTURE PICTURE SLANTED V-SIZE INCORRECT H-SIZE INCORRECT OTHER PICTURE QUALITY PROBLEM

SNOWY PICTUREDOT NOISE OR DROPOUT ON PICTURE NOISE BARS ON PICTURE BLANKING LINES ON PICTURE BEATING O PICTUREGHOSTING ON PICTURE VCR HEAD SWITCHING NOISE ON PICTURE OVERMODULATION NOISE OTHER PICTURE NOISE PROBLEM

SYNC PROBLEMPICTURE PUMPING PICTURE JITTER PICTURE SHAKING (HORIZONTAL ORVERTICAL)FLICKERING PICTURE FLASHING PICTURE CYCLIC PICTURE MUTING HEAD IMPACT ERROR CAUSING UNSTABLEPICTUREVCR SKEW ERROR FROZEN PICTURE JUMPING/REPEATING PICTURE OTHER 'UNSTABLE PICTURE' PROBLEM

NO PICTURE RECORDINGNO ERASURE PROTECTION FOR VIDEO PREVIOUS VIDEO RECORDING NOT BEINGERASEDUNWANTED ERASURE OF PICTURE NO CAMERA RECORDING ONLY ONE FIELD PER FRAME BEINGRECORDEDOTHER PICTURE RECORDING PROBLEM

EDITING PROBLEMFAULTY FADING/WIPER OPERATION FAULTY NEGATIVE/POSITIVE SWITCHINGFUNCTIONFAULTY SUPERIMPOSE/TELOP OPERATION FAULTY PICTURE IN PICTURE/DIGITALPICTURE OPERATIONFAULTY PICTURE TRANSMISSION FAULTY DIGITAL SHUTTER FUNCTION FAULTY GENLOCK FUNCTION FAULTY FLASH/STROBE FUNCTION FAULTY DIGITAL PICTURE FUNCTION FAULTY AUTO-EDIT FUNCTION OTHER SPECIAL PICTURE FUNCTIONPROBLEM

BURN MARK ON DISPLAY/PICKUPSCRATCH ON DISPLAY/PICKUP DUST/DIRT ON DISPLAY/PICKUP PHOSPHOR/PIXEL MISSING ONDISPLAY/PICKUPBRIGHT POINT(S) IN PHOSPHOR/PIXEL OTHER PICTURE DISPLAY/PICKUP PROBLEM

1

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1 NO ACTION LEVEL QUALITY NOISE UNSTABLE RECORDING & PHYSICALPROBLEMS SPECIAL FUNCTIONS OTHER CONDITIONS2 3 4 5 6 7 8

CONSTANTLY

INTERMITTENTLY

AFTER A WHILE

IN A HOT ENVIRONMENT

IN A COLD ENVIRONMENT

WHEN SWITCHING

UNDER VIBRATION

IN A DRY ENVIRONMENT

AFTER BEING DROPPED

AFTER LIGHTNING STRIKE

ONLY ON ONE CHANNEL

IN STANDBY/OFF MODE

AT EDIT POINT

WHEN INTERCONNECTED

LIQUID CONTAMINATION

IN A DAMP/WETENVIRONMENT

ONLY CERTAINSTATION(S)/SOFTWARE/ MODE

NO SYMPTOM ORPROBLEM FOUND

ONLY WITH CERTAININPUT(S)

ONLY ON CERTAINOUTPUT(S)

ONLY ON CERTAINSTANDARDS

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

9

A

B

E

H

J

K

L

8

C

X

F

G

D

CONDITIONCODE

MAIN SYMPTOM CODE

EXTENDED SYMPTOM CODE(*1)

(*1)CAUTIONTHE 'X' EXTENDED SYMPTO CODES (*-**X) SHOUL ONLY BE USED TO INDICATE THAT A SUITABLE SYMPTOM DESCRIPTION IS NOT AVAILABLE IN THE CONCERNED SYMPTOM GROUP

CO

MM

UN

ICAT

ION

PIC

TUR

EC

OLO

UR

AUD

IOM

ECH

AN

ISM

DATA

PRO

CES

SIN

GPR

INTI

NG

GEN

ERA

L

IRIS REPAIR CODING SYSTEM SYMPTOM CODE TABLE

TRANSMISSION TRANSMISSION PROBLEM

PROBLEM

PROBLEM

PROBLEM

FUNCTION OPERATION PROBLEM

PROBLEM

FUNCTIONS

OPERATION

OPERATION

OPERATION

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

SECTION CODES

ANT

APA

APD

APR

ARM

BCH

BZL

CBT

CHA

CLK

CPA

CPD

CRT

CTR

DDM

DFL

DPR

ERA

EXC

FDD

FLX

FMW

FPK

HCM

ANTENNA SECTION

AUDIO PROCESSING/ANALOG

AUDIO PROCESSING/DIGITAL

SIGNAL PROCESSING (ANALOG)

ARM MECHANISM

BATTERY CHARGE

BEZEL

CABINET

CHASSIS

CLOCK/TIMER SECTION

COLOUR PROCESSING/ANALOG

COLOUR PROCESSING/DIGITAL

PICTURE TUBE

CONTROL PANEL

DISC DRIVE MECHANISM

DEFLECTION CIRCUIT

SIGNAL PROCESSING (DIGITAL)

ERASE CIRCUIT

EXTERNAL CONNECTOR

FLOPPY DISC DRIVE

FLEXIBLE PCB

FIRMWARE

FOCUS PACK

HEAD CARRIAGE MECHANISM

HDD

HFS

HOL

IDS

IFC

IMG

INC

INP

KBD

LDG

LNM

MEM

MIC

OUT

PFM

PIN

PRG

PRI

PRT

PSU

PUD

PWA

REM

RFM

HARD DISC DRIVE

HIGH FREQUENCY SECTION (RF)

CASSETTE HOLDER

INFORMATION DISPLAY SECTION

IF-CIRCUIT

IMAGE DISPLAY UNIT

INTERNAL CONNECTOR

SIGNAL INPUT SECTION

KEYBOARD (SEPARATE)

LOADING MECHANISM

LENS MECHANISM

MEMORY CIRCUIT

MICROPHONE SECTION

SIGNAL OUTPUT SECTION

PAPER FEED MECHANISM

PINCH ROLLER/LEVER

PROGRAMMING SECTION

PRINT BLOCK

PROTECTION CIRCUIT

POWER SUPPLY

PICK-UP DEVICE

POWER AMP SECTION

REMOTE CONTROL SECTION

RIBBON FEED MECHANISM

RFU

RHD

SFT

SHD

SLD

SNS

SPK

SRS

STA

SVO

SYS

TDM

THR

TIM

TNR

TPT

TRS

TUN

TXT

VPA

VPD

VWF

WIR

XXX

BOOSTER/RF UNIT

ROTARY HEAD(S)

SOFTWARE (TAPE, DISC, ETC.)

STATIONARY HEAD(S)

SLED MECHANISM

SENSOR UNIT

SPEAKER

SUPPLY REEL SECTION

STATIC BLOCK

SERVO SECTION

SYSTEM CONTROL SECTION

TAPE DRIVE MECHANISM

THREADING MECHANISM

TIMER SECTION

TENSION REGULATOR

TAPE PATH

TAKE-UP REEL SECTION

TUNING SECTION

TEXT PROCESSING

VIDEO PROCESSING/ANALOG

VIDEO PROCESSING/DIGITAL

VIEWFINDER

LEAD WIRE

CABINET/COSMETIC PARTS

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Q

R

S

T

U

V

W

X

Y

Z

1

WORN OUT

DIRTY, CLOGGED

MISALIGNED

CUT, BROKEN

DEFORMED

SNAPPED

SCRATCHED

CRACKED, PEELED, CORRODED

LOOSE

SHAKY, UNSTABLE

LEAKING

DRY (NO LUBRICANT)

FOREIGN OBJECT

EXHAUSTED, LOW EMISSION

BURNT, ARCING, MISSING PIXELS

MISALIGNED

SHORT

OPEN

LEAKING

BAD CONTACT, CONNECTION

OPEN PATTERN

CRACKED PCB

COLD OR NO SOLDERING

BRIDGED SOLDERING

WRONG COMPONENT

MISSING COMPONENT

SOFTWARE BUG

DEFECT CODES

MECHANICAL ELECTRICALA

B

C

DE

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Q

U

V

W

X

Y

Z

REPLACEMENT

MECHANICAL ALIGNMENT

ELECTRICAL ALIGNMENT

RESOLDERING

CLEANING

LUBRICATION

REPAIRED ELECTRICAL PARTS

REPAIRED MECHANICAL PARTS

S/B MODIFICATION

REMOVED COMPONENT (S)

ADDED COMPONENTS

FUNCTIONAL CHECK

SPECIFICATION MEASUREMENT

MAINTENANCE

REFURBISHING

PREVENTIVE PARTS REPLACEMENT

PREVENTIVE ACTION WITHOUT PARTS REPLACEMENT

EXPLANATION FOR CUSTOMER

ESTIMATION REFUSED

ESTIMATION WITH PARTS

ESTIMATION WITHOUT PARTS

RETURN WITHOUT REPAIR

SET EXCHANGE

REPAIR CODES

FLAG: INDICATES THE ONE MAJOR SYMPTOM/PART COMBINATION BY '1'

1.

13

46

14

21

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

1X

1X

R1

11

21

3.

.

.YT

AD

2M

2.

.

.RC

AB

10

FLAG

EXAMPLE OF USE :

SYMPTOMCODE PART NO REF. NO SECTION/PCB D

EF

EC

TC

OD

E

RE

PA

IRC

OD

E

QTY

REV01

S-795-020-10

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

ICC17First issue 07 / 98

Use isolating mains transformer - Utiliser un transformateur isolateur du secteur -Einen Trenntrafo verwenden Utilizar un transformador aislador de red - Utilizzare un trasformatore per isolarvi dalla rete!

AC MAINS

BF423TP21

RGP02-20DP45

RGP10GDP12

RGP02-20DP43

BZX55B3V3DP14

BZX55C5V6DP22

BZX85C39DP21

BZX55C51DP20

1K0PP64

TL431ACZ

IP61

- T 2.5 ALFP01

DTC113ZKTP72

1U0CP52

4U7CP54

1N0CP43

100N0CP22

220P0CP20

150P

0

CP23

470N0CP16

470N0CP17

2N2CP49

100N0CP47

1N5CP59

100P0CP61

2N2CP44

100N0CP56

v845.0

RP05

-

TP50

2R2RP10

10M0RP50

470MI0RP49

470R0RP41

470R0RP54

1K0RP59

1K0RP19

432K0RP63

100R0RP95

PP

9R0RP15

470N0CP89

100N0CP38

BZX55C18DP59

BZX55C13DP94

BZX55C3V9DP44

BZX55C5V1DP72

GP30M

DP03

GP30M

DP04

GP30M

DP02

GP30M

DP01

2SA1020-YTP44

BC857BTP86

BC857BTP42

BC547BTP14

VI2 VI1

VO1

RESETDIS

VO2

PROG

GND

DELA

Y

-

IP95

12

3

4

5

6

78

9

1N4001GP

DP18

1N4001GP

DP16

1N4001GP

DP19

1N4001GP

DP17

BCR191TP82

BCR191TP75

BCR191TP57

0RP88

BTB06-600CTP15

LL4148DP40

LL4148DP67

LL4148DP62

LL4148DP61

LL4148DP60

LL4148DP63

LL4148DP66

RGP10GDP47

RGP10GDP48

RGP10GDP46

LL4148DP24

LL4148DP70

LL4148DP89

LL4148DP85

5

--

LP50

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

21

100R0RP08

470K0RP35

1K0RP38

270R0RP761K0

RP21220R0RP22

33K0RP69

100R0RP68

10R0RP71

470K0RP73

15R0RP13

1K0RP14

1M0

0W7

RP02

1M0RP61

8K25RP64

2K74RP97

1K0RP96

1K21RP99

475R0RP62

1K0RP66

1R0RP92

10K0RP77

100K0RP27

100K0

RP26

470K0RP30

27K0RP24

100K0RP25

4K7RP70

10K0RP87

1K0RP84

470R0RP11

270R0RP12

2K2RP74

3K3RP72

6K8RP55

150K0RP75

100R0

RP48

1K5RP46

100R0RP52

5K6RP53

10R0RP57

10K0RP56

6K8RP43

6K8RP42

10K0RP80

820R00W25

RP44

1K0RP94

*RL65

270K0RP31

10K0RP45

2K2RP60

100R0

RP40

470R0

0W25

RP20

100K0RP23

2K70W43

RP85

100R0RP39

1K0RP58

220R0RP09

1K0RP81

1K2RP82

100R0RP86

470K0RP01

10K0RP90

100R0RP89

33K0RP91 10K0

RP93

470K0RP06

470K0RP16

470K0RP17

470K0RP18

470K0RP78

2K2RP83

22K0RP79

1K0RP98

10K0RP65

LP44

13 5

MC7812/CTIP87

1

2

3

JL80

JL82

JL81

BC847BTP59

BC847BTP76

BC847BTP67

BC847BTP90

BC847BTP58

BC847BTP71

+

-

V-

IN-

IN+OUT

V+IP20

6

6

57

4

8

+

-

V-

IN-

IN+OUT

V+ TS3702CDIP20

2

3

3

1

4

8

MUR120DP93

MUR160DP82

RGP10GDP41

LL4148-

DP58

RGP02-20DP50

LL4148DP56

LL4148DP57

LL4148DP42

RGP02-20DP87

BAT42DP83

1N4148-

DP53

-DP80

MUR120DP84

LL4148-

DP52

LL4148-

DP54

5460702500

LP20

1

3

4

5

7

E

C

K

A

TLP621IP50

1

23

4

-

LP84

-

LP93

-

LP82

-

LP801 2

470U0CP13

220U0400V

CP10

1MI050V

CP84

470N0CP98

10U0CP97

470U016V

CP93

100U0200V

CP80

220U025V

CP69470U0CP66

22U0CP82

100U0CP26

4U750V

CP24

470U016V

CP96

10U0CP72

22U0CP58

10U0CP73

10U0CP87

100U0CP63

100P0CP12

4N7CP03

4N7CP04

68N0CP15

100N0CP01

1N5

CP05

10N0400V

CP11

1N0CP50

330P0CP85

10N0CP92

1N0CP95

1N0CP81

10N0CP86

100P0CP83

10N0CP41

150P0CP57

330P0CP94

1

BP01

1

1

BP151

5R0RP07

LP01

13

46

-

T RP0310R0

100R0RP28

150P0CP51

330P0

CP42

PO

+5VUP

+5VUP

GNDA

USYS

U_VIDEO

+UA

+UA

STBY_ON

PGND

PGND

PGND

PGND

PGND

PGND PGND

PGND PGND

PGND PGND

PGND

PGND PGND PGND

PGND

PGND PGND

PGNDPGND

PGND

PGND

PGND

PGND

PGND

PGNDPGND

PGND

+5VDST

POWER_FAIL

U_STBY

-UA

-UA

+8V

+5VON

+5VON

U_TIMER

U_TIMER

RESET-

+33V

HEAT-GND

25V

BYW76

ON4977(BU2525AX)

ERZV14D511

1K6V

16V

0W25

0W25

0W25

25V

0W7

4kV

0W25

100V

2

(180V-260V)Mainsvoltage

2

To DEGAUSSING-COIL

350V

16V

TL431ACZ

TDA8139

275V~

275V~PGND

2W5

50V

0W25

0W25

PGND

0W25

(A,UP)

(A)

(UP)

(UP)

A2

A1G

Note :During measurements in the power supply unit- Use the primary power unit ground ( PGND ).Attention :Mesure dans le bloc alimentation- Utiliser la masse du bloc alimentation ( PGND ).Achtung :Bei Messungen im Primärnetzteil- Primärnetzteilmasse verwenden ( PGND ).Attenzione :misure nell'alimentatore primario - usare massa alimentazione primario ( PGND ).Cuidado :Medida en el bloque de alimentacion- Utilizar la masa del bloque de alimentacion ( PGND ).

Part of board connected to mains supply.Partie du châssis reliée au secteur.Primärseite des Netzteils.Parte dello châssis collegata alla rete.Parte del chassis conectar a la red.

(PP)17900

5K6RL85

470R0RL84

BL80BP8512

BC337-40TL80

BC337-40TL82

1N4148DL83

1N4148DL82

BZX55C15DL81

BZX55C27

DL80

100N0CL83

BC327-40TL83

BC327-40TL81

1K0RL83

1K0RL81

270R0RL87

270R0RL86

22R0RL80

150R0RL82

47U0

CL80

1MI0CL82

47K0PL80

BL82

12

BL81

12

UA

coilEFC-

EFC.17000.00 (TUBE 16/9)

HEARTH FIELD CONNECTION COIL

ICC17

BP85

BL80

EFC

21

MAIN

+5VUP

U_STBY

+8V

+5V

+33V

+8(0) +8V

+5V

+5V

+5V

Tube Format Usys Jumper RL65A51EFS83X191 4:3 126V JL80 4k7A59EHJ43X15 4:3 132V JL81 24kA66EHJ43X15 4:3 132V JL81 24kA59EGD048X30 4:3 126V JL80 4k7A68EGD038X30 4:3 126V JL80 4k7A68AGA25X01 4:3 126V JL80 4k7A80AEJ15X01 4:3 126V JL80 4k7W56EGV023X015 16:9 138V JL82 47kW66EGV023X015 16:9 138V JL82 47kW76EGV023X015 16:9 138V JL82 47k

42 (39,7)

5,4(3,4)

43(40)

2,7(1,7)

3(1,9)

4,1(2,5)

1,3(3)

5,7(0)

5,5(3,4)

5,5

2(1,2)

297

153(160)

150(159)

149(160)

7,2

7,2 (0)

(0)6,9 (0)

6,7(0)

-1,02(0,2)

297(316)

15VPP T=12µs

5VPP-H

1000VPP T=12µs

-1,1(0,1)

0,2(0)

2,7(2,6)

3,2(0)0,5(0,7)

0,1(0,7)

17(0)

(2,6)3,2 (0,2)

2,5 (0)

5 (0,2)

4,9 (0,2)

12 (0)

3

5 (0)

5 (0)

0 (0)

+33v

+12v

5(0)

-2,2 (0)

33 (0)

12,2 (0)

8(0)

+200V

2,8 (0)

12(0)

12(0)

0(0)

0,7(0)

0(07)

0(0,7)9,3(0)

0(0)

6,8(7,1)

+12V

(5) : standby

POWER SUPPLY - ALIMENTATION - NETZTEIL - ALIMENTAZIONE - ALIMENTACIÓN

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

ICC17First issue 07 / 98

DEV

T = 20ms T = 64µs

+8V

349

15,7

7,9

7,8

7,8

2,3

2,3

11,5

6,3

0,46,5

6,3

6,16,3

00

0

1,2

0,6

16,1

0,7

0,5

0,1

0

+8V

+5VON

15,7

15,7

+5VDST

49

49

+5VUP

+5VON55,6

5,7

0,80,8

0,3 0,1

12Vpp-V

50Vpp-V

15Vpp-H13Vpp-H

1Vpp-V

12Vpp-V

1100Vpp-H

1,2Vpp-H

0 2V

5Vpp-H5Vpp-V0

T = 20ms

0,9Vpp-F 2V0

10515550DP.17169.00

DP.17169.00

RL571K0

RL55220K0

RL5318K0

RL5410K0

18K0

RL511K0

RL56

TL55BF422

DL51RGP10M

TL52BF423

CL55330P0

CL53100N0

CL51*

CL5222N0

TL51SH2G41

P_SWITCH

RL52

1K0

GNDL GNDL GNDL

1

BF01B

1

1

BL02

1 1234567

7

(DP).17043.00

LL33

LL33

LL311 2

PZL14

500MI0

100P0CL33

CL24*

DEV

LL13

10095060

LL22

4 1

*

TL31BC847B

TL32BC337-40

RL13470MI0

RL076K19

RL0145K3

RL04*

RL05*

RL42100R0

RL4368K1

RF023K01

RL442R2

RF01100R0

RF03100R0

RL261K0

RF04*

RF07220R0

RF0833R0

RF113K9

RL12100K0

RF1339K0

RF1268K0

RL7113K0

RL7224K0

RL3722R00W25

RL362R2

RL321K0

RL332K2

RL354R70W5

RL313K3

RL341K8

RL5910K0

RL1810K0

RL096K8

RL584K7

RL401K0

RF05*

RF06*

RL03*

RL06*

RL41220R0

RL49*

RL02*

RL16

RF09

G2 BB03

FOCUS

CRT

EHT

LL05

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

1011

10500980

CL12330P0

CL15 330P0

CL251U0

TL59BC857B

PZL13

630MI0

LL26*

CL422U7

CF1010N0

CF011N0

CL21*

CL22*

CL41

100P0

CF021N0

CF03220N0

CF04CF0422N0

CF08220N0

CF111N0CF12

100P0

CL3122P0

CL364N7

CL59470N0

CL48*

CL0810N0

TL33MPS750

DL71*

DL09BZX55C5V1

DL25RGP10G

DL24RGP10G

DL11RGP10M

DL121N4148

DL19LL4148

DL48

BAV103

RL246K8

RL256K8

RL1047R0

RL48*

RL114R7

RL4733K0

RL4612K0

RL45*

RL15

1K0

RL705K6

TF01BC847B

TL02BF422

TL42BC546B

DL21BY228

DL22BYW76

DL721N4148

DL73LL4148

DL321N4148

DL331N4148

DL31BAV21

DL13RGP30D

DL14RGP15G

47K0

RB10

O(B)

O(A) +V

+V

P

P

P

+V

+V

+V

S

S

T

T+I

+I

-I

-I

SOURCECURRENT

-+

-+

-+

+

+

-+

+V

IF01

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

TDA8351

TL34BUH516TH16

TL41BD241C

TL142SC2236Y

CL11100U0

CL38220U0

16V

CL3710U0

CL32470U0

16V

CL14470U0

CL131MI0

CL16470U0

CL09

4U710U0

DF01BZW04-48

JL60

10518110

LL32

1

3

4

6

ZMM5.1DL42

*RL19

BF01A 1

1N0CL39

2K2RL39

DL77LL4148

TL71BC847C

RL764K7

RL75680R0

RL7410K0

RL7312K0

CL711N0

CL72100U0

RN1401TL72

27K0RL77

DL751N4148

DL741N4148

VGUARD

EW

VSUPPLY

VSUPPLY

VSUPPLY

+V LFB

HEAT

_2

HDRIVE

USYS

+5VO

N

GNDT GNDT

VFLB

EHT2

EHT2

VRETRACE

VRETRACE

VRETRACE

HEAT

_1

BCL

BCL

U_VI

DEO

PZL11

500MI0

FORM

AT/B

C

U_TIMER

U_DRIVER

U_TI

MER-V

EHT

SAFETY

GNDF

GNDF

GNDF

GNDF

GNDF GNDF

GNDF

GNDF GNDF

GNDF

GNDF GNDF

+8V

PO

GNDL

GNDL

GNDL

GNDL

GNDL GNDL GNDL

GNDL

GNDL

GNDL

GNDL

GNDL

GNDL GNDL

GNDL

GNDLGNDL

GNDL

GNDL

GNDLGNDL

GNDLGNDL

GNDLGNDL

GNDLGNDL

GNDL

GNDLGNDL

GNDL

GNDL

GNDL GNDL

#

to C

RT-B

ord

CRT

# see in CRT 17xxx xx partlist

(uP)

(uP)

**

(uP,

OS)

(P)(P)

(OS)

(OS)

(P)

(P)

6

(P)

(OS)

(P)

(OS)

(OS,A)

(OS)

(OS)(O

S,A)

(uP)

(OS)

(P)

(OS)

(OS)

* see in CT 17xxx xx partlist

BF01

2

2

BL01

V

*

DEV H-YOKE

-+

(DP17169.00)

*

*DP

1769

.00

DP1769.00

DP1769.00

TV ASY A59EHJ43X15 00TV ASY A66EHJ43X15 00Tube 4/3 25", 28" , MP /Vectorgun

10518330 TV PSD CT 17061 32CL21 14N0F +3.5% -3.5% 1K5VCL22 30N0F +5% -5% 400.0VCL24 470N0F +5% -5% 250.0VCL24 440N0F +5% -5% 250.0VCL41 100P0F +10% -10% 50.0VCL48 CPM 10N0F +10% 63.0VDL48 D-SLP BAV103 200.0VDL71 D-ZENER BZX55C30 30V 500MI0WJL60 WIREBARE 22JL81 0 OHM +0% 100MI0WJP80 0 OHM +0% 100MI0WLB02 LF 18U0H +7% -7%LL05 TF-DST M30FBC3 10546610 3087 A0LL22 LF 650U0H +5% -5% R 2873 A0 00LL26 LL 26U5H +10%LL26 LL 30U5H 2519 A0RF04 1R21 OHM +1% 700MI0WRF05 1R0 OHM +1% 700MI0WRF05 1R21 OHM +1% 700MI0WRF06 12R1 OHM +1% 100MI0WRL02 10K0 OHM +5% 100MI0WRL02 6K04 OHM +1% 100MI0WRL02 499R0 OHM +1% 100MI0WRL03 10K0 OHM +1% 100MI0WRL03 11K5 OHM +1% 100MI0WRL04 10K0 OHM +1% 100MI0WRL04 20K0 OHM +1% 100MI0WRL04 11K5 OHM +1% 100MI0WRL05 10K0 OHM +1% 100MI0WRL05 20K0 OHM +1% 100MI0WRL05 11K5 OHM +1% 100MI0WRL06 4K75 OHM +1% 100MI0WRL06 11K5 OHM +1% 100MI0WRL11 4R7 OHM +10% 250MI0WRL11 4R7 OHM +5% 250MI0WRL19 22K0 OHM +5% 100MI0WRL19 33K0 OHM +5% 100MI0WRL43 68K1 OHM +1% 250MI0WRL43 68K1 OHM +1% 250MI0WRL43 68K1 OHM +1% 100MI0WRL45 180K0 OHM +5% 100MI0WRL45 270K0 OHM +5% 100MI0WRL46 12K0 OHM +5% 100MI0WRL47 33K0 OHM +5% 100MI0WRL48 76K8 OHM +1% 100MI0WRL48 60K4 OHM +1% 100MI0WRL64 8K25 OHM +1% 100MI0WRL65 RCF 24K0 OHM +5% 250MI0WRV20 RMF 33K2 OHM +1% 250MI0WRV20 33K2 OHM +1% 100MI0WZL13 PROTEC MOD MP63 630MI0 A 65.0V

TV ASY W56EGV023X015 56 01TV ASY W66EGV023X015 66 00TV ASY W76EGV023X015 (A) 00Tube 16/9 24", 28",32", SF / vectorgun

10515530 TV PSD CT 17083 38CL21 15N5F +3.5% -3.5% 1K6V CL22 27N0F +5% -5% 400.0VCL24 440N0F +5% -5% 250.0VCL41 100P0F +10% -10% 50.0V CL48 100N0F +5% 63.0VCL51 290N0F +5% -5% 250.0V DL48 D-SLP BAV103 200.0VDL71 D-ZENER BZX55C24 24V 500MI0WJL60 WIREBARE 22JL82 0 OHM +0% 100MI0W LB02 LF 32U0H +4% -4%LL05 TF-DST TDS29 15314460 10LL22 LF 650U0H +5% -5% LL26 LL 30U5H 2519 A0RF05 1R21 OHM +1% 700MI0WRL02 4K99 OHM +1% 100MI0W RL03 6K49 OHM +1% 100MI0W RL04 6K49 OHM +1% 100MI0W RL05 6K49 OHM +1% 100MI0WRL06 2K37 OHM +1% 100MI0W RL19 13K0 OHM +5% 100MI0W RL45 390K0 OHM +5% 100MI0W RL48 220K0 OHM +5% 100MI0W RL49 180K0 OHM +5% 100MI0W RL65 47K0 OHM +5% 250MI0WRV20 100K0 OHM +1% 250MI0W

TV ASY A51EFS83X191 03Tube 4/3 21" OT

10555770 TV PSD CT 17035 26CL21 8N3F +3.5% -3.5% 1K6VCL22 33N0F +5% -5% 1K0VCL24 440N0F +5% -5% 250.0VCL41 1N0F +10% -10% 50.0VDL71 D-ZENER BZX55C24 24V 500MI0WJL60 WIREBARE 22JL80 0 OHM +0% 100MI0WLB02 LF 18U0H +7% -7%LL05 TF-DST M30FBC3 10555640 3087 A0LL22 LF 650U0H +5% -5% R 2873 A0 00LL26 LL 85U0H 2519 A0RF05 1R5 OHM +1% 700MI0WRF06 10R0 OHM +1% 100MI0WRL02 6K04 OHM +1% 100MI0WRL03 10K0 OHM +1% 100MI0WRL04 10K0 OHM +1% 100MI0WRL05 10K0 OHM +1% 100MI0WRL06 3K32 OHM +1% 100MI0WRL45 110K0 OHM +5% 100MI0WRL49 60K4 OHM +1% 100MI0WRL65 4K7 OHM +5% 250MI0WRV20 23K7 OHM +1% 250MI0W

TV ASY A80AEJ15X01 (A) 00Tube 4/3 33" , MP

10575830 TV PSD CT 17062 26CL21 16N2F +3.5% -3.5% 1K6VCL22 30N0F +5% -5% 400.0VCL24 560N0F +5% -5% 250.0VCL41 100P0F +10% -10% 50.0VCL48 10N0F +10% 63.0VDL48 D-SLP BAV103 200.0VDL71 D-ZENER BZX55C30 30V 500MI0WJL60 WIREBARE 22JL80 0 OHM +0% 100MI0WLB02 LF 32U0H +4% -4%LL05 TF-DST TDS29 TBD 11LL22 LF 650U0H +5% -5% R 2873 A0 00LL26 LL 26U5H +10%RF05 1R21 OHM +1% 700MI0WRF06 10R0 OHM +1% 100MI0WRL02 6K04 OHM +1% 100MI0WRL03 4K75 OHM +1% 100MI0WRL04 4K75 OHM +1% 100MI0WRL05 4K75 OHM +1% 100MI0WRL06 6K81 OHM +1% 100MI0WRL19 13K0 OHM +5% 100MI0WRL45 150K0 OHM +5% 100MI0WRL48 76K8 OHM +1% 100MI0WRL49 560K0 OHM +5% 100MI0WRL65 RCF 4K7 OHM +5% 250MI0WRV20 RMF 23K7 OHM +1% 250MI0W

TV ASY A59EGD048X30 19TV ASY A68EGD038X30 (A) 68 00Tube 4/3 25" SF, 29" SF

10515520 TV PSD CT 17071 26CL21 16N2F +3.5% -3.5% 1K6VCL22 30N0F +5% -5% 400.0VCL24 510N0F +5% -5% 250.0VCL41 100P0F +10% -10% 50.0VCL48 10N0F +10% 63.0VDL48 D-SLP BAV103 200.0VDL71 D-ZENER BZX55C30 30V 500MI0WJL60 WIREBARE 22JL80 0 OHM +0% 100MI0WLB02 LF 32U0H +4% -4%LL05 TF-DST TDS29 TBD 13LL22 LF 650U0H +5% -5%LL26 LL 26U5H +10%RF05 RMF 1R0 OHM +1% 700MI0WRL02 6K8 OHM +5% 100MI0WRL03 4K75 OHM +1% 100MI0WRL04 4K75 OHM +1% 100MI0WRL05 4K75 OHM +1% 100MI0WRL06 4K75 OHM +1% 100MI0WRL19 15K0 OHM +5% 100MI0WRL45 180K0 OHM +5% 100MI0WRL48 100K0 OHM +5% 100MI0WRL49 300K0 OHM +5% 100MI0WRL65 4K7 OHM +5% 250MI0WRV20 33K2 OHM +1% 250MI0W

Indicates critical safety components, and identical components should be used for replacement. Only then can the operational safety be garanteed.

Le remplacement des éléments de sécurité (repérés avec le symbole ) par des composants non homologués selon la Norme CEI 65 entraine la non-conformité de l'appareil.Dans ce cas, la responsabilité du fabricant n'est plus engagée.

Wenn Sicherheitsteile (mit dem Symbol gekennzeichnet) durch nicht normgerechte Teile ersetzt werden, erlischt die Haftung des Herstellers.

La sostituzione degli elementi di sicurezza (contrassegnati con il segno ) con componenti non omologati secondo la norma CEI 65 comporta la non conformitá dell'apparecchio.In tal caso é “esclusa la responsabilità” del costruttore.

La subtitución de elementos de seguridad (marcados con el simbolo ) por componentes no homologados segun la norma CEI 65, provoca la no conformidad del aparato.En ese caso, el fabricante cesa de ser responsable.

BB02

TUBE 16/9

MAIN

SCANNING - BALAYAGE - ABLENKUNG - BARRIDO - SCANSIONE

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

ICC17First issue 07 / 98

47U0CR10

2N2CR96

470N0CR99

BCR141TR40

BCR141TR13

DTC113ZKTR20

BCR141TR23

10U0

LR20

10K0RR69

100R0RR66

10K0RR49

100R0RR12100R0RR17

1K5RR011K5RR02

39K0RR0339K0RR04

39K0RR08

4K7RR18

10K0RR05

10K0RR06

10K0RR09

10K0RR621K0RR63

150R0RR70560R0RR72560R0RR74560R0RR76

1K0RR781K0RR806K8RR90

10K0RR58

10K0RR56

5K6

RR91

5K6RR931K0RR94

5K6RR9515K0RR96

1K0RR57100R0RR55

3K3RR33

3K3RR32

220R0RR31

220R

0RR

30

*RR44

1K0

RR43

100R

0RR

421K

0RR

4110

0R0

RR40

10K0RR5010K0RR51

10K0RR46

0JR51

6K8RR53

6K8RR52

100R0RR16

22K0RR14

4K7RR15

22K0RR21

1K0RR22

10K0RR20

100R

0RR

45

4K7RR64

1K5RR71

1K5RR73

1K5RR75

1K5RR77

6K8RR8210K0

RR81

33K0RR60

1K0RR10

100R0RR68

*

RR48

LR02

12

BC857BTR15

470R0RR86

2K2RR87

10N0CR21

100N0CR01

NICR03

82P0CR04

100N0CR12

47P0CR09

47P0CR08

47P0CR07

47P0CR06

47P0CR05

100N0CR20

220P0CR90220N0CR91

4N7CR93

1N0CR94

4N7CR95

82P0CR98

100P0CR32

100P0CR33

100N0CR30

10N0CR22

22P0CR97

22P0CR92

100N0CR15

100N0CR11

1N0CR41

1N0CR23

1N0CR80

1N0CR24

(RP).17001.00

(RP).17000.00

OSCIN

P4.2/PWM2

PWM

3P4

.3/INT2

P5.0/SCK/

INT7

P2.0

/

P3.4/RWN

P3.6/ASN

MMU4MMU2MMU1ADDR14ADDR13

R/WN

OSCOUT

VDDMGNDM

P5.1/SDI/SDO/INT1

ADDR

2

ADDR10

ADDR

1AD

DR0

DAT7

DAT6

DAT0

DAT5

DAT1

DAT4

DAT2

DAT3

R

B

P4.0/PWM0P4.1/PWM1

P4.4

/PW

M4

P4.5

/PW

M5

P4.6

/PW

M6

P4.7

/PW

M7/

INT3

P2.5

/INT4

/AIN

3/VS

O2

P2.4

/NM

IP2

.3/IN

T6/V

SO1

P2.2

/INT0

/AIN

2P2

.1/IN

T5/A

IN1

P3.5

MMU5

MMU3MMU0 AD

DR15

ADDR

12AD

DR7

ADDR

6

ADDR8

ADDR

5

ADDR9

ADDR

4

ADDR11

ADDR

3

DSNGNDA

CVBS1CVBS2TEST0

CVBSOTXCF

JTRSTOMCFMRESETPXFMVDDAWSCFWSCR

HSYNCVSYNC

G

FB

GND

VDD

P0.0

P0.1

P0.2

P3.7/CSO/RESETI

#IR01

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40

41

42

43

44

45

46

47

48

49

50

51

52

53

54

55

56

57

58

59

60

61

62

63

64

65666768697071727374757677787980

10U0LR10

BC847BTR60

BAT42DR10

LL4148DR21

LL4148DR22

1N4148DR20

1N4148DR23

LL4148DR24

LL42DR05

BR08

1

4M0

QR01

NCVSS

WC

SDA

SCL

MOD

E/PR

E

E

VCC

ST24C08MIR03

12345 6 7 8

BR01BK01

1

1

23456789

9

A18

Q7

A17

OE

CE

Q6Q5Q4Q3

Q2Q1Q0

VCC

A14A13A8A9

A11

A10A1A0

GND

A2A3A4A5A6A7A12A15A16VPP

IR02

123456789

10111213141516 17

181920212223242526272829303132

MX27C4000MC-90

DAT7

DAT7

DAT6

DAT6

DAT3

DAT3

ADDR

12

ADDR12

ADDR9ADDR9

MMU0 MMU0

KEYB_B

DAT4

DAT4

KEYB_A

ADDR10

ADDR10

TRAP_INFO

DAT1

DAT1

DAT2

DAT2

ADDR

15

ADDR15

+5VUP

AVS1

RESET-

RESET-

KEY_IN_2KEY_IN_1

SCL

GNDA

GNDA

GNDA

GNDA

GNDA

GNDA

GNDA

GNDA

GNDA

GNDA

VFLBLFB

AV3_PORT

B_OSDG_OSD

CVBSTXT

AVS2

STBY

_ON

STBY_ON

MUT

E-

AV_L

INK

ADDR14

ADDR14

U_STBY

SDA

DAT0

DAT0

ADDR

0

ADDR0

ADDR

1

ADDR1

ADDR

2

ADDR2

ADDR

3

ADDR3

ADDR

7

ADDR7

ADDR

5

ADDR5

ADDR

6

ADDR6

POW

ER_F

AIL

DAT5

DAT5

R_OSD

+8V

PO

FB_OSD

IR

RESE

T_M

SP-

ADDR13

ADDR13GNDP

GNDP

ADDR11ADDR11

ADDR8

ADDR8

ADDR

4

ADDR4

FORMAT

MMU1

MMU1

MMU2

MMU2

BCC

ST92R195 CUT 2.2 JAM (10588150)ST92R195 CUT 2.2 JAL (10592030)

# IR01

RP 17001 00RP 17000 00

* = value see partlist DP 17... 00

*

16/9RR484/3RR44

DSN

DSN

Form

at-d

etec

t

Stby-PortLed-Port

Po-Port

(OS)

(OS,

A)(O

S,A)(A)

(A)

(P)

(P)

(P)

(P)

(P)

(P)

(P)(P

)

(P)

VDDA

(DP)(DP)

(DP)

(DP)

(OS)

(OS)(OS)(OS)(OS)

(OS)

(OS)

(OS)(OS)

4M0

FCB

MAIN

U_STBY

VDDA

+5VUP

+5VUP

5V_VCC

5V_VCC

5V_VCC

5V_VCC

5V_VCC

5V_VCC

5V_VCC

5V_VCC5V_VCC

5V_VCC

U_STBY

+8V

+8V

+5V_STBY

+5V_STBY

+5V_STBY

6 = TV

0 = TV

4,8 = TV0 = Stdby

+5V_STBY

U_STBY

0,3 =TV

0,7 = TV

0 = TV4,8 = TV

4,8 = TV0 = Mute

0 = Mute

0

0,2 = Stdby

0 = Stdby

0 = Mute

0,15 = Stdby

0 = Stdby

7,1= Stdby

7,1= Stdby6,7 = TV5,3 = Stdby

6,8 = TV7,1= Stdby

VDDA

VDDA

5

6,8

CONTROL MICROPROCESSOR - MICROPROCESSEUR DE COMMANDE - MIKROPROZESSOR - MICROPROCESSORE DEI COMANDI - MICROPROCESADOR DE LOS MANDOS

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

ICC17First issue 07 / 98

T = 20ms T = 64µs

0

33,55

4 = Secam0 = Pal

0 = Secam5 = Pal

3,7 = Secam0 = Pal

0 = Secam5,1 = Pal

8

5

2,5

2,5

1,8

1,8

4,9

2,5

2,5

2,3

3

2,3 8

3

00

4,6

2,3 2,3 1,1

3

0,5

2,8

3

8

2,3

4,6 2,1

2,50

0

3,6

2,2

3,8

3,8

2,8

3,4

4,9

4,8

6,8

7,9 7,91,2 3,5 0 4 3 3,3 3,5 2,55,5

2,53

3,8

3,8

3,8

3

3

3

0

0

2,3

4

3,9

3,9

6Vpp-H6Vpp-V

4Vpp-H

3,2Vpp-H

3,5Vpp-H

2Vpp-H

3,8Vpp-H

1V

1V

1,2V0

0

0

3,8Vpp-H

3,5Vpp-H

1,8V

1,5V1,5V

2V

1,5Vpp-V0 1,5V

Standard picture carrier[MHz]

sound carrier[MHz]

SWO1 SWO2 MOD L’FA VSW IFS STM

B/G 38.90 0 1 0 0 0 0 0I 38.90 32.90/32.35 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

D/K 38.90 32.40/32.65 0 1 0 0 0 0 0K’ 38.90 32.40/33.05 0 0 0 0 0 0 0L 38.90 32.40/33.05 0 0 1 0 0 0 0L' 33.90 40.40 1 0 1 1 0 0 0AV X X X X X X 0 X X

+5VON

+8V

DTC144EKTI45

DTC144EKTI10

DTC144EKTI30

100N0CI55

1N0CV09

4N7CI61

1N0CC11

22N0CV15

22N0CV17

22N0CV16

22N0CV12

22N0CV11

22N0CV10

1N0CV14

220N

0

CC10

2N7

CV20

100N0CV02

100N0CC05

3N3CC04

18P0

CC0718P0

CC06

4N7CV22

100N0CC021N0

CV25

1N0CV23

1N0CV24

82P0CV05

82P0CV06

82P0CV07

12P0CI05

12P0CI03

6P8CI04

6P8CI02

15P0CV27

2U2LX59

470N0LI10

6U8LV06

6U8LV05

6U8LV07

2U2LX62

560R0RI63

680R0RI50

56R0RI64

75R0RX08

2K2RI33

100R0RV03

1K5RI31

75R0RX39

150R

0

RX19

220R0RX28

220R0RV10

2K7RH03

150R0RX57

100R0RI07

1K5RI42

220R0RV09

2K2RX47

75R0RX56

100R0RX59

75R0RX05

390R0RI51

82R0RI04

4K7RI03

75R0RX06

75R0RX07

150R

0

RX25

150R

0

RX24

150R

0

RX23

150R

0

RX22

75R0RX09

75R0RX58

220R0RX27

0RX43

75R0RX18

100R0RH02

100R0RH10

15K0RH04

3K9RH05

2K2RI41

1R0RV01

2K2RX13

180R0RI65

160R0RI66

39K2RV25

2K2RI32

10K0RX03

10K0RX02

0RX14

10R0RX17

4K7RV19

*RV20

220R0RI59

220R0RI58

1K0RI61

10R0RX16

31M9-

FI02123

4

56

7

8

40M4-

FI01123

456

7

8

BX501234

100N0CH01

1K0RI60

100R0RV31

100R0RV30

100R0RV14

100R0RV07

100R0RV06

100R0RV05

6K8RV15

100K0RC05

15K0RV17

22K0RV16

1R0RC02

8K2RV12

2K7

RV08

100R0RV18

1K0RV13

BC547BTX15

BC547BTX45

BC847BTI60

BC847BTV10

BZX55B33DH01

-

FI10

1

2

3

4

5

8

9

10

BA782SDI40

1N4148DH04

BAV103DX62

BAV103DX59

-FI30

123

456

7

8

NC IF+30VNCNC+5V

DACLASNCAGC

-

NH01

12

3 4 5 6 9 1011

LL4148DV09

BA782SDI30

1N4148DV19

330P0CX02

1N0CI58

22N0CI43

15P0CI09

1N0CI59

22N0CI72

100N0CX47

10N0CI60

100N0CV26

10N0CI56

100N0CX17

100N0CX18

22N0CX60

330P

0

CX03

22N0CX61

1N0CI10

1N0CI12

22N0CI45

1N0CX19

22N0CI47

10N0CI53

27P0CX58

GNDO2

O1

I2

I1-

FI20

1

2

3

4

5

4M433619

QC01

3M579545QC02

1U0

CC01

10U0CX62

100U0CV03

100U0CC031U0

CV21

10U0CX59

10U0CX15

470U0CH03

10U0CI63

2U2CI54

100U0CH08

2U2CI57

4U7CV08

4U7CV01

4U7CV04

2U2CI50

BX02123456789

101112131415161718192021

BX01123456789

101112131415161718192021

Safety PartWhen repairing, use original part only

Piece de securiteN'utilisez que les pieces d'origine

Bei Ersatz nur Originalteil verwendenSicherheitsbauteil

(OS).17055.00

10U0LH10

3U3LI50

IN1bGN

DIN

2bCT

LbOU

TbOU

TaCT

LaIN

2a

IN1a

VCC

BA7604NIX01

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

-

FI50

1

2

3

BX04123456

BV01123456

AMOU

T

VP1

SW01

IFVC02

IFVC01

QSS0

SIFAGC

SIFIN2

SIFIN1

CVBS

10

SW02

GND2

RO

BCLIN

RI

GI

BI

RGBIN

LUMIN

LUMOUT

RI2

GI2

BI2

RGBIN2

BYO

RYO

BYI

RYI

REFO

XTAL1

XTAL2

GOBoBLKI

N

CVBS

ext

SECP

LL

CVBS

20

GND1

CVBS

INT

CVBS

/Y

CHRO

MA

DET

VP2

DECD

IG

HOUT

FBIS

O

PH2L

F

PH1L

F

EWD

VRDA

VDRB

DECBG

SDA

SCL

IFVO

PLLF

NC

AGCOUT

DECAGC

IREF

VCS

EHTO

IFIN2

IFIN1

IV01

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

43

44

45

46

47

48

49

50

51

52535455565758596061626364

TDA8855H

G_SC

G_SC

+5VO

N

+5VON

+5VON

R_SC

R_SC

CVBS1_OUT

SAFETY

AV2/

AV3_

Y/CV

BS

AV2/

AV3_

Y/CV

BS

VGUARD

GNDV

GNDV GNDV GNDV

GNDV

GNDV

GNDVGNDV

GNDVGNDVGNDV

GNDV

GNDV

GNDV

GNDV

GNDV

GNDV

GNDV

GNDV

GNDV

GNDV

GNDV

GNDV

GNDV

GNDV

GNDV

GNDV

GNDV

GNDV

GNDV

CHRO

MA_

AV2/

AV3

CHRO

MA_

AV2/

AV3

CVBS2_OUT

G_OSD

B_OSD

CVBS2_IN

TRAP

_INF

O

AVS2

AV2_

IN_L

AV1_

CVBS

_IN

AV1_

CVBS

_IN

AV3_

PORT

AV2_

CVBS

_OUT

AV2_

CVBS

_OUT

CHROMA_IN

CVBS

TXT

AV1_

IN_R

AVS1

AV1_

IN_L

CVBS1_IN

AV2_

OUT_

R

AV1_

OUT_

L

+33V

AV1_

OUT_

R

AV2_

OUT_

L

GND1

GND1

GND1

GND1

GND1

GND1

GND1

GND1

GND1

GND1

GND1

GND1GND1

GND1

GND1GND1GND1 GND1GND1

GND1

GND1

GND1

GND1

GND1

GND1

SIF

GNDAU

GNDAU

GNDAU

FB_SC

FB_S

C

SCL

SCL

SCL

B_SC

B_SC

FB_OSD

AV2_

IN_R

SDA

SDA

SDA

IFAV

1_CV

BS_O

UT

AV1_

CVBS

_OUT

AV3_

R

+8V

+8V

+8V

+8V

AV3_

L

GND2

GND2

GND2

GND2

GND2

GND2

GND2

GND2

GND2

GND2

GND2GND2

GND2

GND2GND2

GND2

GND2

GND2

GND2

GND2

GNDT

GNDT

GNDT

GNDT

GNDT

GNDT

GNDT

GNDT

GNDTGNDT

GNDT

GNDT

GNDT

GNDT

GNDT GNDT

GNDT

R_OSD

BCL

GNDA

EHT

+5VUP

+5VU

P(D

P)

(uP)

77M8

K9650M

K6257K

91P0

* = see CT 17xxx partslist

(uP)

TDA8855H

4M433619

5M74

CTT5010

(P) (D

P)

(DP)

(DP)

(DP)

(P)

(P)

(P)

(P)

AV1

AV2

(A)

(A)(A

)

(uP)

(uP)

(uP)

(uP)

(uP)

(uP)

(uP)

(DP)

(DP)

(DP)

(DP)

(DP)

(DP)

CRRO

MA

FRON

T-CO

NNEC

TOR

AV3

Y/CV

BS/A

V3

(A)

(A)

(A)

(A)

(A)

(A)

(A)

(A)

GNDSCLSDA

AM/A

F(A)

-V+V EW LFB

HDRI

VE

+8V

+8V

TO C

RT B

OARD

(uP)

(uP)

68p

SW02

SW01

1

6

1

6

CRT

FCB

BJ04

MAIN

RF/FI/ SCART INTERFACE/VIDEO SIGNAL PROCESSING -HF/FI INTERFACE PERITELEVISION/TRAITEMENT LUMINANCE CHROMINANCE - HF/ZF/ SCART INTERFACE/VIDEOSIGNALVERARBEITUNG - RF/FI /PRESA PERITEL/ELABORAZIONE VIDEO - RF/FI /EUROCONECTOR / TRATAMENTO VIDEO

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

ICC17First issue 07 / 98

T = 20ms T = 64µs

0

33,55

4 = Secam0 = Pal

0 = Secam5 = Pal

8

5

2,5

2,5

1,8

1,8

4,9

2,5

2,5

2,3

3

2,3 8

3

4,6

2,3 2,3 1,1

3

0,5

2,8

3

8

2,3

4,6

2,1

2,50

0

3,6

2,2

3,8

3,8

2,8

3,4

4,9

4,8

6,8

7,9 7,91,2 3,5 4 3 3,3 3,5 2,55,5

2,53

3,8

3,8

3,8

3

3

3

0

0

2,3

4

3,9

3,9

6Vpp-H6Vpp-V

4Vpp-H

3,2Vpp-H

3,5Vpp-H

2Vpp-H

3,8Vpp-H

1V

1V

1,2V0

0

0

3,8Vpp-H

3,5Vpp-H

1,8V

1,5V1,5V

2V

+5VON+8V

+8V

+5VON

+8V

+5VON

+5VUP 1,5Vpp-V0 1,5V

DTC144EKTI10

100N0CI55

1N0CV09

4N7CI61

1N0CC11

22N0CV15

22N0CV17

22N0CV16

22N0CV12

22N0CV11

22N0CV10

1N0CV14

220N

0

CC10

2N7

CV20

100N0CV02

100N0CC05

3N3CC04

18P0

CC0718P0

CC06

4N7CV22

100N0CC021N0

CV25

1N0CV23

1N0CV24

82P0CV05

82P0CV06

82P0CV07

12P0CI05

12P0CI03

6P8CI04

6P8CI02

15P0CV27

2U2LX59

470N0LI10

6U8LV06

6U8LV05

6U8LV07

2U2LX62

560R0RI63

680R0RI50

56R0RI64

75R0RX08

2K2RI33

100R0RV03

75R0RX39

150R

0

RX19

220R0RX28

220R0RV10

2K7RH03

150R0RX57

100R0RI07

220R0RV09

2K2RX47

75R0RX56

100R0RX59

75R0RX05

390R0RI51

82R0RI04

4K7RI03

75R0RX06

75R0RX07

150R

0

RX25

150R

0

RX24

150R

0

RX23

150R

0

RX22

75R0RX09

75R0RX58

220R0RX27

0RX43

75R0RX18

100R0RH02

100R0RH10

15K0RH04

3K9RH05

2K2RI41

1R0RV01

2K2RX13

180R0RI65

160R0RI66

39K2RV25

2K2RI32

10K0RX03

10K0RX02

0RX14

10R0RX17

4K7RV19

*RV20

1K0RI61

10R0RX16

31M9-

FI02123

4

56

7

8

40M4-

FI01123

456

7

8

BX501234

100N0CH01

1K0RI60

100R0RV31

100R0RV30

100R0RV14

100R0RV07

100R0RV06

100R0RV05

6K8RV15

100K0RC05

15K0RV17

22K0RV16

1R0RC02

8K2RV12

2K7

RV08

100R0RV18

1K0RV13

BC547BTX15

BC547BTX45

BC847BTI60

BC847BTV10

BZX55B33DH01

1N4148DH04

BAV103DX62

BAV103DX59

-FI30

123

456

7

8

NC IF+30VNCNC+5V

DACLASNCAGC

-

NH01

12

3 4 5 6 9 1011

LL4148DV09

1N4148DV19

330P0CX02

22N0CI43

15P0CI09

22N0CI72

100N0CX47

10N0CI60

100N0CV26

10N0CI56

100N0CX17

100N0CX18

22N0CX60

330P

0

CX03

22N0CX61

1N0CI10

1N0CI12

1N0CX19

22N0CI47

10N0CI53

27P0CX58

GNDO2

O1

I2

I1-

FI20

1

2

3

4

5

4M433619

QC01

3M579545QC02

1U0

CC01

10U0CX62

100U0CV03

100U0CC031U0

CV21

10U0CX59

10U0CX15

470U0CH03

10U0CI63

2U2CI54

100U0CH08

2U2CI57

4U7CV08

4U7CV01

4U7CV04

2U2CI50

BX02123456789

101112131415161718192021

BX01123456789

101112131415161718192021

Safety PartWhen repairing, use original part only

Piece de securiteN'utilisez que les pieces d'origine

Bei Ersatz nur Originalteil verwendenSicherheitsbauteil

10515740OS.17056.00

20.01.98

10U0LH10

3U3LI50

IN1b

GND

IN2b

CTLb

OUTb

OUTa

CTLa

IN2a

IN1a

VCC

BA7604NIX01

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

-

FI50

1

2

3

BX041

1

23456

6

BV011 123456 6

AMOU

T

VP1

SW01

IFVC02

IFVC01

QSS0

SIFAGC

SIFIN2

SIFIN1

CVBS

10

SW02

GND2

RO

BCLIN

RI

GI

BI

RGBIN

LUMIN

LUMOUT

RI2

GI2

BI2

RGBIN2

BYO

RYO

BYI

RYI

REFO

XTAL1

XTAL2

GOBoBLKI

N

CVBS

ext

SECP

LL

CVBS

20

GND1

CVBS

INT

CVBS

/Y

CHRO

MA

DET

VP2

DECD

IG

HOUT

FBIS

O

PH2L

F

PH1L

F

EWD

VRDA

VDRB

DECBG

SDA

SCL

IFVO

PLLF

NC

AGCOUT

DECAGC

IREF

VCS

EHTO

IFIN2

IFIN1

IV01

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

43

44

45

46

47

48

49

50

51

52535455565758596061626364

TDA8855H

G_SC

G_SC

+5VO

N

R_SC

R_SC

CVBS1_OUT

SAFETY

AV2/

AV3_

Y/CV

BS

AV2/

AV3_

Y/CV

BS

VGUARD

GNDV

GNDV GNDV GNDV

GNDV

GNDV

GNDVGNDV

GNDVGNDVGNDV

GNDV

GNDV

GNDV

GNDV

GNDV

GNDV

GNDV

GNDV

GNDV

GNDV

GNDV

GNDV

GNDV

GNDV

GNDV

GNDV

GNDV

GNDV

GNDV

CHRO

MA_

AV2/

AV3

CHRO

MA_

AV2/

AV3

CVBS2_OUT

G_OSD

B_OSD

CVBS2_IN

TRAP

_INF

O

AVS2

AV2_

IN_L

AV1_

CVBS

_IN

AV1_

CVBS

_IN

AV3_

PORT

AV2_

CVBS

_OUT

AV2_

CVBS

_OUT

CHROMA_IN

CVBS

TXT

AV1_

IN_R

AVS1

AV1_

IN_L

CVBS1_IN

AV2_

OUT_

R

AV1_

OUT_

L

+33V

AV1_

OUT_

R

AV2_

OUT_

L

GND1

GND1

GND1

GND1

GND1

GND1

GND1

GND1

GND1

GND1

GND1GND1

GND1

GND1GND1GND1 GND1GND1

GND1

GND1

GND1

GND1

GND1

GND1

SIF

GNDAU

GNDAU

GNDAU

FB_SC

FB_S

C

SCL

SCL

SCL

B_SC

B_SC

FB_OSD

AV2_

IN_R

SDA

SDA

SDA

IF

AV1_

CVBS

_OUT

AV1_

CVBS

_OUT

AV3_

R

+8V

+8V

+8V

AV3_

L

GND2

GND2

GND2

GND2

GND2

GND2

GND2GND2

GND2GND2

GND2

GND2GND2

GND2

GND2

GND2

GND2

GNDT

GNDT

GNDT

GNDT

GNDT

GNDT

GNDT

GNDT

JI50 0

GNDTGNDT

GNDT

GNDT

GNDT

GNDT

GNDT

R_OSD

BCL

GNDA

EHT

+5VU

P(D

P)

(uP)

77M8

K9650M

GNDO2

O1

I2

I1-

FI10

1

2

3

4

5

GND2

GND

QFWG3970M

91P0

* = see CT 17xxx partslist

(uP)

TDA8855H

4M433619

5M74

CTT5010

(P) (D

P)

(DP)

(DP)

(DP)

(P)

(P)

(P)

(P)

AV1

AV2

(A)

(A)(A

)

(uP)

(uP)

(uP)

(uP)

(uP)

(uP)

(uP)

(DP)

(DP)

(DP)

(DP)

(DP)

(DP)

CRRO

MA

FRON

T-CO

NNEC

TOR

AV3

Y/CV

BS/A

V3

(A)

(A)

(A)

(A)

(A)

(A)

(A)

(A)

GNDSCLSDA

AM/A

F(A)

-V+V EW LFB

HDRI

VE

+8V

TO C

RT B

OARD

(uP)

(uP)

68p

CRT

FCB

BJ04

RF/FI/ SCART INTERFACE/VIDEO SIGNAL PROCESSING -HF/FI INTERFACE PERITELEVISION/TRAITEMENT LUMINANCE CHROMINANCE - HF/ZF/ SCART INTERFACE/VIDEOSIGNALVERARBEITUNG - RF/FI /PRESA PERITEL/ELABORAZIONE VIDEO - RF/FI /EUROCONECTOR/TRATAMENTO VIDEO

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

ICC17First issue 07 / 98

(AP).17000.00

10U0CS43

3U3CS46

10U0CS18

10U0CS17

220U0CS14

10U0CS67

10U0CS66

10U0CS65

10U0CS64

4U7CS75

4U7CS76

1U0CS77

1U0CS78

470U0CS84

470U0CS90

470U0CS91

470U0CS25

470U0

°1MI0

CS85

220U0CS22

1U0CS35

1U0CS50

1U0CS51

1U0CS52

1U0CS53

1U0CS82

100N0CS81

100N0CS47

100N0CS42

27R0RS05

4R7RS20

4R7RS87

22K0RS84

4R7RS88

22K0RS83

18R0RS12

BS90

12

BS91

12

10N0CS32

10N0CS23

1N0CS31

10N0CS15

820P0CS55

820P0CS54

820P0CS56

820P0CS57

1N0CS60

1N0CS61

1N0CS62

1N0CS63

1N0CS73

1N0CS92

1N0CS93

470P0CS80

2N2CS26

470P0CS79

1N0CS27 1N0

CS74470P0CS36

470P0CS39

1P0CS41

1N0CS94

1N0CS95

1N0CS24

47P0CS02

22N0CS01

47P0CS34

47P0CS33

1N0

CS13

1N0

CS12

1N0

CS11

1N0

CS10

1P0CS40

1N0

CS04

100N0CS87

100N0CS88

SicherheitsbauteilBei Ersatz nur Originalteil verwenden

N'utilisez que les pieces d'originePiece de securite

When repairing, use original part onlySafety Part

15U0LS41

15U0LS40

4U7LS10

2U2LS60

2U2LS61

2U2LS62

2U2LS63

NC

NCNCNC

ASG3

TESTEN

NC

NC

NCNCNC

I2S_DA_IN2

ADR_CLADR_WSADR_DA

I2S_DA_IN1

NC

NCNC

CAPL_AAHVSUP

SC2_OUT_RSC2_OUT_LVREF1SC1_OUT_RSC1_OUT_L

CAPL_MAHVSSAGNDC

SC3_IN_LSC3_IN_RASG2SC2_IN_LSC2_IN_RASG1SC1_IN_LSC1_IN_RVREFTOPMONO_INAVSSAVSUPANA_IN1+ANA_IN-ANA_IN2+

XTAL_INXTAL_OUT

DACM_LDACM_R

VREF2DACA_LDACA_RRESETQ

DVSSDVSUP

I2S_DA_OUTI2S_WSI2S_CLI2C_DAI2C_CL

STANDBYQADR_SEL

D_CTR_OUT0D_CTR_OUT1

AUD_CL_OUT

-

IS40

123456789

101112131415161718192021222324252627282930313233

34353637383940414243444546474849505152535455565758596061626364

4U7LS25

10U0LS20

1N0CS05

1N0CS06

1N0CS07

1N0CS08

1N0CS09

4N7CS59

BZX55C3V6DS90

BC847BTS01

BC847BTS81

18M432QS40

6K8RS54

18K0RS96

10K0RS92

100K0RS95

47R0RS41

6K8RS53

6K8RS52

6K8RS51

6K8RS50

470R0RS63

470R0RS62

470R0RS61

470R0RS60

100K0RS67

100K0RS66

100K0RS65

100K0RS64

4K7RS75

4K7RS76

4K7RS78

4K7RS77

IS40 = SUB AMVD 19100 00 => VIRTUAL DOLBY = SUB AMDP 17001 00 => DOLBY PROLOGIC = MSP 3410D-PP => STEREO / NICAM = MSP 3400C-PP-C5 => STEREO 2X10W

560R0RS86

560R0RS85

18K0RS93

1K0RS80

1K0RS79

10K0RS27

220R0RS29

47R0RS40

470R0RS43

470R0RS42

180R0RS04

6K8RS02

47R0RS03

1K5RS01

6K8RS55

100R0RS99

10K0RS90

+8V

+8V

1K0RS97

15K0RS98

-IS80

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

89

1011

BS80

BQ09

1

152 3 4 5

L

SDA

R

AV1_IN_R

-UA

AM/AF

AV1_OUT_R

AV2_OUT_L

AV2_OUT_R

AV1_OUT_L

AV2_IN_L

AV2_IN_R

AV1_IN_L

GND_HEATSINK

+UA

SCL

+5VON

AV3_R

MUTE-

+8V

SIFGNDP

GNDP

GNDP

GNDP

GNDP

GNDP

GNDP

GNDP

GNDP

GNDPGNDP

GNDP

GNDP

RESET_MSP-

GND-HEATSINK

DVSS

DVSS

DVSS

DVSS

DVSSDVSS DVSS

DVSS

DVSS

DVSS

DVSS

DVSS

DVSS

DVSS

DVSS

15K0RS91

GNDP

AV3_L

GNDV

GNDV

GNDT AHVSS

AHVSS

AHVSS

AHVSS

AHVSS

AHVSS

AHVSSAHVSSAHVSSAHVSS

AHVSS

AHVSS

AHVSS

AHVSS AHVSS

AHVSS

AHVSSAHVSS

AHVSSAHVSS

AHVSS AHVSS AHVSS AHVSS AHVSS AHVSS AHVSS AHVSS

AHVSS AHVSS

AHVSS

AHVSS

AHVS

S

AHVSSAHVSS

AHVS

S

AHVSS AHVSSAHVSS AHVSS

AHVSS AHVSS

AHVSS

AHVSS

AHVSS

AHVSSAHVSS

AHVSS AHVSS

AHVSS

AHVSS

TDA7269

(DP)

(OS)

(OS)

(OS)

(OS)

(OS)

(OS)

(OS)(OS)

(OS)

(OS)

(OS)

(OS)

MSP3400C-PP-C6

(FM-Stereo)

(P)

(P)(uP)

(uP)

(uP)

(uP)

(P)

GNDP

°VIRTUAL DOLBY

°VIRTUAL DOLBY

°

FCB

MAIN

BS02

BA002

12

2

3

13

GNDP

AMDP

4,8

25,4

4,2

14,61515

15

14,814,7

15

25,433

4,94,9

5

5

3,73,7

3,7

3,7

3,73,7

3,73,7

3,73,7

03,7

4,91,5

3,76,8

6,97,8

00

0,2

4,1

33

0,9

AMPLIFIER SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM - SCHEMA DE L’AMPLIFICATEUR - SCHALTBILD AUDIO-SIGNALVERABEITUNG - SCHEMA DELL’ AMPLIFICATOREESQUEMA DEL AMPLIFICADOR(STEREO)

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

29ICC17

30 First issue 07 / 98

+8V+8V

+8V

(AP).17002.00

10U0CS43

3U3CS46

10U0CS18

10U0CS17

220U0CS14

10U0CS67

10U0CS66

4U7CS76

1U0CS78

470U0CS84

470U0CS90

470U0CS25

1MI0CS85

220U0CS22

1U0CS35

1U0CS50

1U0CS51

1U0CS82

100N0CS81

100N0CS47

100N0CS42

18K0RS96

10K0RS92

100K0RS95

47R0RS41

6K8RS51

6K8RS50

470R0RS63

470R0RS62

100K0RS67

100K0RS66

4K7RS76

4K7RS78

4K7RS77

560R0RS86

560R0RS85

18K0RS93

1K0RS80

1K0RS79

10K0RS27

220R0RS29

47R0RS40

470R0RS43

470R0RS42

180R0RS04

6K8RS02

47R0RS03

1K5RS01

15K0RS98

1K0RS97

100R0RS99

10N0CS32

10N0CS23

1N0CS31

10N0CS15

820P0CS55

820P0CS54

1N0CS62

1N0CS63

1N0CS92

470P0CS80

2N2CS26

470P0CS79

1N0CS27 1N0

CS74

1P0CS41

1N0CS94

1N0CS24

47P0CS02

22N0CS01

47P0CS34

47P0CS33

1P0CS40

1N0

CS04

1N0CS73

1N0CS61

1N0CS60

1N0CS12

1N0CS13

0CS77

SicherheitsbauteilBei Ersatz nur Originalteil verwenden

N'utilisez que les pieces d'originePiece de securite

When repairing, use original part onlySafety Part

27R0RS05

4R7RS20

4R7RS87

22K0RS84

4R7RS88

22K0RS83

18R0RS12

NC

NCNCNC

ASG3

TESTEN

NC

NC

NCNCNC

I2S_DA_IN2

ADR_CLADR_WSADR_DA

I2S_DA_IN1

NC

NCNC

CAPL_AAHVSUP

SC2_OUT_RSC2_OUT_LVREF1SC1_OUT_RSC1_OUT_L

CAPL_MAHVSSAGNDC

SC3_IN_LSC3_IN_RASG2SC2_IN_LSC2_IN_RASG1SC1_IN_LSC1_IN_RVREFTOPMONO_INAVSSAVSUPANA_IN1+ANA_IN-ANA_IN2+

XTAL_INXTAL_OUT

DACM_LDACM_R

VREF2DACA_LDACA_RRESETQ

DVSSDVSUP

I2S_DA_OUTI2S_WSI2S_CLI2C_DAI2C_CL

STANDBYQADR_SEL

D_CTR_OUT0D_CTR_OUT1

AUD_CL_OUT

-

IS40

123456789

101112131415161718192021222324252627282930313233

34353637383940414243444546474849505152535455565758596061626364

4U7LS25

10U0LS20

1N0CS08

1N0CS07

1N0CS06

1N0CS05

4N7CS59

BZX55C3V6DS90

BC847BTS01

BC847BTS81

18M432QS40

15U0LS40

4U7LS10

15U0LS41

2U2LS63

2U2LS62

-IS80

1

2

3

45

6

789

10

11

100N0CS88

100N0CS87

BS90

1210K0RS90

15K0RS91

SDA

AV1_IN_R

-UA

AM/AF

AV1_OUT_R

AV1_OUT_L

AV1_IN_L

GND_HEATSINK

+UA

SCL

+5VON

DVSS

DVSS

DVSS

DVSS

DVSSDVSS DVSS

DVSS

DVSS

DVSS

DVSS

DVSS

DVSS

DVSSMUTE-

+8V

SIF

GNDP

GNDP

GNDP

GNDP

GNDP

GNDP

GNDP

GNDP

GNDP

GNDP

RESET_MSP-

GND-HEATSINK

GNDV

GNDT

AHVSS

AHVSSAHVSS

AHVSS

AHVSS

AHVSS

AHVSS

AHVSS

AHVSS

AHVSSAHVSS

AHVSS

AHVSS

AHVSS

AHVSS AHVSS

AHVSS

AHVSSAHVSS

AHVSS

AHVSS AHVSS AHVSS AHVSS

AHVSS

AHVSS

AHVSS

AHVSSAHVSS

AHVS

S

AHVSS AHVSS AHVSS AHVSS

AHVSS

AHVSS

AHVSS

AHVSSAHVSS

AHVSS AHVSS

AHVSS

AHVSS

R

TDA7269

(DP)

(OS)

(OS)

(OS)

(OS)

(OS)

(OS)

MSP3400C-PP-C6

(P)

(P)(uP)

(uP)

(uP)

(uP)

(P)

GNDP

MAIN

AMPLIFIER SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM - SCHEMA DE L’AMPLIFICATEUR - SCHALTBILD AUDIO-SIGNALVERABEITUNG - SCHEMA DELL’ AMPLIFICATORE - ESQUEMA DEL AMPLIFICADOR(MONO)

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

ICC17First issue 07 / 98

LS25

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

Part of board connected to mains supply.Partie du châssis reliée au secteur.Primärseite des Netzteils.Parte dello châssis collegata alla rete.Parte del chassis conectada a la red.

Use isolating mains transformer - Utiliser un transformateur isolateur du secteur -Trenntrafo verwenden - Utilizar un transformador aislador de red -Utilizzare un trasformatore per isolarvi dalla rete

!

DP72 CP97

FI30°

LS10

LX18

IP95DP80

LS25

FI50CP84

CP82

CP80DP82

DP84

IX01BP

01

BX02BX01

QC02

QR01

QC01FI

20

BL02

BV01

IF01

FI10

FI02JF14

DL12

FI01

BP15

RP76

LP44

QS40

FP01

PP64

IS40

BF01

BR01

NH01

RP92

CP92

IV01

DP85

focus

BX50G2/cutoff

° it is not necessary , to adjust FI30 by after sales

4Mhz

5,74Mhz

77,8Mhz

DST5V

U-U

UP

+UA

ON+5V

T 2.5A L

5V

TimerU

8V

U

SYS

U-

ON+5V

+5V

-UA

VIDEO

STBY

140 265V (ASIA)

190 264V (EUR)

31,9Mhz

40,4Mhz4,433619Mhz

3,579545Mhz

LOCATION OF CONTROLS - EMPLACEMENT DES REGLAGES -SERVICE LAGEPLAN - POSIZIONE REGOLATORI DI SERVIZIO -

SITUACIÓN DE LOS AJUSTES

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

ICC17First issue 07 / 98

Tube Format Usys Jumper RL65A51EFS83X191 4:3 126V+/-0,5V JL80 4k7A59EHJ43X15 4:3 132V+/-0,5V JL81 24kA66EHJ43X15 4:3 132V+/-0,5V JL81 24kA59EGD048X30 4:3 126V+/-0,5V JL80 4k7A68EGD038X30 4:3 126V+/-0,5V JL80 4k7A68AGA25X01 4:3 126V+/-0,5V JL80 4k7A80AEJ15X01 4:3 126V+/-0,5V JL80 4k7W56EGV023X015 16:9 138V+/-0,5V JL82 47kW66EGV023X015 16:9 138V+/-0,5V JL82 47kW76EGV023X015 16:9 138V+/-0,5V JL82 47k

V=

U Sys PP 64DP 80

CP 80

U G2 / cutoff

FOCUS

SCREEN

FOCUS

AV (no Signal, black screen)

Test pattern(standard values)

highest output

CRT IB01: pins 9 / 12 / 15

Sharp picture

V= IF Alignment

Alignement FI

FI 01

FI 02

Switch set to standard BG Commuter le TV au standard BG Adjust FI01 for minimum value at 40,4Mhz

Adjust FI20 for minimum value at 31,9Mhz

IF Signal 40,4MHz (BG)31,9MHz (BG)

50 mV

RI33

1

FI20

V= RI41 DI40

1

TUNER

NH01 75Ω

11

G

1nF

trap 40,4Mhz

trap 31,9Mhz

0

160V

+ + = 50%

+ + = 50%

LL05

FI10

ADJUSTMENTS - REGLAGES - EINSTELLUNGEN - REGOLAZIONI - AJUSTES

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

ICC17First issue 07 / 98

SERVICE MODE

I - ENTER/EXIT SERVICE MODE - ENTREE/SORTIE DU MODE SERVICE

1 ACCESSING THE SERVICE MODE

2 TEMPORARY EXIT FROM SERVICE MODE

TV Control Panel Access

• Switch the TV into “Standby” mode by pressing the Standby button onthe RCU.

• Switch “OFF” the mains supply to the TV and wait for the LED to extinguish.

• Whilst holding depressed the PR - and VOL- (8s), switch “ON” the mains supply to the TV.

• Once initialised, the Main Service Menu will appear on the screen of the TV.

3 EXITING FROM SERVICE MODE

1 ACCES AU MODE SERVICE

2 SORTIE TEMPORAIRE DU MODE SERVICE

Accès avec le clavier du téléviseur

- Utiliser la touche Exit de la télécommande.- Le menu utilisateur peut être accessible via la touche «Menu».

- Pour entrer à nouveau dans le mode service utliliser la touche bleue.

Note :

En mode service:- Le verrouillage parental est effacé ( réinitialisé ).- La fonction de verrouillage ( Pin number ) est ignorée.- La programmation des heures «reveille/matin» est annulée.- Possibilité de passer en mode service avec commutation lente active.- AV- Link , la détection WSS, l’EPG et le Vidéotexte ne sont pas validés.- La fonction de stand-by automatique en cas d’absence de signald’antenne n’est pas validée.- Les valeurs de réglages usine sont affectées au contraste, à lacouleur et à la lumière.- Le contour est appelé à sa valeur moyenne.- L’expansion contraste est au niveau bas.- Le mode ambiance «Light sensor» n’est pas valides.- Zoom et format ignorées.

• Commuter le téléviseur en position de veille avec la télécommande.Eteindre le téléviseur par l’interrupteur secteur (attendre l’extinction complète du voyant).

• Tout en appuyant sur les touches PR - et VOL - , mettre le TV en service à l'aide de la touche M/A.

• Maintenir enfoncées les touches PR - et VOL -. (8s)Le menu suivant apparaît.

- Aller au point «QUIT» dans le menu principaldu mode service.

3 SORTIE DEFINITIVE DU MODE SERVICE

télécommande clavier du téléviseur Inter M/A ou Stand-by

- Foncion Stand-by ou«off» par M/A

- Mode TV.

Les valeurs ou réglages non mémorisées avant lasortie ne seront pas écrites en NVM.

Please Note:

In the service mode :- The CHILD LOCK function is re-initialised.The LOCK function (PIN

number) is ignored.- All Wake-up/Sleep timer settings are CLEARED.- SCART socket pin 8 switching voltages are ignored.- AV-Link, WSS Detection, EPG and TELETEXT functions are

disabled.- Automatic standby mode switching functions (no signal conditions)

are disabled.- Brightness, Colour and Contrast are set to factory defaults.- Sharpness settings are set to MID position.- Contrast Expand is set to LOW.- Automatic INSTALL mode is disabled.- FORMAT and ZOOM are reset to factory defaults.

- Press the “EXIT” button on the RCU.- Pressing the “MENU” button on the RCU will activate the customer

menus.

- The Service Menu can be re-entered by pressing the “BLUE” button on the RCU.

- Select the “QUIT” line of the “Main ServiceMenu”.

Remote Control TV Control Panel ON/OFF key or “Stand-by”buttons

- RCU “Standby” button or switch “OFF”mains supply.

- TV mode.

Values or adjustment not “STORED” before exitingthe service mode will NOT be “SAVED” in the NVM.

GB MODE SERVICE F

Soft-Ver. V1.00-0 0080Config. A5- - - -NSerial-No. 103465071

GEOMETRYVIDEO

IF

TUBEQUIT

SETUP

Soft-Ver. V1.00-0 0080Config. A5- - - -NSerial-No. 103465071

GEOMETRYVIDEO

IF

TUBEQUIT

SETUP

-Appuyer sur «VOL+» - Appuyer sur «<»,«OK» ou «>»- Press «VOL.+»button

- Press «<», «OK»or «>» button

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

PR

+

+

- -

III - LITE-MENU FOR FIELD SERVICE MODE - MENUS DU MODE SERVICE

1 MAIN MENU - MENU PRINCIPAL

Soft-Ver. V1.00-0 0080Config. A5- - - -NSerial-No. 103465071

GEOMETRYVIDEOIF

TUBEQUIT

SETUP

Version software

Versión softwareVersione software

Software Version

Software Version

CounterCompteurBetriebsstundenzählerContadorContatore

GerätekonfigurationComposizione del ricevitore

Configuration du récépteurChassis Configuration codes.

Composición del Receptor

UP

DOWN

SELECT

Serial Number

AlignmentAlignementAbgleichRegolazioneAlineacion

N° de sérieSerien-Nr.Numero serialeN° Serie

Navigation inside the Service ModeNavigation dans le Service ModeFunktionen im Service ModeOpzioni del Service ModeBúsqueda en el Modo Servicio

TV CONFIGURATION - CONFIGURATION DU TV - GERÄTEKONFIGURATION -CONFIGURAZIONE DEL TV - CONFIGURACIÕN DEL TV

Character 1 : Tube type : «A»= 4/3 , «W» =16/9Character 2 : Chassis type : «5» = 50Hz, Character 3 : Zoom available : «Z»=yes, «-»=not Character 4 : Ambiant Sensor : «S»= detected, «-»= notCharacter 5 : Dolby : «D»=detected, «-»= notCharacter 6 : AV Link detected : «K»=IR link detected, «-»= notCharacter 7 : Chassis Variant: «N»= Nicam, «S»=Stereo

Character 1 : Factory : «A»= Angers , «C» =Celle, «T» =TaranconCharacter 2 : Year : «G» = 1996, «H»= 1997 etc..Character 3 : Month, from : «1»=January to «C»=DecemberCharacter 4-9 : Serial N0.

TIME COUNTER - COMPTEUR DE TEMPS - BETRIEBSSTUNDENZÄHLER -CONTATORE - CONTADORThe counter indicates the TV’s number of service hours.It counts from to 0 to 65535 hours.The display is hexadecimal.Le compteur de temps indique le nombre d’heures de service du TV. Il compte de 0 à 65535heures. L’affichage est en hexadécimal.Der Zähler zeigt an, wieviele Stunden der Fernseher in Betrieb ist. Die Anzeige isthexadezimal.Il contatore indica il numero di ore di servizio del TV. Puo’ contatore da 0 a 65535. Lavisualizzazione è esadecimale.El contador indica el número de horas de servicio de la TV. Cuenta de 0 a 65535 horas. Elvisualizador es hexadecimal.

2 SUBMENU - SOUS-MENU

VIDEO PAL BG

R-DriveG-DriveB-Drive

Norm.

Peak-White

Return

DefaultStoreRestore

Drive Adjust.

Scale BrightScale ColourScale Contr.

Factory

9C9C9C

705CCC

Hexadecimal valueValeur hexadecimale de reglageAbgleichwerte hexadezimalValore di regolazione esadecimaleValor del ajuste en hexadecimal

Navigation inside the Service ModeNavigation dans le Service ModeFunktionswahl im Service ModeOpzioni del Service ModeBusquena en el Modo Servicio

Case de validation - Fonction validée si "cochée"

Per inserire la FunzioneActivar una functión

Enable a function

Zum Implementieren einer Funktion

Config. A1Z-DKC

Serial-N0. AI6------

ROM Default All the default values of a page in use are stored in RAM.L’ensemble des valeurs par défaut d’une page courante est chargé en RAM.Sämtliche Standardwerte der aktuellen Seite werden imRAM geladenTutti i valori di default di una pagina in uso vengono memorizzati sulla RAMTodos los valores por defecto de la página en curso están almacenados en RAM.

Restore Copies all values from NVM into RAM.Copie toutes les valeurs des données NVM en RAMKopiert alle NVM-Datenwerte in den RAMCopiare tutti i valori da NVM sulla RAMCopia todos los valores de NVM a RAM

To enable a function check (tick) the box.Pour valider une fonction cocher la case correspondante Zum Implementieren einer Funktion das Kontrollkästchen aktivieren (ankreuzen)Per implementare una funzione di verifica, (vistare) la casellaPara poner en fucionamiento una función verifique (señale) la casilla

: :Enable function : Disable function

Display + > NVM value

1

Soft-Ver. V1.00-0 0080Config. A5- - - -NSerial-No. 103465071

GEOMETRYVIDEO

IF

TUBEQUIT

SETUP

Soft-Ver. V1.00-0 0080Config. A5- - - -NSerial-No. 103465071

GEOMETRYVIDEO

IF

TUBEQUIT

SETUP

REMOTE CONTROL - TELECOMMANDE - FERNBEDIENUNGTELECOMANDO - MANDO A DISTANCIA

3 DISPLAYING THE VALUE OF THE SETTING - AFFICHAGE DESVALEURS - ANZEIGE DES EINSTELL WERTS

VISUALIZZAZIONE DEL VALORE DELLA REGOLAZIONE -VISUALIZACION DEL VALOR DE AJUSTE

H-Position 0E

Display - < NVM value

Hexadecimal valuevaleur hexadécimaleEinstell wert hexadezimalValore esadecimaleValor héxadecimal

Set value

: NVM value

> <

Store Copîes RAM values into NVMCopie la valeur RAM en NVM Kopieren des Werts von RAM nach NVMCopiare i valori RAM in NVMCopiar valores RAM en NVM

5 STORING VALUES IN MEMORY - MEMORISATION DESVALEURS - SPEICHERN DER WERTE - MEMORIZZAEZ IVALORI - VALORES ALMACENADOS EN LA MEMORIA

After setting, the values are stored in NVM.Après réglages les valeurs sont mémorisées en NVM.Nach dem Einstellen werden die Werte im NVM gespeichert.Dopo la regolazione i valori vengono memorizzati in NVM.Después del ajuste, los valores son almacenados en NVM

The box becomes During alignment, values are temporarily stored in RAM.En cours d’alignement les valeurs sont mémorisées temporairement en RAM Während des Abgleichs werden die Werte vorübergehend im RAM gespeichertDurante l’allineamento i valori vengono memorizzati provvisoriamente sulla RAMDurante el ajuste, los valores son almacenados temporalmente en RAM

4 TOGGLE FUNCTIONS - VALIDATION DES FONCTIONSEIN-UND AUSSCHALT FUNKTIONEN - FUNZIONI DI

COMMUTAZIONE - FUNCION CONMUTACION

00 to FF

II - NAVIGATION INSIDE THE SERVICE MODE - DEPLACEMENT DANS LE MODE SERVICEFUNCTIONS WALLIN SERVICE MODE - OPZIONI NEL SERVICE MODE - BUSQUEDA EN MODO SERVICIO

Naviagation up Naviagation down

- Select option- Option anwählen- Selezionare l’opzione- Seleccionar opción

- “Change“ value - Wert “änden“ - “Cambiare“ valore- “Cambiar“ valor

2 TV CONTROL PANEL - CLAVIER TV - TASTATUR DESFERNSEHGERÄTS - COMANDI DEL TELEVISORE -

Soft-Ver. V1.00-0 0080Config. A5- - - -NSerial-No. 103465071

GEOMETRYVIDEO

IF

TUBEQUIT

SETUP

Naviagation up

Soft-Ver. V1.00-0 0080Config. A5- - - -NSerial-No. 103465071

GEOMETRYVIDEO

IF

TUBEQUIT

SETUP

Naviagation down

- Select option- Option anwählen- Selezionare l’opzione- Seleccionar opción

- “Change“ value - Wert “änden“ - “Cambiare“ valore- “Cambiar“ valor VALUE

VALUE Vol. +

-Vol.

GEOMETRY FULL SCREEN

H-Delay

V-BlankingV-Amplitude

Return

UP

System Voltage -3BH-VCO

DOWN CHANGE

+1B-231E

+0AV-Position 1B

GEOMETRY ZOOM0

H-Blanking Symmetry

UP

H-Blanking

DOWN CHANGE

+3B-19

DefaultStoreRestore

PR

+

+

- -

VALUE

VALUE >

<

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

ICC17First issue 07/ 98

GEOMETRY MODE ALIGNMENT

4/3 picture tube

Signal : 4/3 test pattern

4 / 3 standard mode

zoom 0

overscan V=107% , H=107%

<4/3> zoom 1

16 / 9 standard mode

zoom 0

overscan V=120% , H=120%

16 / 9standard mode

zoom 0

Adjust the vertical height until V = 80%

<16 / 9> zoom 1

Adjust the vertical height : V =90%

16/9 picture tube

Signal : 4/3 test pattern

overscan V=107%, H =107%

4-Adjust EW Amplitude ,EW Shape and Trapezium

1- Adjust Vertical position and Vertical amplitude2- Adjust Vertical Blanking and linearity

3- Adjust Horizontal position and Horizontal ampltude

1- Adjust Vertical position and Vertical amplitude2- Adjust Vertical Blanking and linearity

3- Adjust Horizontal position and Horizontal ampltude

4-Adjust EW Amplitude ,EW Shape and Trapezium

ALIGNMENT PROCEDURE - PROCESSUS DE REGLAGES - ABGLEICH - VISUALIZZAZIONE DEL VALORE DELLA REGOLAZIONE - PROCEDIMIENTO DE ALINEACION

SETUP

Closes the sub-menu and returns to the “Main Service Menu”.Press </> on the RCU or VOL+/VOL- on TV front panel.

Retourne au menu principal.

Definit le tube exact après changement de NVM.Les nouvelles valeurs de tubes (avec video et géometrie) sont actives de suite.Les paramètres de vidéo et de géométrie sontchargés en NVM lorsque STORE est sélectionné. Voir liste ci-dessous.

TUBE

Return

Tube type

After setting Store (+)

TUBE

Restore

Return

Tube type A66ECY...

Store

SETUP

WSS

Default

Default

Store

ReturnClear Progs.

Kbd. Config.

GEOMETRY

Blanking On

V-Amplitude

ReturnV- Slope

DefaultStoreRestore

V-Position

VIDEO PAL BG

R-DriveG-DriveB-Drive

Norm.

Peak-White

Return

IF

StoreDefault

FFI - Bit

RestoreDefaultStoreRestore

Return

GEOMETRY

S -Correction

H-Position

EW -Trapezium

EW -Amplitude

EW -Shape

H-Amplitude

Press </>: remote control; Vol. +/- : TV keyb.

Chiude il sottomenu e fa apparire il menu principale Field Service Mode.Cierra el submenú. El menú Field Service Mode aparece.

Closes the sub-menu and returns to the “Main Service Menu”.Press </> on the RCU or VOL+/VOL- on TV front panel.Retourne au menu principal.

Return

Press </>: remote control; Vol. +/- : TV keyb.

Chiude il sottomenu e fa apparire il menu principale Field Service Mode.Cierra el submenú. El menú Field Service Mode aparece.

Scegliere il tubo appropriato dopo aver sostituito la NVM; i 6 caratteri che indicano il nuovo tipo di tubo, richiamano i valori video e geometria didefault. I parametri per video e geometria vengono caricati nella NVM

Definir el tubo correcto después de haber cambiado el NVM.6 caracteres.Los nuevos valores de tipo de tubo (con la vídeo y la geometría por defecto) se activan inmediatamente. Los parámetros variables de geometría y vídeo se graban en el NVM al seleccionar la función Store. Vea más abajo la lista de tubos.

Recalls the factory settings for colour, brightness, contrast and sharpness and sets contrast expand to "low".

Factory settings recalled

VIDEO PAL

Normalise User Settings

FFi - BitUser settings kept.

IF

Scal.Brightness

Scal*.Colour

Scal.Contrast

Grey scale test pattern

R-Cut off*

G-Cut off*

R - Drive

G - Drive

B - Drive

Peak-White**

grey

+ =nom.

white =100%

+

+ + =nom.

Grey scale test pattern

+ =nom.

white =100%

Peek white test patternwhite =100%

+

white

+ = 50%

= 100%

Grey scale test pattern

PAL (then SECAM +RGB) 75% Colour bar test pattern via RF.

factory settings.

white =100%

black

+ =nom.+

Blue Cathode

=

CRT

F-H

After setting Store (+)

The signals colour standard is auto detected and displayed opposite the main menu line.

CRT Pin 6,8,11

Tube Type [init]

A80AEJ (340max)

(610max)(560max)

240

520480

Tube Type [init]

A51EFS

A59EHJA59EGDA66EHJ

(600max)

(540max)(470max)(430max)

420

380400300

Blue cathodeBlue cathode

GEOMETRY

V-Position

V-Amplitude

V-Blanking

Closes the sub-menu and returns to the “Main Service Menu”.Retourne au menu principal.

Return

Press </>: remote control; Vol. +/- : TV keyb.

Chiude il sottomenu e fa apparire il menu principale Field Service Mode.Cierra el submenú. El menú Field Service Mode aparece.

Test Pattern Signal used: 4/3 with geometric circle. Adjust separate for 4/3 and 16/9 format. See annexed

After setting Store (+)

Verlassen des Untermenüs,das Hauptmenü

Nach Tausch des NVM den bildröhrentyp (6 Ziffern) auswählen. Die neuen Geometrie-und Video-defaultwerte werden sofort aktiv. Variable Geometrie- und Videowerte werden durch Speichern mit "STORE" ins NVM geschrieben. Bildrohrauflistung : siehe unten.

Automatic detection of DOLBY surround sound and 16/9 Format pictures via Teletext line number 23 is valid on all programmes.

Sélection du process WSS valid pour tous programmes

WSS

detect.enable- aktiv disable-inaktiv

WSS (nur bei 16:9 oder Dolby)Auswertung der Zeile 23 zur automatischenFormat umschaltung und Dolby umschaltung

Idendificazione "auto-surround" e "format" tramiteil televideo, decodificando la riga 23. La selezionedi WSS è valida per tutti i programmi.

Detección "auto-surround" y "format" a través de la línea 23 de Teletext.La selección del procesamiento WSS es válida para todos los programas.

Clears all programmes STORED in memory and RESETS all PICTURE and SOUND settings to the factory default values.The AUTO INSTALL (out of factory) mode can be initialised by a long press (> 5sec.) of the selection button.

Efface tous les programmes mémorisés.valeurs SON et IMAGES: valeurs usines.Pour sortir des valeurs usine : Selection : Long press:2,5s

Clear Prog.

Kbd. Config

Kbd. Config

active-aktiv No active-inaktiv

Löscht alle Programme und ersetzt alle Ton-und Bildeinstellungen durch Fabrikwerte. Nach erneutemEinschalten erscheint das Installationsmenü.Anwahl: 2,5s drücken

Clear Prog.Cancella tutti i programmi in memoria.I Valori analogici SUONO E IMMAGINE vengono riportatia livello di default. Per ristabilire le condizioni di uscita fabbrica, selezionare la funzione e premere per 2,5sec

Programa de borrado.Borra todos los programas almacenados en la memoria.Valores análogos de SOUND PICTURE: valores de fábrica.Regreso a la TV para "salir del modo fábrica".Selección: Presión larga igual a 2,5 s.

Closes the sub-menu and returns to the “Main Service Menu”.Retourne au menu principal.

Return

Press </>: remote control; Vol. +/- : TV keyb.

Chiude il sottomenu e fa apparire il menu principale Field Service Mode.Cierra el submenú. El menú Field Service Mode aparece.

Verlassen des Untermenüs Verlassen des Untermenüs

Verlassen des Untermenüs

* * After PEAK white adjustment control cut off setting. Repeat the adjustments if necessary. Nach der Einstellung von "Peak white" die "Cut off"- Einstellungen wiederholen.

Note :* adjust separate for PAL/NTSC/SECAM and RGB/AV getrennte Einstellung für PAL/SEACAM und RGB/AV

Restore

S - CorrectionH-PositionH-AmplitudeEW-AmplitudeEW-Trapezium

7C6C

5494707898

7CDrive Adjust. AGC Take Over

Scale BrightScale ColourScale Contr.

Factory

9C9C9C

705CCC

88

Tube Name LIST name Description

A51EFS83X191 A51EFS 4:3; 21” OT; AK-Mask; Coty-MA59EHJ43X15 A59EHJ 4:3; 25” MP; AK-Mask; VectorA66EHJ43X15 A66EHJ 4:3; 28” MP; AK-Mask; VectorA68EGD038X30 A68EGD 4:3; 29” SF; Invar; VectorA80AEJ13X01 A80AEJ 4:3; 33” MP AK-Mask; Coty-MA59EGD048X30 A59EGD 4:3; 25” SF; Invar-Mask; VectorA68AGA25X01 A68AGA 4:3; 29” VHP; AK-Mask; Coty-MW56EGV023X015 W56EGV 16:9; 24” SF; Invar-Mask; VectorW66EGV023X015 W66EGV 16:9; 28” SF; Invar-Mask; VectorW76EGV023X015 W76EGV 16:9; 32” SF; Invar-Mask; Vector

S

AGC - Minimum noise- Minimum de bruit- Minimum Rauschen- Rumore minimo- Minimo ruido

A68EGD

1.Sélectionner le mode zoom standard 4/3 pour tube 4/3

2.appliquer une MIRE de BARRE avec seulement une ligne blanche horizontale en milieu de l'ecran

3.Positinner dans le mode Service Blanking On la moitié basse de l' ecran devient noire

4.Aligner "Vertical - Slope" pour que la ligne mediane soit a peine non visible

5 Revenir à Blanking On et mettre

6.Positioner la mire de quadrillage

7.Effectuer les reglages de geometrie d'écrits ci- dessous

9.Regler la position H

10.Ajuster l'amplitude H

11-12.Correction de coussin EW

13.Correction de coins (Shape)

Correct incorrect

"Pour les tubes 4/3 en mode 16/9, ces reglages ne sont pas necessaire"

1.Select the standard 4:3 format and zoom mode 0.

2.Apply a test pattern signal to the TV with a single horizontal and vertical line on the screen.

3.Select “Blanking On” line of the menu and ENABLE (tick) the function, the bottom half of the screen will go black.

1.Selezionare il modo zoom standard 4/3 per tubo 4/3

4.Select the “V_Slope” line of the menu and adjust its value until the centre line of the pattern is just invisible.

5.Return to the “Blanking On” line of the menu and DISABLE (un-tick) the function.

6.Switch the test pattern signal to the crosshatch geometry pattern.

7.Perform the geometry adjustments described below.

9.Adjust position H.

10.Adjust amplitude H.

11-12.Correction of EW pincushion distortion.

13.Correction of corners (Shape).

14.Trapeze. / Trapèze

"These adjustments are not necessary for 4:3 tubes in 16:9 mode"

2.Applicare un monoscopio con un'unica linea bianca orizzontale al centro dello schermo

3.Posizionarsi in modo Service Blanking on; la parte inferiore dello schermo divienta nera

5.Ritornare in modo Blanking on e porre

6.Posizionare il monoscopio

7.Effettuare le regolazioni di geometria descritte in precedenza

/Memorizzare/Memoriser

9.Regolare la posizione H

10 Regolare l'ampiezza H

11-12.Correzione della distorsione a cuscino EW

13.Correzione degli angoli (Forma)

"Queste regolazioni non sono necessarie per tubi 4/3 in modo 16/9"

4.Allineare la "Vertical Slope" in modo che la linea centrale sia appena visibile

8.Store

350

W56EGVW66EGVW76EGV 300

(410max)

(350max)

Riservato alla regolazione di fabbrica

Factory adjusted Reserve au reglage usine

Asie

Europ

Default

Fast filter (IF /PLL) Filtre rapide (FI /PLL)

Filtro rapido (IF /PLL)

1.Seleccione el modo de zoom estándar 4/3 para tubo 4/3.

2.Aplique una plantilla de prueba con sólo una línea blanca horizontal en el centro de la pantalla.

3.Pase al modo Service Blanking On. La mitad inferior de la pantalla se vuelve negra.

4.Alinee "Vertical-Slope" para que la línea mediana sea casi invisible.

5.Vuelva a "Blanking on" y poner

6.Coloque la plantilla cuadriculada.

7.Efectúe los ajustes geométricos descritos más abajo.

/Almacene

9.Ajuste la posición H

10.Ajuste la amplitud H

11-12.Corrección de la distorsión de cojín EW.

13.Corrección de esquinas (Shape)

14.Trapezio / Trapecio

"Estos ajustes no son necesarios para los tubos 4/3 en modo 16/9"

1.Wählen Sie den Standard-Zoom 4:3 bei 4:3 Bildröhren.

2.Speisen Sie ein Testbild mit nur einem horizontalen Strich in der Bildmitte ein.

3.Schalten Sie den Blanking-Mode ein. Die untere Hälfte des Bildschirms wird schwarz.

4.Regeln Sie "V-Slope" so ein, dafl die Mittellinie nahezu verschwindet.

5.Schalten Sie den Blanking-Mode wieder ein und

6.Speisen Sie ein Gittertestbild ein.

7.Nehmen Sie die Geometrieeinstellung wie unten beschrieben vor:

9.Korrigieren Sie Horizontale Lage.

10.Korrigieren Sie Horizontal-Amplitude

11-12.Korrektur der Ost/West Kissenverzerrung.

13.Korrektur der Ecken.

14 Trapez-Verzerrung.

Reserviert für fabrikeinstellungen

“Diese Einstellungen sind nicht für 4:3 Bildröhren im 16:9 Betrieb erforderlich.“

/Speichern

des service Modes erscheint

Schnelles filter (ZF/PLL)

After replacing the NVM, the correct tube type number must be entered (6 characters).Once entered, the tubes geometry and video default vales are immediately activated.Variable geometry and video parameters are written to the NVM when the “STORE” line is selected.See table below for tube type numbers.

Press </> on the RCU or VOL+/VOL- on TV front panel.

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

ICC17First issue 07 / 98

+8V

PINS of IC 64 33

1 32

AN

AIN

-A

NA

IN2

+

PINS of IC

AGND

DGND

AGND

DG

ND

3 4 6 7 8 9 10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

2 51

BS001

220N0CS101

1N0

CS103

10N0

CS104

CS105

100N0

CS203

1N0

10N0

CS204

CS205

100N0

XT

AL

OU

TX

TA

LIN

+5VDA

NA

IN1

+

AGND

+5VD

AGND

AD

RS

EL

3 4 6 7 8 9 10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

2 51

BS002

+5

VA

AG

ND

+8

V

CS20210N0

+5VA

DGND

+5VD

CS

20

71

00

N0

10

U0

CS

20

6

SC

1IN

RS

C1

INL

SC

2IN

RS

C2

INL

SC

3IN

RS

C3

INL

CA

PL

M

CA

PL

AS

C1

OU

TL

SC

1O

UT

R

SC

2O

UT

LS

C2

OU

TR

AG

ND

C

SC

4IN

R

SC

4IN

L

I2C

DA

I2C

CL

1N0

CS106

+5VDDGND

+5VD

MO

NO

INV

RE

FT

OP DGND

1011121314151617181920212223242526

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

43

4546474849

5

5051525354555657585960

61

62

64

65

66

67 8

STANDBYQVREF2 ADRSEL

AUDCLOUT

XTALOUTXTALINTESTEN

AVSUP

SC1OUTLSC1OUTRVREF1VREF1SC2OUTLSC2OUTRASG3

VREF2

AHVS

S

27

AVSU

PAV

SSAV

SSM

ONOI

NVR

EFTO

PVR

EFTO

PSC

1INR

SC1I

NLAS

G1SC

2INR

SC2I

NLAS

G2SC

3INR

SC3I

NLAG

NDC

AHVS

S

44

NP

NPNPNP

7 963 2 3 4 6

I2CC

LI2

CDA

I2SC

LI2

SWS

I2SD

AOU1

I2SD

AIN1

NPDVSU

PDV

SUP

DVSS

DVSS

I2SD

AIN2

RESE

TQI2

SDAO

U2

68 1

NC NC NC

DACC2RDACC2L

DACC1RDACC1L

CAPLC2AHVSUPAHVSUP

DCTRIO0DCTRIO1

DCTRIN

NCNCNC

CAPLC1

DPL3518(DIE)

IS200

DGND

RE

SE

TQ

DA

CM

RD

AC

ML

DA

CA

LD

AC

AR

1

111213141516171819

2

2021222324252627

28

29

3

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

4

40

41

42

43

44

45

46474849

5

50515253545556575859

6

6061

65

66

67

68

69 770

71

72 8 9

AVSUP

STANDBYQ

TESTEN

ADRSELDCTROUT0DCTROUT1

AUDCLOUTDMACSYNC

XTALOUTXTALIN

ANAIN2+ANAIN-

ANAIN1+AVSUP

AHVSSCAPLMAHVSUPAVHSUPCAPLASC1OUTLSC1OUTRVREF1VREF1SC2OUTLSC2OUTRASG3TESTNEUDACMSUBDACMLDACMRVREF2VREF2

AVSS

AVSS

MON

OIN

VREF

TOP

VREF

TOP

SC1I

NRSC

1INL

ASG0

SC2I

NRSC

2INL

ASG1

SC3I

NRSC

3INL

ASG3

SC4I

NRSC

4INL

AGND

CAH

VSS

DVSU

P

I2CC

LI2

CDA

I2SC

LI2

SWS

I2SD

AOU1

I2SD

AIN1

ADRD

A

ADRW

SAD

RCL

DVSU

P

DVSS

DVSS

I2SD

AIN2

RESE

TQDA

CAR

DACA

L

NP

NP

NPNPNP

106263

MSP3410D(DIE)

IS100

10N0CS102DGND

1

TP2

DGND1 TP1

SUB AMVD 19100 00

SUB AUDIO MODULE VIRTUAL DOLBY

SUB AMVD

SUB AUDIO SIGNAL MODULE - SUB MODULE AUDIO - AUDIO SIGNAL SUBMODUL - SUB MODULO AUDIO

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

TECHNICAL INFORMATION

Chassis concerned : ICC17 (25"MP & 28"MP)

Symptom/ Problem observed :Spare Parts List, component part number amendment.

Solution implemented :To optimize the CRT heater supply voltage for the above mentioned tubes, both LL05(DST) and LB02 (coil) have been changed.

LL05 : Old Part No. 10546610 ---> New Part No. 10600190LB02 : Old Part No. 10477930 ---> New Part No. 25349470

Comment :Both components must be replaced at the same time.

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

TECHNICAL INFORMATION

Finished products / Chassis concerned :All TV sets equiped with ICC17 chassis (CRT Board)

Subject : Protection of transistor TB02 against arcing

Symptom/ Problem observed :Transistor type number BF422 used in position TB02 found defective.

Cause :Arcing.

Solution implemented :- Remove the resistor at location RB13.- On the copper side of the CRT PCB, add an insulated wire link between pin 1 of inductor LB02 and

pin 4 of the CRT socket (ground).

You do not need to write anything in the white boxes.

IRIS CODE: the code mentioned below must be used to report this failure on the warranty sheet. It will make your report easier and more reliable

1 3 1 5 R B 1 3 AP Y TV

Condition/Symptom Part No Position SectionQty

FaultCode

RepairCode

10533820CRT 17000 00

LB01

LB71

LB31

LB51

DB50

LB02

1

BB03

RB11

RB02

RB07

RB08

RB05

DB51

DB30

DB31DB70

DB71

TB02EB

C

BB01

1

TB01BCE

LB06

1

CB01

IB01

DB04

RB12

RB13

RB01

RB04

RB31

RB71

RB03

RB51

CB04

BB02 1

BB05

CB06

CB03

BB06

BB04

N P Q R

0

1

2

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

TECHNICAL INFORMATION

Chassis concerned : ICC17

Symptom/ Problem observed :Moiré patterning visible on some channels.

Cause :High frequency cross modulation.

Solution implemented - Remove the jumper link at location JR06.- Remove the inductor at location LR20.- Replace LR10 10µH inductor with a jumper link.

DR23

DR20

DR10

CR99

BR07

BR06

RV31

RV30

RR70

RR72

RR74

RR76

RR78

RR58

RR50

RR51RR

71RR

73RR

75

RR77

RR82

RR45

RR04

RR57

RP76

BS80

1

RS88RV01

S91

CS90

JR03

JR04JR05

JS15

JR12JR11

JR10

0 0

JR13

JR06

BS91

1

BS90

1

LR10

LR20

QR01

BV01

1

JV04

JR02

JR01

JX94

JR07

BS02

CP72

CV08

CR10

CP73

BR01

1

LV07

J K L MJ K L M

10516550/A

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

ICC17First issue 07 / 98

15NCH95

CH211p

CH221p

CH230.75P

CH501P5

CH511P5

CH521P5

CH531P5

8PCH24

BB535DH07

BB639CDH35

47PCH25

CH200.75P

100PCH55

10K0RH93

100KRH15

10KRH13

1NCH89

RH1447K

47KRH73

10NCH59

1NCH88

33RRH72

1NCH81

15NCH56

4N7CH91

220RRH55

330RRH56

BA592DH45

4K7RH91

10KRH51

100RRH53

22KRH52

CH7033N

1NCH48

100PCH14

1NCH47

22nCH85

2R2RH88

10KRH71

22PCH93

180RRH70

100PCH13

4R7RH80

CH7918P

22KRH38

CH7610N 1N

CH78

InterfaceI2C-Bus

OscillatorCrystal

DividerRef.-

DividerProgr.

HYPVHF

Mixer

Amplifier

Isolation

UHFM

ixer

Amplifier

Isolation

I/O-PORTSChgPm

pDet.&

PHASE-

Oscillator VHF/HYPOscillator UHF

TUA6010XIH701

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

1415

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

82PCH33

4N7CH92

22KRH44 22K

RH43

BB639CDH44

BA592DH70

22NCH35

22PCH75

0P75CH43

CH45220P

22KRH12

BB639CDH34S595TR

TH30

1K2RH59

22KRH45

CH44470P

BB639CDH33

CH381N

27RRH37

3U9RH94

4N7CH39

10NCH49

15RRH92

BB639CDH43

22KRH41

3K9RH03

10NCH90

2R2RH42

S595TRTH40

4R7RH49

S595TRTH01

47RRH09

1PCH07

1NCH06

BB535DH05

22KRH10

9PCH08

VALCH42

100PCH09

22KRH11

BB535DH06

100PCH12

5P6CH28

9PCH11

39KRH50

10PCH05

1NCH36

1NCH37

470KRH01

470KRH36

470KRH33

5V6DH47

100PCH04

22KRH06

22KRH05

BB535DH02

BB535DH03

22KRH04

12PCH03

4P7CH02

470RRH46

3K9RH08

CH321N

BB639CDH32

BB639CDH31

22KRH02

1NCH34

22KRH32

BB639CDH41

BB639CDH42

CH711N

22KRH39

22NCH29

1RRH30

1nFCH72

4MHzQH70

CH3110N

150KRH35

150KRH34

150KRH07

CH4022N

100PCH54

82PCH17

22KRH31

4N7CH96

1NCH94

4K7RH58

56RRH87

6K8RH85

4R7RH86 MMBR571LT1

TH80

8R2RH81

1N

CH82

39pCH83

27pCH86

2R2RH82

2P

CH87

CL DATU IF1AGCINP 33VUB

LH30

LH81

LH84

LH20

LH22

LH83

LH82

LH42

LH43

Pr.

* DENOTES : NO COMPONENTS IN LAYOUT

*

*

AS

321 54 76 8 119

LOCK5V

LH09

LH10

LH49

LH48

LH47

LH41

LH40

LH39

LH38

LH37

LH36

LH35

LH34

LH33

LH32

LH31

LH12

LH11

LH08

LH07

LH06LH05LH04

LH03

LH02LH01

BIII=85BII =06BI =03BANDSWITCH

BI

BIII

BII

VHF / UHF TUNER CTT5010 ( For information only )

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

2,5

2,5

2,2

6,3

147

137

136

196

196

195,4

0,6 0,1

196

3,8Vpp-H1V 1V1,2V

3,8Vpp-H 3,5Vpp-H 120Vpp-H 150Vpp-H 150Vpp-H

47K0RB08

560K0RB07

560K0RB05

BF423TB01

BF422TB02

BB01

BV01

11234566

Rf

Rf

Rf

REFVIP

3

2

1

Ra

Ra

Ra

Ri

Ri

Ri

+

+

+

-

-

-

IB01

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

TDA6107Q CB09100P0

LB3110U0

RB71560R0

RB51560R0

RB011K5

RB31560R0

RB041K5

0

RB03

RB02560K0

CB0610U0

CB10NI

CB0110N0

CB04100N0 CB03

10U0

LB0668U0

LB5110U0

LB7110U0

LB02*

LB0110U0

DB50BAV21

DB51BAV21

DB70BAV21

DB71BAV21

DB30BAV21

DB31BAV21

DB041N4004GP

BB02BL02

1234567

1

7

CRT.17000.00

BB061

B

G

R

BB05 1 2

3

45

6

7

8

99 10

1112

BB041BB03 1

SK

FOCUS CRT GND

CRT GNDCHASSIS GND

CHASSISGND

CHASSIS GND

RB

G

HEAT_2HEAT_1

GND

GNDGND

GND

NC

I_CUT

U_VIDEO

* = see CT 170XX partslist

B

G

R G2G1

VH

G2

BG2

GG2

RG2

ICC17

ICC17

CRT

VIDEO AMPLIFIER BOARD - PLATINE AMPLIFICATEURS VIDEO - VIDEOVERSTÄRKERPLATTE - PIASTRA AMPLIFICATORE VIDEO - PLATINA AMPLIFICADOR VIDEO

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

M a n u e l

d’ u t i l i s a t i o n

B e d i e n u n g s -

a n l e i t u n g

M a n u a l e d i

u t i l i z z a z i o n e

U s e r

m a n u a l

δ η γ ι ε ς

ρ η σ ε ω ς

2 1 D U 2 1 C

2 1 M T 2 1 C

2 5 D G 2 1 C

2 8 D G 2 1 C

2 9 D L 2 1 C

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

ICC17First issue 07 / 98

LL33

LL13

LP93

LL31

LP84

LP80LP82

LP09

DH01

DP72

DP94

DL09

DP59

LL32

FI30

BP85

1

JX92

JX23

JX24

JS71JL74

LS10

LX18

DL12

DL32

DL33DL31

DP83

DL72

DL74

DV19

DH04

DR23

DR20

DR10

DL75

DP53

DP46

LL60

1

CR99

CS88

CL53

CS87

BR07

BR06

BX08

BR08

LL26

CV04

CL72

CL25

CV01

CP63CP26

RL57

RV20

RL18

RL37

RL34

RL65

RL59

RL75

RL16

RV31

RX23

RV30

RV14

RV17

RV16

RS80

RS79

RR70

RR72

RR74

RR76

RR78

RR58

RR50

RR51RR

71RR

73RR

75

RR77

RR82

RR45

RR04

RI65

RI50

RP80

RL01

RH04

RL43

RL07

RR57

RS61

RS60

RP76RP65 RP95 RP20

RP44

RP54RP52

RP39

RP19

BS80

1

RL36

RL11

RF08

RX17

RS87

RS12

RS88

RS20RC02

RV01

RP51

RP10

CF08

CP15

CV21

CS84

CL14

CL32

CP96

CP93

CL16

CS91

CS90

CP13

CP66

CS25

CL11

JF21

JF41JF40

JF17

JF30

JC84

JX82

JX60

JX07

JX79

JI04

JV03

JH01

JF24

JH03

JR03

JR04JR05

JL61

JP05

JS15

ZL14

ZL13

ZL11

1TL

51

CL24

CP03

CP04

JL92

JP06

TL02

EB

C

TL55

EB

C

RL44

RF05

RF04

RF07

DF01

RP63

TL34

EC

BTP50

EC

B

IP87

1

JF03

JH08

JF08JF18

JF22JF23

JH04

JI03

JS49

JX91

JX20

JS92

JX21

JR12JR11

JH02

JR15

JP03

JR10

TL33EBC IP95

CL21

TL14 B

CE

RL13

CL22

CL51

RV03

RP85

CL42

DP80

DP09

CP10

CP07

DP43

DP45

DP82

DL24 DL11

DL51 DL25

DP12

DP41

DP48DP47

LL22

DL22

DL13

DL14

DL21

DP02

DP04

DP03

DP01

CL08

RP03

RL60

LS25

TP21

BC

E

TL52

BC

E

TP44

BC

E

FI50

1

JI02

JF31

JF14

JF11

JR16JF07

JX90

JC81

JX88

JX85

JS72

JX61

JS79

JS90

JS09

JC01

JH07

JH05

JI10

JR13

JR06

JX93

JI05

BS91

1

BS90

1

TL41

E B

CP84

CS85CP82

CL13

RF09

RL25RL24

DP93 DP84

IX01

BP01

1

BL01

1

LR10

LR20

BX02

1

BX01

1

QC02

QR01

QC01

FI20

BX50

BL02

1

IS80

BX04 1

BV01

1

RP05

IF01

LH10 1

FI10

CP50

CP51

FI02

FI01

LP01

CP43

CP47

CP41

CP44

CF07

CF04CF10

CV26

CL48

CP22

CI50

CP11

CL60

RP02

RP49

JV90

JP07

JF06

JV04

JF10

JR02

JP08

JF19

JP01

JP02

JR01

JF12

JF26

JX80

JX83

JX94

JS75JS74

JS11

JS80

JS12

JX22

JS18JS21

JC02

JR09

JV05

JR07

JV02

JV01

JI01

JF25

JF36

JR08

TP14

EB

C

TL42EBC

TL32 E B C

TX15E B C

TX45

E B C

CP17

CP16

LS20

BS02

JL60

CP49

CP06

TP15

CP05

CP01

CP02

BP15 1RP

07

RP04

CH08

CP69

CV03

CS22

CC03

CS14

CL38

CH03

LP20

DS90

DP22

DP20

DP14

DP44

DL71

CP80

CF03

DP21

LP44

CP81

CP85CP94

CP83

CL15

CL55

CL12

CP42

CP20

DP18

DP16

DP50

DP19

DP17

DP87

RL10

RL26

QS40

CI63

CP54

CP52

CP58 CP24

CL37

CP97

CP98

CP87

CP72

CL09

CX62

CC01

CX59

CX15

CI54 CI57

CV08

CS43

CS46

CS18

CS17

CS67

CS66

CS65CS64

CS75

CS76 CS77CS78

CS35CS50

CS51

CS52

CS53

CR10

CP73

CS82

RP15

RP50

CP09 FP01

IP61

RP46

RL53

RP79

RL52

PP64

IS40

1

BF01

1

BR01

1

LV07LV06

LV05

NH01

CP08

LP06

IP50

1

LP50

RL35LL

05

E F G

4

3

2

1

0

DCBA E F G

4

3

2

1

0

DCBA H J

7

6

5

K L M

V

Z

J K L M

PNMLKJHGFEDCBA

9

8

7

6

5

T 2.5A L

10516550/A

GND-AV2

GND-AV2

MAIN BOARD - PLATINE PRINCIPALE - CHASSIS GRUNDPLATTE - PIASTRA PRINCIPALE - PLATINA PRINCIPAL COMPONENT SIDE - COTE COMPOSANTS - BESTÜCKUNGSSEITE - LATO COMPONENTI - LADO COMPONENTES

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

ICC17First issue 07 / 98

RL42

RL05

RL04

RF02

RF01

RF03

RF11

RF13

RL74

RF12

RL71

RL73

RL72

RL51

RL09

RL46 RL45

RL15

RP81

RP82

RL12

RL40

RR60

RR81

RR52

RR53

RR30

RR31

RR90 RR80

RR63

RR62 RR

66

RS83

RS05

RS01

RS03

RS02

RS04

RS42

RS43

RS40

RS29

RS27

RS93

RS85

RS77

RS78

RS76

RS75

RS64

RS65

RS66

RS67

RS62

RS63

RS50

RS51

RS52

RS53

RS41

RS95

RS92

RS96

RV18

RV12

RC05

RI61 RI63

RI64

RX08

RH20

RI33RI

31

RX39

RX19

RX28

RH03

RX57

RI07

RI42

RX47

RX56

RX59

RX05

RI51

RI04

RV10

RI03

RX06

RX07

RX25

RX24

RX22

RX09

RX58

RX27

RV05

RV06

RV07

RI60

RX14

RX43

RX02

RI16

RI15

RX03

RI32

RX01

RV25

RI66

RX13

RI41

RH05

RH10

RH02

RX18

RV13

RV08

RR48

RV15

RV09

RS84

RR15

RR68

RR69

RR49

RR12

RR17

RR01

RR02

RR03RR08

RR18

RR05

RR06

RR09

RR56

RR91

RR93

RR94

RR95

RR96

RR55

RR33 RR

32

RR44

RR43

RR42

RR41

RR40

RR46

RR47

RR16

RR14

RR21

RR22

RR20

RR64

RL70

RR87

RL03

RF06

RL06

RL19

RL41

RS86

RR10

RI59

RI58

RL76

RP93

RP91

RP90

RP89

RL58 RL56

RP77

RP87

RP84

RP86

RL31

RP71

RP73

RP97RP99

RP96

RP92

RP70

RP74

RP72

RP75

RP94

RL47

RL48

RL49

RL33 RL32

RL54

RL55

RL02

RS97

RS54

RB10

RS55

RS98

RL39

RR86

RL77

RS99

RP88

RP64

RP69

RP68

RP61

RP62

RP66

RP60

RP83

RP98

RP09

RP78

RP08

RP13

RP18 RP17 RP16 RP06 RP01

RP35RP38

RP21

RP22

RP14

RP27

RP26

RP30

RP24RP25

RP11

RP12

RP55

RP48

RP53

RP47

RP57

RP56

RP43

RP42 RP

31RP45

RP40

RP23

RP58

RP41

RP59

RS90

RS91

RP28

LR30LR31

LI50

CP23

CL31

CL36

CP95

CP92

CF01CF02

CF11

CF12

CL41

CC04

CX61

CI58

CH02

CH05

CH06

CI43

CI09

CI72 CI60

CX01

CX03

CX02

CV25

CX60

CI61

CC11

CV15CV17

CV16

CV20CV22

CV23 CV24

CV05

CV06

CV07

CV31

CV30

CV27

CS40

CS32

CS23

CS31

CS15

CS55

CS54

CS56

CS57

CS60

CS61

CS62

CS63

CS68 CS69

CS70

CS71

CS73

CS92

CS93

CS80CS

26

CS79

CS27

CS74

CS36

CS39

CS16

CS41

CS94CS95

CS24

CS02CS01

CS34

CS33

CV18

CV14

CV13

CV09

CI45

CI12

CR94

CS13

CS12

CS11

CS10

CI47

CL33

CL35

CL34

CS59

CP86

CL71

CL39

CP61

CP59

CP57

CP12

CL52

DP57

DL77

DR21

DS41

DP24

DP40

DP60

DP58

DP61

JS01

JL80

JL81

JL82

JS99

JI50

JP51

JP14

JP15

TL59

TP86

TL31

TP76

TP71

TP90

TP72

TP82

TR15

TL71

TF01

TI45

TV10

TR60

TS01

TI60

TI10

TI30

TS81

TR20

TP75

TR13

TR40

TR23

TL72

TP42

TP59

TP57

TP58

TP67

LI10

LR34

LR02

IV01

IR03

1

IR02

1

RV19

JR51

JR52

DP52

DP54

DP42

DP56

DP66

DP63

DP62

DP67

DL19

DP85

DP70

DP89

DL73

DS40

DV09

DR05

DR24

DL48

DX62

DX59

DR22

CP89

CC10CI

51

CR91

CL59

CP56

CP38

CS05

CS06

CS07

CS08

CS09

CR23

CR21

CR80

CS47

CR20

CR30

CR90

CR98

CR05

CR03

CR22

CR97

CR01

CR09

CR08

CR06

CR11

CR07

CR12

CR04

CI53

CH01

CR33

CI59

CI56

CI04

CX17

CX47

CX18

CC02

CR32

CH20

CI15

CI16

CV12

CV11

CV10

CV02

CC05

CC07CC06

CI05

CI03

CI02

CI55

CS42

CR15

CS81

CI10

CR92

CR41

CR93

CR95

CR96

CS04

CX58 CX19

CR24

DI40

DI30

IP20

1

JP47

JP46

JX51

JP71

JP70

JL72

JS98

JF51

JF50

JF52

JF55

JH06

JX57

JF54

JR58

JR59

JS53

JS50

JS42

JS51

JS40

JV52

JH54

JS54

JX43

JX44JV55

JV54

JV53

JC52

JI54

JI51

JR63JR

62

JI58

JI53

JI52

JF56

JH51

JX29

JS69

JX52

JX53

JX54

JS52

JS58

JS70

JS62

JS59

JS56 JS66JS65

JS55

JX42

JI57

JR54

JR53

JS61

JL71

JR66

JR65

JX58

JR64

JS43

JS57

JV56

JS44JF

49

JF53

JP44

JP45

DL42

DX01

IR01

LS40

LS41

LX62

LX59

LS63

LS61

LS62 LS

60

GFEDCBA

1

2

3

4

0

GFDBA

1

2

3

4

0

7

J

5

6

H MLK

V

Z

8

7

J

A B C D E F G J K L MN

P

MLK

5

6

9

H

H

1051

6550

.0A

DP16DP17

DP19

5

TP14

3

12

DP09DP50

E

C

B

TP50

RP15

BP15

LP01 BP01

FP01

DP18

TP21

DP01

DP03

DP04

DP02

CP10

TP44

TP15

21 19 18 17 16 15 14 13

IP61

TL42

2

5

CAD-

REF:

DST5V

LP503 5 6

7

8 9

U-

7 1

1

TimerU UP

8V

SYS

U-Video

+UA

-UA

1

32

TL02 TL55

TL52

IP87

BL01

TL33

3 1

6 4LL32

IP95BL02

TL32

HOR

LP504 8 9

80 1

16

17 32

1BR

01

BX01

31 5

20

21

2

211713931

BX02TX15

IX0110 1

6 1

1

BX04

1

1

1

BS91 BS90

BS80

1

6 BV01

64

1

4 BX50

33

32

64

1IS40

TX45

BE

ON+5V

+5V

9 IF01

BF01

BL01

3 1

6 4LL32

LL26

B

C

E

TL34

DL21

DL22

GAK

TL51

LL22

C

TL41

DL14

DL13

TL14

HOR

VERT

1

LL05

10

9

87

6 54

3

2

1

SOLDER SIDE - CÔTE SOUDURES - LÖTSEITE - LATO SALDATURE - LADO SOLDADURAS

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

10 cm

10 cm 5 cm

10 c

m

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

GB

1

About this manual

This document is common to several television models. Therefore, certain functions or settings may not apply tothe model you have purchased

About the switch

The position of the ON/OFF switch differs depending on the model. It may be located on the front or on theright-hand side of your set (see the drawing inside the cover page of your manual).

About safety

To ensure your own safety and safe operation of the equipment, observe the following instructionsthoroughly.

TV sets require sufficient ventilation to prevent their components from overheating, which will cause failure. Do notblock the ventilation openings at the rear. If you place your TV set in a special piece of furniture, make sure thereis enough space for unhindered air circulation. Do not place the TV set in the close vicinity of a heater.The TV set has been designed for use in dry rooms. Should you use it, in exceptionalcircumstances in the open air (example: on the balcony, in the veranda or tent), you must absolutely protect itagainst moisture (dew, rain, splash water). Before switching on a cold TV set in a warm room, you should wait untilany condensation in the screen has dried by itself.Maximum ambient temperature: 35°CMaximum humidity: 85%By the end of your TV evening or when away from home for a longer period, we recommend that you turn off theTV set with the On/Off-switch.Even when the On/Off-switch is in the Off-position, your TV set is not fully disconnected from the mains. Todisconnect the set completely, the mains plug must be pulled out.The mains plug must be easily accessible.In the following cases, we recommend that you pull out the mains connector:1. During a thunderstorm. In such a case, it is advisable that you also disconnect the TV set from the aerial socket.2. When odour or smoke emanates from the set.Never attempt to open your TV set yourself.Further information:The TV set shielding is sufficient to prevent X-radiation to the exterior.Any operation performed by a non skilled person, change of high voltage or replacement of the picture tube by amodel not complying with the manufacturer specification are likely to cause considerable increase in X-radiation.A TV set modified in such a way no longer complies with the manufacturers’ specification and must not be used.

About cleaning

The screen is to be cleaned with liquid glass cleaners.: Never use abrasive products.: Clean the cabinet with a soft cloth soaked with neutral cleaner. Do not use solvents, such as white spirit oralcohol-based cleaning products since they may damage your television.: At regular intervals, clean the ventilation grids at the rear of the TV set.

About degaussing

The terrestrial magnetic field may have an influence on your TV set. This influence is revealed by the colouredspots, which appear on the screen.Should this be the case:: Turn the equipment off by means of the On/Off-switch.: Wait about one hour before switching the set on again.This procedure performs automatic degaussing of the screen. Should there still be coloured spots on the screen,repeat the operation.

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

GB

Contents

2

Page 4

Using the remote controland fitting the batteries.

Page

How to call up a menuand how to select afunction, a setting or anoption.

5

Inst

alla

tio

n About this manual 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

About the switch 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

About safety 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

About cleaning 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

About degaussing 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Basic connections 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Remote control 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Navigation principles 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Calling up the Installation main menu 5. . .

Calling up the Settings summary 5. . . . . . .

Calling up a Menu 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Navigating within the Menus 5. . . . . . . . . . .

Installing your television for thefirst time 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Automatic installation 7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Programme organisation 8. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Manual programming 9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Personal settings 10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Preferences 11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Inst

ruct

ion

sfo

rU

se

Daily viewing 12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Picture Adjustment 12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Sound Settings 12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Time 13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

List of Channels 14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Selecting Programmes 15. . . . . . . . . . . . .

Scrolling the Programmes 15. . . . . . . . . . .

Audio-visual (AV) Programmes 15. . . . . .

Volume Control 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Muting the Sound 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Zoom (16/9 models only) 15. . . . . . . . . . .

Displaying Information 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Television Lock 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Switching Off the Television 15. . . . . . . . .

Teletext 16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Standard Functions 16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Other Connections 17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Other Possibilities 17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Connecting a HiFi or AV amplifier 17. . . .

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

GB

$

ContinentalEurope

United Kingdom

The plug is fitted with a fuse which protects yourtelevision. If your television does not work, the fuse maybe blown. In this case, replace it with an identical 5 AmpASTA or lr BSI (BS 1362) certified fuse.

Note: the mains lead of your television is fitted with amoulded plug. This lead contains all the safety equipment,so you are advised when replacing it not to use anon-specific commercially-available model.

2

Basic connections

3

Basic connections

The mains plug (1) supplies power to the television. Thetelevision must only be plugged in to a 220-240 V - 50 Hzpower supply. It must never be plugged in to a DC source. Ifthe plug comes away from the lead, never attempt to plug itin: this could cause electrocution.

The aerial socket (2), located on the rear of the television, canbe used to connect an external aerial or other applianceequipped with a modulator such as a VCR, satellite receiver,etc.

If you connect an appliance to the aerial jack, you must giveit a channel number. To do this, switch on the appliance, thenuse the television to find the modulator channel (see theappliance manual). Now give it a programme number andmemorise it (see Manual Programming of channels). Then,when you wish to use the appliance, simply select itsprogramme number on the television. This procedure is notrequired for VCR’s not equipped with a modulator.

The SCART socket AV1 (3), located on the rear of thetelevision, is intended to connect a VCR or a camcorder(VHS, 8 mm), a Canal+ decoder, a video games console orRGB-signal emitting appliances.

The SCART socket AV2 (3), located on the rear of thetelevision, is intended to connect a VCR or a camcorder(VHS, 8 mm, S-VHS or Hi-8).

We strongly recommend the use of this type of connection,which gives a better picture quality. To use the peripheralappliance that you have connected, press the AV key on yourremote control (press once to select AV1; twice to selectAV2; three times for AV3: see ”Other Connections”). Thisselection is automatic for some appliances. Pressing “”play”on a VCR, or switching on a satellite receiver connected toAV1 or AV2 will automatically switch on your television.

When you stop the VCR, if you have not changed channelswhile watching the VCR, the television automaticallyswitches back to the channel you were watching beforehand.If the television has been switched on from the VCR, itswitches to standby when the VCR is switched off. Thetelevision automatically switches to 16/9 format if theconnected appliance delivers the corresponding signal.

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

GB

This key is active only when usingthe Teletext (blue key)

Display of channel, time, sound (yellowbutton) (and zoom for models with zoom)

The red, green, yellow andblue keys are also used forthe Teletext.

Standby

Right/Left Selection withinmenus andZoom Function (for models withthis function)

Call up Teletext / Toptext /Fastext function (purple button)

Go to adjustment function MENU

Go to programmes and enternumerical values in menus

Move Up/Down in menus

Change programme

Volume adjustment

To leave a menu or Teletext

Sound mute

Call up programme list(green button)

Selecting appliancesconnected to the television

(AV1, AV2 ...)

Confirm an action or validate amenu option

Reminder of picturepreferences (red button)

For programme numbers higherthan 10, press the 0 key on theremote control: ”- -” appears onthe screen. Now use thenumber keys on the remotecontrol to enter first the tensdigit then the units digit.

8

Please respect the environment! Before throwing any batteries away, consult yourdistributor who may be able to take them back for specific recycling.

Remote control

4

Remote control

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

GB

INSTALLATION MAIN MENU

Exit

Manual programming

Auto installation

Programme organisation

Personal settings

SUMMARY

Exit

Teletext

Picture

Sound

List

Time

Preferences

Navigation principles

5

Navigation principles

Calling up the Installation main menu

If there is no menu displayed on the screen,press and hold the key on the remotecontrol. The settings SUMMARY is displayedfirst, followed by the INSTALLATION MAINMENU which you can use to operate yourtelevision.

Calling up the Settings summary

Press and release the key on theremote control to display the list of menusavailable for using your television functions oradjusting your television

Calling up a Menu

Select the menu you wish using the Up/Downkeys. Press the key to validate..

Navigating within the Menus

Use the Up/Down keys 1 to select a line.

Use the Left/Right keys 2 to:

- Increase or decrease a value:for example:Fine tuning

- Select an option:for example: Reception Aerial

Reception Cable- Activate or deactivate an option:

for example: Decoder- Access a sub-menu:

for example: Picture preferences

You can use the 3 key to:

- Activate or deactivate an option:for example: Decoder

- Access a sub-menu:for example: Picture preferences

- Validate an action:for example: Store on PR number

Use the 4 key to exit a menu.

MANUAL PROGRAMMING

Return

StandardReceptionAutosearchFine tuningStore on PR numberNameDecoderExternal sound path

EURO BGCableCH- -

- -- - - -

Enter channel number or startautosearch with < or >.

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

GB

EnglishFrançais OKDeutschItalianoEspañolPortuguêsNederlandsSvenskaDanskNorwisch

(Fig. 1)(Fig. 1)

(Fig. 2) COUNTRY SELECTION

ExitUnited KingdomEireFranceGermanyItalySpainPortugalHollandBelgium and LuxembourgSwitzerlandAustriaSwedenDenmarkNorway

Other

Select your country and press OK

SEARCHING

AUTO INSTALLATION

003 STATIONS FOUND

Searching for TV stations.Please wait. To cancel press EXIT.

(Fig. 3)

Installing your television for the first time

6

Installing your television for the first time

First plug the television into a mains power outlet and to the external aerial or a cable network, then switch on usingthe ON/OFF switch located on the front or the side of your set.When you switch on your television for the first time, the language selection menu* is displayed (Fig. 1). If this doesnot happen, set the television to standby then press and hold the key on the television until this menu appears.

Installation Instructions (start)

1. Use the Up/Down keys to select thelanguage in which you wish the menus to bedisplayed.

2. Then validate using .

3. A list of countries* is now displayed (Fig. 2).Select the country in which you live, or thecountry from which you wish to receive thebroadcasts if you live in a border area.

4. Then validate using .

5. A welcome message is displayed.

6. Run the automatic installation sequenceusing .

7. A message appears to inform you thatautomatic installation has started (Fig. 3).Wait for a few minutes.A new message will inform you whenautomatic installation is completed.

8. If you wish to check or modify the channelorganisation, press and see theProgramme organisation chapter.

If you do not wish to modify the channelorganisation, you can exit the menu bypressing then watch the channel ofyour choice. Choose the desired channelusing the number keys (1, 2, 3, ...) and the

/ keys.

If you have a decoder, see the Manualprogramming chapter.

Your television will only search for channelscorresponding to the country you haveselected. See the Manual channelprogramming chapter to install any channelsnot found.For cable networks, read the Automaticchannel installation chapter to install anychannels not found.

*The list of languages and countries may varyfrom one model to another.

Installation Instructions (end)

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

GB

INSTALLATION MAIN MENU

Exit

Manual programming

Auto installation

Programme organisation

Personal settings

SEARCHING

AUTO INSTALLATION

003 STATIONS FOUND

Searching for TV stations.Please wait. To cancel press EXIT.

Automatic installation

7

Automatic installation

The Automatic installation function is useful if you have to go through the installation procedure again, such aswhen moving house. This function deletes all previously memorised programmes. To install a new channel, youshould use the Manual programming function.

Before running AUTO INSTALLATION, check the PERSONAL SETTINGS menu to ensure that the countrydisplayed is correct.

Your television will only search for channels corresponding to the selected country, so see the Manualprogramming chapter to install any channels not found. For cable networks, if you have not found certainchannels, select Other instead of a country name in the PERSONAL SETTINGS menu, then run automaticinstallation again.

1. Press and hold the key on the remotecontrol to display the INSTALLATION MAINMENU (The SUMMARY appears first,followed by the INSTALLATION MAINMENU).

2. Select the Auto installation line.

3. Validate using .

A message will inform you that Automaticinstallation has begun.Wait for a few minutes.A new message will inform you whenAutomatic installation is completed.

If you wish to check or reorganize your channeldisplay, press the key and see theProgramme organisation chapter.

If you do not wish to reorganize yourprogrammes, you can exit this menu bypressing , then watch the programme ofyour choice. Choose the desired programmeusing the number keys (1, 2, 3, ...) and the/ keys.

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

GB

INSTALLATION MAIN MENU

Exit

Manual programming

Auto installation

Programme organisation

Personal settings

PROGRAMME ORGANISATION

Return

Select program.Swap with PR.Change pr. nameDelete program.

13- -EURO13

10 MTV11 FR212 TF113 EURO14 CH4015 CC0116 ARTE17 CART18 - - - -19 ARD

Select programme number usingPR-/PR+ or </> or 0 to 9 keys.

Select the line marked Return to return to the previousmenu.

Programme organisation

8

Programme organisation

During automatic installation, your television will search for the channel name and assign it a programme numberaccording to the selected country. You can use the PROGRAMME ORGANISATION menu to name any channelname not found, to change the order in which the channels are displayed, or to delete channels for which receptionis too poor. Follow the messages at the bottom of the screen. For further details, read the information below.

If you wish to access thePROGRAMME ORGANISATION,menu thereafter, first press and holdthe key on the remote control todisplay the INSTALLATION MAINMENU (the SUMMARY is displayedfirst, followed by the INSTALLATIONMAIN MENU) then select Programmeorganisation and validate using .

- To delete a programme for which receptionis too poor:1. Select the line marked Select program.2. Use the / or Left/Right keys to list

your channels.3. When you get to a channel you wish to delete,

select the line marked Delete program.4. Press to delete the programme.

5. .Validate using .

- To organize your channels to suit you:1. Select the line marked Select program..2. Use the / or Left/Right keys and

the programmes logos to find the programmeto which you wish to give the No.1.Its present number appears on the linemarked Select program..

3. Select the line marked Swap with PR.4. Enter 01.5. Press . The two programmes swap

position and the desired programmebecomes N°1.

6. Repeat the above procedure for the otherchannels.

- To name your channels:1. Select the line marked Change pr. name2. Select the character you wish to modify using

the Left/Right keys.3. Use the and keys to display the letter you

require.The name you have entered will bememorised when you move to another line orexit the menu.

If you wish to change the order in whichyour programmes are displayed or ifyou wish to name other programmes,repeat the procedures describedabove.

When you have finished organizing theprogrammes, exit the menu using .

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

GB

INSTALLATION MAIN MENU

Exit

Manual programming

Auto installation

Programme organisation

Personal settings

MANUAL PROGRAMMING

Return

StandardReceptionAutosearchFine tuningStore on PR numberNameDecoderExternal sound path

EURO BGCableCH- -

- -- - - -

Enter channel number or startautosearch with < or >.

Select the line marked Return to return to the previous

Manual programming

9

Manual programming

The manual installation function is useful if some programmes have not been installed even after AUTOMATICINSTALLATION.

1. Press and hold , the SUMMARY isdisplayed first, followed by theINSTALLATION MAIN MENU.

2. Select the line marked Manualprogramming.

3. Display the menu using .4. Now continue by following the messages at

the bottom of the screen. For further details,read the information below.

Standard :Select the standard using Left/Right keys thatcorresponds to your country from the list ofstandards.

The number of standards proposed will differfrom one model to another.

France for France and LuxemburgDKK’ eg. for Eastern Europe and

the Middle-EastI for the United Kingdom and

IrelandEuro BG for Western Europe

Reception :Your television can pick up channels either viaan aerial (RF channels) or via a cable network.Certain cable networks use the samefrequencies as the RF channels. If this is thecase, you must select Aerial instead of Cable.Autosearch :Enter the programme number if you know it. Ifnot, search using the Left/Right keys. Yourtelevision will stop at the first channel it tunesinto. If you wish to memorize it, go to the linemarked Store on PR number. If not, resumethe search using the Left/Right keys.

Fine tuning :You can use this to improve the picture if the transmitter frequency is out of adjustment. Use the Left/Right keysto obtain the best possible picture and sound.Store on PR number :Enter the programme number you wish to give the channel (e.g.: 01 for BBC1). Memorise using .Name :If the station has been identified by the transmitter, its name will be inscribed automatically. You can change theproposed name or enter it if it has not already been identified. Select the character you wish to modify using theLeft/Right keys. Use the or keys to display the character you desire.Decoder :Use the Left/Right keys to tick the box if the channel is coded and if a decoder is connected to the AV1 jack.External sound path :Switch on your decoder. If the sound is coded or if you have no sound, activate or deactivate the box as requiredusing the Left/Right keys.

Once you have made all the adjustments you wish to a programme, go to Store on PR number and pressto memorise these. Then move on to the next channel.

Once you have completed your Manual Programming, exit the menu using .

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

GB

INSTALLATION MAIN MENU

Exit

Manual programming

Auto installation

Programme organisation

Personal settings

Personal settings

10

Personal settings

1. Press and hold the key: theSUMMARY is displayed first, followed by theINSTALLATION MAIN MENU.

2. Select the line marked Personal settings.

3. Display the menu using .4. Continue by following the messages at the

bottom of the screen.

For further details, read the information below.

Menu language :Select the language in which the menus are tobe displayed.

Country :Indicate the country in which you are if you wishto rerun Automatic Programming.

For cable networks, if certain channelshave not been found, select Otherinstead of the country name before run-ning automatic installation again.You may find that the characters of cer-tain teletext languages are inaccess-ible for the selected country.

Auto volume level :This is a sound control function which aims toequalise the volume level between differentchannels, and between different programmeson the same channel.

Activate or deactivate the auto volume level asrequired.

On models equipped with Virtual DolbySurround, this function remainsinactive if Dolby Virtual has beenselected in the SOUND menu (seeVolume Control).

AV1, AV2, AV3 name :Use these to give a name to each of youraudio-visual programmes. Select the characteryou wish to modify using the Left/Right keys.Use the or keys to display the desiredcharacter.

Prog. to be used for reference time :To display the time using the key or to usethe alarm function, the television clock must beset to the correct time. Select the line markedProg. to be used for reference time and selecta channel which broadcasts teletext. The timeis set automatically and is displayed after thechannel number.

Exit the menu using .

13:15

PERSONAL SETTINGS

Return

Menu language

Country

Auto volume level

AV1 nameAV2 nameAV3 name

Prog. to be usedfor reference time

Select a station from which you wantto get the reference time.

English

UK

VCR- - - -CAMC

06

Select the line marked Return to return to the previousmenu.

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

GB

PREFERENCESReturn

Show program. numberAV2 video inputAV3 video inputFormat controlPicture preferences

VideoS-VideoAuto

PICTURE PREFERENCES

Return

SettingsBrightnessColourContrast

Personal

Select the line marked Return to return to the previousmenu.

Preferences

11

Preferences

1. Display the SUMMARY by pressing andreleasing the key on the remotecontrol .

2. Select the line marked Preferences.3. Display the menu using .

Make your choice from the proposedoptions. Use the information below to helpyou.

Show program. number :If you wish to permanently display the numberof the programme you are watching, tick the boxusing the Left/Right keys. Press the Left/Rightkeys again to deactivate this function.

AV2 video input :Use the Left/Right keys to select the type of video signal received at the AV2 SCART socket (Video or S-Video).

AV3 video input :Use the Left/Right keys to select the type of video signal received at the AV3 sockets (these sockets are locatedon the front or the side of the television).

Format control :Use the Left/Right keys to select the desired picture format:

Auto : if the transmitter (for 16/9 format TV’s) or the appliance connected to one of the peripheral jacks deliversthe switching signal, the television automatically adapts to the transmitted picture format.16/9 : manually selects widescreen picture format.4/3 : manually selects this picture format.

If you have selected 16/9 or 4/3, the television will switch back to Auto when you change channels or youswitch off.

Picture preferences :

To access the PICTURE PREFERENCESmenu, press .

If you wish, you can personalize certainpicture settings. Select and set theproposed options. Use the informationbelow to help you.

Settings :Select Standard or Personal.

Standard corresponds to the factory settings.Personal corresponds to the settings that youhave entered yourself.

The lines Brightness, Colour andContrast are displayed only if you haveselected Personal on the Settings line.

Select each line one after the other and enteryour required settings. You can recall thesepicture settings by pressing the red key on theremote control.

Exit the menu using .

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

GB

PICTURE

Return

BrightnessColourContrastSharpness

Contrast expandTone

NeutralCold

Select the line marked Return to return to the previousmenu.

SOUND

Return

Sound typeSound mode

Balance L/RTrebleBassSurround effect

AutomaticNormal

Broadcastmonostereodual

NICAM-3AV

Choiceautomatic - mono

mono - stereosound 1 - sound 2

sound 1 - sound 2 - sound 3stereo - sound 1 - sound 2

Mode Effect

Normal : reproduces the original sound (mono or stereo).

Wide : gives a stereo effect on mono sounds.Stereo wide : accentuates the stereo effect.Magic : accentuates the stereo effects and

adds echo.Dolby Virtual : Virtual Dolby Surround.

Virtual Surround Dolby is based on Dolby Pro Logicdecoding for the reproduction of the Left, Right, Centre andVirtual Surround sound channels using two loudspeakers.“”Dolby”, “”Pro Logic” and the double -D symbol are trademarks of theDolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation.

Manufactured under licence from Dolby Laboratories LicensingCorporation.

Daily viewing

12

Daily viewing

Picture Adjustment

Display the SUMMARY using the key onthe remote control. Select Picture. Validateusing . The PICTURE menu is displayed.

Select and set the proposed options. Usethe information below to help you.

Brightness, Colour, Contrast, Sharpness:Select each of these lines one after the other andset as required.Contrast expand :Select this line then choose the desired Contrastexpand setting (High or Low).Tone :Select this line then choose the desired colourtone (Warm, Neutral or Cold).Exit the menu using .

Sound Settings

Display the SUMMARY using the key onthe remote control. Select the line markedSound. Validate using . The SOUND menuis displayed.

Select and set the proposed options. Usethe information below to help you.

Sound type :The choices available to you depend onyour television model and the broadcast.Stereo, Dual or NICAM reception and thecorresponding choices are only availableon Stereo or NICAM Stereo televisions.

Select this line, then select the type of sound youdesire.Sound mode :Select this line, then choose the desired modeusing the Left/Right keys.

The choices available to you depend onyour television model and the type ofsound. Magic and Dolby Virtual modesare only available in stereo on TV’sequipped with Virtual Dolby Surround.Stereo wide is only available on Stereo orNicam televisions not equipped withVirtual Dolby Surround.

Balance L/R :Select this line, then balance the sound betweenthe Left and Right loudspeakers.Treble, Bass :Select each of these lines and adjust to suit you.Surround effect :

This line appears only if you have selectedDolby Virtual on the Sound mode line.

Select this line and adjust the surround effect tosuit you.Exit the menu using .

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

GB

TIMEReturn

Sleep timer

Current time

Wake-up timerWake-up timeProgramme numberDaily

Select the line marked Return to return to the previousmenu.

00 : 00

11 : 28

07 : 0701 BBC1

Daily viewing

13

Time

You can use this menu to switch yourtelevision on or off automatically at a settime.

Display the SUMMARY using the key onthe remote control. Select the line markedTime. Validate using . The TIME menu isdisplayed.

Sleep timer :Use the Left/Right keys to choose how long youwish to view before the television switches off.The television will switch off automatically at theend of this period. To cancel, set to 00:00.

One minute before switching off, a message willinform you that the television is about to go off.If you wish to keep it on, press any key on theremote control or the local keyboard.The television switches to Child lock mode afteran automatic stop. It can only be switched onagain from the remote control.

Current time :The current time is given by the Teletext (see PERSONAL SETTINGS menu). You can also set the time manuallyusing the number keys (0 to 9) on your remote control.

Wake-up timer :

If you wish to be woken up by your television on the channel of your choice, you must first set the televisionclock to the correct time (see above).

Use the Left/Right keys to tick the box and display the Wake-up timer menu.

The lines Wake-up time, Programme number and Daily only appear if you have ticked the box on theline marked Wake-up timer.

Wake-up time :Use the number keys (0 to 9) on the remote control to set the time at which you wish to be woken.

Programme number :Select the programme you wish to be woken by.

Daily :Tick this box if you wish to be awakened at this time every day.

Exit the menu using .

Set the television to standby using the key on the remote control. The red indicator light on the televisionflashes.The television will come on automatically at the programmed time and will go off one hour later if you do not usethe remote control.

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

GB

LIST

Exit01 BBC 102 BBC 203 FR 304 CC1905 ARTE TV06 M607 CNN08 PREM09 EURO

Page -/+Programme: 0 - 9

Daily viewing

14

List of Channels

This list contains up to 10 pages. The number of pages depends onthe number of programmes memorized. For each programme, the listindicates the station name or type and the programme number. The3 AV programmes are listed on page 11.

To display the list, press the key on the remote controlorDisplay the SUMMARY using the key on the remote control. Select theline marked List. Validate using .

The page displayed is the page containing the programme you are watching.It is identified in the list by the symbol TV.To display the next page, press the Right key.To display the previous page, press the Left key.

If you wish to watch one of the programmes on the page displayed:Enter the last digit of the programme number (e.g. for 25 simply enter 5) on theremote control. The list disappears and your programme is selected.

Or,- Select the programme using the Up/Down keys.- Validate using .- Exit the menu using .

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

GB

Daily viewing

15

Selecting ProgrammesFor channels 1 to 9, press the number key corresponding to the desired channel on the remote control. Forprogramme numbers higher than 10, press the key on the remote control: ”- -” appears on the screen. Now usethe number keys on the remote control to enter first the tens digit then the units digit.

If you press while ”- -” is already displayed, the display returns to 0- , in which case you can only selectprogrammes 1 to 9.

Scrolling the Programmes

You can scroll through the programmes using the / keys.

Audio-visual (AV) Programmes

Press the key to call the last audio-visual (AV) programme watched. Press repeatedly to scroll the audio-visual(AV) programmes on the screen.

Volume Control

Use the volume +/- keys to increase or decrease the volume.

Muting the Sound

Press the key to mute the sound. Press again to restore the sound.

Zoom(16/9 models only)

This function is useful for 4/3 or letterbox pictures (black bands at the top and bottom of the screen).Use the Left/Right keys to select the desired zoom position:

ZOOM 0: 4/3 picture (black bands at the sides).FULL SCREEN: for a 4/3 picture that fills the screen.ZOOM 1: for letterbox pictures.

Displaying Information

Press the key to display the following information on the screen: channel number and name, time, zoom, typeof sound.

Television LockYou can use this function to prevent anyone from switching on the television using the buttons on thetelevision set.

The buttons on the television set are locked in the following cases:- If you switch off the set by pressing and holding the key on the remote control for more than 3 seconds,- After a programmed stop,- If the television is set to standby when the alarm has been set.

When the television is locked the red power will be light flashing.The television can now only be operated from the remote control.To release the lock, press any number key on the remote control.

Switching Off the TelevisionTo switch off the television, press the Standby key on the remote control or press the ON/OFF switch on thetelevision set.

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

GB

Teletext

16

Teletext

Certain channels broadcast an electronic news page service with a range of different information services.The presentation and use of the Teletext differ from one country to another and from one programme toanother (Teletext, Fastext or Toptext).

Press the key to display the Teletext Index (page 100).

A message will inform you if the programme you are watching has no Teletext service.To call up a page:Enter the 3 digits of the page number you wish to consult (for example, 150 or 170).After a moment, the page appears.Use the Left/Right keys to consult the next or the previous page.

Standard Functions

Rolling pages:Some information is displayed over several sub-pages. It is scrolled on your screen as it is received.To stop scrolling, select STOP using the Up/Down keys and validate using . Press again to continuescrolling.

Masked text:To reveal a hidden answer (for example in a quiz programme), select ??? using the Up/Down keys and validateusing . Press again to hide the answers.

Zoom :Select ZOOM using the Up/Down keys then press the key once to magnify the top of the screen, twice tomagnify the bottom of the screen (the page will scroll from top to bottom) and a third time to return to the normaldisplay.

Display:You can superpose the Teletext page over the TV picture. To do this, select MIX using the Up/Down keys thenvalidate by pressing the key. Press again to return to the normal display.

Sub-code:You can use this to access a sub-page directly.Select “- - - -” using the Up/Down keys. Then enter the four digits of the required sub-page number.

Certain programmes have Alarm pages that you can set to appear at the time you require. For example:for 15h30 enter 1530 as the sub-page number then press . You must of course leave the televisionon the programme which is to transmit the Alarm page.

Index:To call up the index page, select 100 using the Up/Down keys then validate using .

Direct access:You can use the yellow and blue keys to directly access the pages indicated in the bar at the bottom of the screen.

Fastext functions:If the Teletext you receive is Fastext, a sub-menu at the bottom of the screen appears which you can use to selectfrom the 4 headings according to its colour.To select a heading, press the key of the corresponding colour.

Toptext functions:If the Teletext you receive is TOPtext, the pages are arranged into headings and sub-headings by subject.You can select the first page of a heading directly by pressing the blue key, or the first page of a sub-heading bypressing the yellow key.

Other functions:With certain Teletext channels, it is possible to have sub-titles overlaid on the screen for certain broadcasts as wellas certain news flash updates.The corresponding page number is indicated in the Telextext index.Once you have found the page, the sub-title or the news flash will be overlaid onto the TV picture.The navigation status bar disappears after a few seconds. To display it again, press the key.

To exit Teletext, press or .

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

GB

* on models equipped with this function

* on models equipped with this function

Other Connections

17

Other Connections

The CINCH Video and Audio sockets (1)* are provided toconnect a VHS or 8mm camcorder.

The S and CINCH Audio sockets (1)* are provided to connecta S-VHS or Hi-8 camcorder.

To use the appliance you have connected, press thekey several times until the AV3 programme is

selected on the screen. When you switch off theconnected appliance, the television will remain onthe AV3 programme and you must use the numericalkeys on the remote control to select a programme.

The headphone socket (2)* is provided to connect aheadphone or earphones.

Connecting headphones mute the sound from thetelevision loudspeakers.

Other PossibilitiesCopying a cassette:Plug the VCR you wish to record to into the SCART socketAV2.Plug the appliance you wish to copy from as follows: intothe peripheral jack AV1 for a VCR; into the CINCH AV3 jacksfor a camcorder (see table below).

PLAY RECORD CALLAppliance SCART Socket Appliance SCART Socket

CALLPROGRAMME

VCRPeripheral

AV1

VCRou

CamcorderAV2 AV1

CamcorderCinches or

S-VideoAV3

VCRou

CamcorderAV2 AV3

Connecting a HiFi or AV amplifierIf you wish to connect a HiFi or AV amplifier, plug it into theperipheral jack AV2 using a SCART-CINCH type lead.

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

MANUEL D’UTILISATION - BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG - MANUALE DI UTILIZZAZIONE - USER MANUAL

MANUAL DE UTILIZACIÓN - GEBRUIKSAANWIJZING - BRUKSANGVISNING

%(7-(1,1*69(-/('1,1* - FOLHETO DE UTILIZAÇÃO

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

10 cm

10 cm 5 cm

10 c

m

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

GB

1

About this manual

This document is common to several television models. Therefore, certain functions or settings may not apply tothe model you have purchased

About the switch

The position of the ON/OFF switch differs depending on the model. It may be located on the front or on theright-hand side of your set (see the drawing inside the cover page of your manual).

About safety

To ensure your own safety and safe operation of the equipment, observe the following instructionsthoroughly.

TV sets require sufficient ventilation to prevent their components from overheating, which will cause failure. Do notblock the ventilation openings at the rear. If you place your TV set in a special piece of furniture, make sure thereis enough space for unhindered air circulation. Do not place the TV set in the close vicinity of a heater.The TV set has been designed for use in dry rooms. Should you use it, in exceptionalcircumstances in the open air (example: on the balcony, in the veranda or tent), you must absolutely protect itagainst moisture (dew, rain, splash water). Before switching on a cold TV set in a warm room, you should wait untilany condensation in the screen has dried by itself.Maximum ambient temperature: 35°CMaximum humidity: 85%By the end of your TV evening or when away from home for a longer period, we recommend that you turn off theTV set with the On/Off-switch.Even when the On/Off-switch is in the Off-position, your TV set is not fully disconnected from the mains. Todisconnect the set completely, the mains plug must be pulled out.The mains plug must be easily accessible.In the following cases, we recommend that you pull out the mains connector:1. During a thunderstorm. In such a case, it is advisable that you also disconnect the TV set from the aerial socket.2. When odour or smoke emanates from the set.Never attempt to open your TV set yourself.Further information:The TV set shielding is sufficient to prevent X-radiation to the exterior.Any operation performed by a non skilled person, change of high voltage or replacement of the picture tube by amodel not complying with the manufacturer specification are likely to cause considerable increase in X-radiation.A TV set modified in such a way no longer complies with the manufacturers’ specification and must not be used.

About cleaning

The screen is to be cleaned with liquid glass cleaners.: Never use abrasive products.: Clean the cabinet with a soft cloth soaked with neutral cleaner. Do not use solvents, such as white spirit oralcohol-based cleaning products since they may damage your television.: At regular intervals, clean the ventilation grids at the rear of the TV set.

About degaussing

The terrestrial magnetic field may have an influence on your TV set. This influence is revealed by the colouredspots, which appear on the screen.Should this be the case:: Turn the equipment off by means of the On/Off-switch.: Wait about one hour before switching the set on again.This procedure performs automatic degaussing of the screen. Should there still be coloured spots on the screen,repeat the operation.

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

GB

Contents

2

Page 4

Using the remote controland fitting the batteries.

Page

How to call up a menuand how to select afunction, a setting or anoption.

5

Inst

alla

tio

n About this manual 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

About the switch 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

About safety 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

About cleaning 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

About degaussing 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Basic connections 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Remote control 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Navigation principles 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Calling up the Installation main menu 5. . .

Calling up the Settings summary 5. . . . . . .

Calling up a Menu 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Navigating within the Menus 5. . . . . . . . . . .

Installing your television for thefirst time 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Automatic installation 7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Programme organisation 8. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Manual programming 9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Personal settings 10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Preferences 11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Inst

ruct

ion

sfo

rU

se

Daily viewing 12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Picture Adjustment 12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Sound Settings 12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Time 13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

List of Channels 14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Selecting Programmes 15. . . . . . . . . . . . .

Scrolling the Programmes 15. . . . . . . . . . .

Audio-visual (AV) Programmes 15. . . . . .

Volume Control 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Muting the Sound 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Zoom (16/9 models only) 15. . . . . . . . . . .

Displaying Information 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Television Lock 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Switching Off the Television 15. . . . . . . . .

Teletext 16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Standard Functions 16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Other Connections 17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Other Possibilities 17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Connecting a HiFi or AV amplifier 17. . . .

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

GB

$

ContinentalEurope

United Kingdom

The plug is fitted with a fuse which protects yourtelevision. If your television does not work, the fuse maybe blown. In this case, replace it with an identical 5 AmpASTA or lr BSI (BS 1362) certified fuse.

Note: the mains lead of your television is fitted with amoulded plug. This lead contains all the safety equipment,so you are advised when replacing it not to use anon-specific commercially-available model.

2

Basic connections

3

Basic connections

The mains plug (1) supplies power to the television. Thetelevision must only be plugged in to a 220-240 V - 50 Hzpower supply. It must never be plugged in to a DC source. Ifthe plug comes away from the lead, never attempt to plug itin: this could cause electrocution.

The aerial socket (2), located on the rear of the television, canbe used to connect an external aerial or other applianceequipped with a modulator such as a VCR, satellite receiver,etc.

If you connect an appliance to the aerial jack, you must giveit a channel number. To do this, switch on the appliance, thenuse the television to find the modulator channel (see theappliance manual). Now give it a programme number andmemorise it (see Manual Programming of channels). Then,when you wish to use the appliance, simply select itsprogramme number on the television. This procedure is notrequired for VCR’s not equipped with a modulator.

The SCART socket AV1 (3), located on the rear of thetelevision, is intended to connect a VCR or a camcorder(VHS, 8 mm), a Canal+ decoder, a video games console orRGB-signal emitting appliances.

The SCART socket AV2 (3), located on the rear of thetelevision, is intended to connect a VCR or a camcorder(VHS, 8 mm, S-VHS or Hi-8).

We strongly recommend the use of this type of connection,which gives a better picture quality. To use the peripheralappliance that you have connected, press the AV key on yourremote control (press once to select AV1; twice to selectAV2; three times for AV3: see ”Other Connections”). Thisselection is automatic for some appliances. Pressing “”play”on a VCR, or switching on a satellite receiver connected toAV1 or AV2 will automatically switch on your television.

When you stop the VCR, if you have not changed channelswhile watching the VCR, the television automaticallyswitches back to the channel you were watching beforehand.If the television has been switched on from the VCR, itswitches to standby when the VCR is switched off. Thetelevision automatically switches to 16/9 format if theconnected appliance delivers the corresponding signal.

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

GB

This key is active only when usingthe Teletext (blue key)

Display of channel, time, sound (yellowbutton) (and zoom for models with zoom)

The red, green, yellow andblue keys are also used forthe Teletext.

Standby

Right/Left Selection withinmenus andZoom Function (for models withthis function)

Call up Teletext / Toptext /Fastext function (purple button)

Go to adjustment function MENU

Go to programmes and enternumerical values in menus

Move Up/Down in menus

Change programme

Volume adjustment

To leave a menu or Teletext

Sound mute

Call up programme list(green button)

Selecting appliancesconnected to the television

(AV1, AV2 ...)

Confirm an action or validate amenu option

Reminder of picturepreferences (red button)

For programme numbers higherthan 10, press the 0 key on theremote control: ”- -” appears onthe screen. Now use thenumber keys on the remotecontrol to enter first the tensdigit then the units digit.

8

Please respect the environment! Before throwing any batteries away, consult yourdistributor who may be able to take them back for specific recycling.

Remote control

4

Remote control

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

GB

INSTALLATION MAIN MENU

Exit

Manual programming

Auto installation

Programme organisation

Personal settings

SUMMARY

Exit

Teletext

Picture

Sound

List

Time

Preferences

Navigation principles

5

Navigation principles

Calling up the Installation main menu

If there is no menu displayed on the screen,press and hold the key on the remotecontrol. The settings SUMMARY is displayedfirst, followed by the INSTALLATION MAINMENU which you can use to operate yourtelevision.

Calling up the Settings summary

Press and release the key on theremote control to display the list of menusavailable for using your television functions oradjusting your television

Calling up a Menu

Select the menu you wish using the Up/Downkeys. Press the key to validate..

Navigating within the Menus

Use the Up/Down keys 1 to select a line.

Use the Left/Right keys 2 to:

- Increase or decrease a value:for example:Fine tuning

- Select an option:for example: Reception Aerial

Reception Cable- Activate or deactivate an option:

for example: Decoder- Access a sub-menu:

for example: Picture preferences

You can use the 3 key to:

- Activate or deactivate an option:for example: Decoder

- Access a sub-menu:for example: Picture preferences

- Validate an action:for example: Store on PR number

Use the 4 key to exit a menu.

MANUAL PROGRAMMING

Return

StandardReceptionAutosearchFine tuningStore on PR numberNameDecoderExternal sound path

EURO BGCableCH- -

- -- - - -

Enter channel number or startautosearch with < or >.

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

GB

EnglishFrançais OKDeutschItalianoEspañolPortuguêsNederlandsSvenskaDanskNorwisch

(Fig. 1)(Fig. 1)

(Fig. 2) COUNTRY SELECTION

ExitUnited KingdomEireFranceGermanyItalySpainPortugalHollandBelgium and LuxembourgSwitzerlandAustriaSwedenDenmarkNorway

Other

Select your country and press OK

SEARCHING

AUTO INSTALLATION

003 STATIONS FOUND

Searching for TV stations.Please wait. To cancel press EXIT.

(Fig. 3)

Installing your television for the first time

6

Installing your television for the first time

First plug the television into a mains power outlet and to the external aerial or a cable network, then switch on usingthe ON/OFF switch located on the front or the side of your set.When you switch on your television for the first time, the language selection menu* is displayed (Fig. 1). If this doesnot happen, set the television to standby then press and hold the key on the television until this menu appears.

Installation Instructions (start)

1. Use the Up/Down keys to select thelanguage in which you wish the menus to bedisplayed.

2. Then validate using .

3. A list of countries* is now displayed (Fig. 2).Select the country in which you live, or thecountry from which you wish to receive thebroadcasts if you live in a border area.

4. Then validate using .

5. A welcome message is displayed.

6. Run the automatic installation sequenceusing .

7. A message appears to inform you thatautomatic installation has started (Fig. 3).Wait for a few minutes.A new message will inform you whenautomatic installation is completed.

8. If you wish to check or modify the channelorganisation, press and see theProgramme organisation chapter.

If you do not wish to modify the channelorganisation, you can exit the menu bypressing then watch the channel ofyour choice. Choose the desired channelusing the number keys (1, 2, 3, ...) and the

/ keys.

If you have a decoder, see the Manualprogramming chapter.

Your television will only search for channelscorresponding to the country you haveselected. See the Manual channelprogramming chapter to install any channelsnot found.For cable networks, read the Automaticchannel installation chapter to install anychannels not found.

*The list of languages and countries may varyfrom one model to another.

Installation Instructions (end)

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

GB

INSTALLATION MAIN MENU

Exit

Manual programming

Auto installation

Programme organisation

Personal settings

SEARCHING

AUTO INSTALLATION

003 STATIONS FOUND

Searching for TV stations.Please wait. To cancel press EXIT.

Automatic installation

7

Automatic installation

The Automatic installation function is useful if you have to go through the installation procedure again, such aswhen moving house. This function deletes all previously memorised programmes. To install a new channel, youshould use the Manual programming function.

Before running AUTO INSTALLATION, check the PERSONAL SETTINGS menu to ensure that the countrydisplayed is correct.

Your television will only search for channels corresponding to the selected country, so see the Manualprogramming chapter to install any channels not found. For cable networks, if you have not found certainchannels, select Other instead of a country name in the PERSONAL SETTINGS menu, then run automaticinstallation again.

1. Press and hold the key on the remotecontrol to display the INSTALLATION MAINMENU (The SUMMARY appears first,followed by the INSTALLATION MAINMENU).

2. Select the Auto installation line.

3. Validate using .

A message will inform you that Automaticinstallation has begun.Wait for a few minutes.A new message will inform you whenAutomatic installation is completed.

If you wish to check or reorganize your channeldisplay, press the key and see theProgramme organisation chapter.

If you do not wish to reorganize yourprogrammes, you can exit this menu bypressing , then watch the programme ofyour choice. Choose the desired programmeusing the number keys (1, 2, 3, ...) and the/ keys.

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

GB

INSTALLATION MAIN MENU

Exit

Manual programming

Auto installation

Programme organisation

Personal settings

PROGRAMME ORGANISATION

Return

Select program.Swap with PR.Change pr. nameDelete program.

13- -EURO13

10 MTV11 FR212 TF113 EURO14 CH4015 CC0116 ARTE17 CART18 - - - -19 ARD

Select programme number usingPR-/PR+ or </> or 0 to 9 keys.

Select the line marked Return to return to the previousmenu.

Programme organisation

8

Programme organisation

During automatic installation, your television will search for the channel name and assign it a programme numberaccording to the selected country. You can use the PROGRAMME ORGANISATION menu to name any channelname not found, to change the order in which the channels are displayed, or to delete channels for which receptionis too poor. Follow the messages at the bottom of the screen. For further details, read the information below.

If you wish to access thePROGRAMME ORGANISATION,menu thereafter, first press and holdthe key on the remote control todisplay the INSTALLATION MAINMENU (the SUMMARY is displayedfirst, followed by the INSTALLATIONMAIN MENU) then select Programmeorganisation and validate using .

- To delete a programme for which receptionis too poor:1. Select the line marked Select program.2. Use the / or Left/Right keys to list

your channels.3. When you get to a channel you wish to delete,

select the line marked Delete program.4. Press to delete the programme.

5. .Validate using .

- To organize your channels to suit you:1. Select the line marked Select program..2. Use the / or Left/Right keys and

the programmes logos to find the programmeto which you wish to give the No.1.Its present number appears on the linemarked Select program..

3. Select the line marked Swap with PR.4. Enter 01.5. Press . The two programmes swap

position and the desired programmebecomes N°1.

6. Repeat the above procedure for the otherchannels.

- To name your channels:1. Select the line marked Change pr. name2. Select the character you wish to modify using

the Left/Right keys.3. Use the and keys to display the letter you

require.The name you have entered will bememorised when you move to another line orexit the menu.

If you wish to change the order in whichyour programmes are displayed or ifyou wish to name other programmes,repeat the procedures describedabove.

When you have finished organizing theprogrammes, exit the menu using .

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

GB

INSTALLATION MAIN MENU

Exit

Manual programming

Auto installation

Programme organisation

Personal settings

MANUAL PROGRAMMING

Return

StandardReceptionAutosearchFine tuningStore on PR numberNameDecoderExternal sound path

EURO BGCableCH- -

- -- - - -

Enter channel number or startautosearch with < or >.

Select the line marked Return to return to the previous

Manual programming

9

Manual programming

The manual installation function is useful if some programmes have not been installed even after AUTOMATICINSTALLATION.

1. Press and hold , the SUMMARY isdisplayed first, followed by theINSTALLATION MAIN MENU.

2. Select the line marked Manualprogramming.

3. Display the menu using .4. Now continue by following the messages at

the bottom of the screen. For further details,read the information below.

Standard :Select the standard using Left/Right keys thatcorresponds to your country from the list ofstandards.

The number of standards proposed will differfrom one model to another.

France for France and LuxemburgDKK’ eg. for Eastern Europe and

the Middle-EastI for the United Kingdom and

IrelandEuro BG for Western Europe

Reception :Your television can pick up channels either viaan aerial (RF channels) or via a cable network.Certain cable networks use the samefrequencies as the RF channels. If this is thecase, you must select Aerial instead of Cable.Autosearch :Enter the programme number if you know it. Ifnot, search using the Left/Right keys. Yourtelevision will stop at the first channel it tunesinto. If you wish to memorize it, go to the linemarked Store on PR number. If not, resumethe search using the Left/Right keys.

Fine tuning :You can use this to improve the picture if the transmitter frequency is out of adjustment. Use the Left/Right keysto obtain the best possible picture and sound.Store on PR number :Enter the programme number you wish to give the channel (e.g.: 01 for BBC1). Memorise using .Name :If the station has been identified by the transmitter, its name will be inscribed automatically. You can change theproposed name or enter it if it has not already been identified. Select the character you wish to modify using theLeft/Right keys. Use the or keys to display the character you desire.Decoder :Use the Left/Right keys to tick the box if the channel is coded and if a decoder is connected to the AV1 jack.External sound path :Switch on your decoder. If the sound is coded or if you have no sound, activate or deactivate the box as requiredusing the Left/Right keys.

Once you have made all the adjustments you wish to a programme, go to Store on PR number and pressto memorise these. Then move on to the next channel.

Once you have completed your Manual Programming, exit the menu using .

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

GB

INSTALLATION MAIN MENU

Exit

Manual programming

Auto installation

Programme organisation

Personal settings

Personal settings

10

Personal settings

1. Press and hold the key: theSUMMARY is displayed first, followed by theINSTALLATION MAIN MENU.

2. Select the line marked Personal settings.

3. Display the menu using .4. Continue by following the messages at the

bottom of the screen.

For further details, read the information below.

Menu language :Select the language in which the menus are tobe displayed.

Country :Indicate the country in which you are if you wishto rerun Automatic Programming.

For cable networks, if certain channelshave not been found, select Otherinstead of the country name before run-ning automatic installation again.You may find that the characters of cer-tain teletext languages are inaccess-ible for the selected country.

Auto volume level :This is a sound control function which aims toequalise the volume level between differentchannels, and between different programmeson the same channel.

Activate or deactivate the auto volume level asrequired.

On models equipped with Virtual DolbySurround, this function remainsinactive if Dolby Virtual has beenselected in the SOUND menu (seeVolume Control).

AV1, AV2, AV3 name :Use these to give a name to each of youraudio-visual programmes. Select the characteryou wish to modify using the Left/Right keys.Use the or keys to display the desiredcharacter.

Prog. to be used for reference time :To display the time using the key or to usethe alarm function, the television clock must beset to the correct time. Select the line markedProg. to be used for reference time and selecta channel which broadcasts teletext. The timeis set automatically and is displayed after thechannel number.

Exit the menu using .

13:15

PERSONAL SETTINGS

Return

Menu language

Country

Auto volume level

AV1 nameAV2 nameAV3 name

Prog. to be usedfor reference time

Select a station from which you wantto get the reference time.

English

UK

VCR- - - -CAMC

06

Select the line marked Return to return to the previousmenu.

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

GB

PREFERENCESReturn

Show program. numberAV2 video inputAV3 video inputFormat controlPicture preferences

VideoS-VideoAuto

PICTURE PREFERENCES

Return

SettingsBrightnessColourContrast

Personal

Select the line marked Return to return to the previousmenu.

Preferences

11

Preferences

1. Display the SUMMARY by pressing andreleasing the key on the remotecontrol .

2. Select the line marked Preferences.3. Display the menu using .

Make your choice from the proposedoptions. Use the information below to helpyou.

Show program. number :If you wish to permanently display the numberof the programme you are watching, tick the boxusing the Left/Right keys. Press the Left/Rightkeys again to deactivate this function.

AV2 video input :Use the Left/Right keys to select the type of video signal received at the AV2 SCART socket (Video or S-Video).

AV3 video input :Use the Left/Right keys to select the type of video signal received at the AV3 sockets (these sockets are locatedon the front or the side of the television).

Format control :Use the Left/Right keys to select the desired picture format:

Auto : if the transmitter (for 16/9 format TV’s) or the appliance connected to one of the peripheral jacks deliversthe switching signal, the television automatically adapts to the transmitted picture format.16/9 : manually selects widescreen picture format.4/3 : manually selects this picture format.

If you have selected 16/9 or 4/3, the television will switch back to Auto when you change channels or youswitch off.

Picture preferences :

To access the PICTURE PREFERENCESmenu, press .

If you wish, you can personalize certainpicture settings. Select and set theproposed options. Use the informationbelow to help you.

Settings :Select Standard or Personal.

Standard corresponds to the factory settings.Personal corresponds to the settings that youhave entered yourself.

The lines Brightness, Colour andContrast are displayed only if you haveselected Personal on the Settings line.

Select each line one after the other and enteryour required settings. You can recall thesepicture settings by pressing the red key on theremote control.

Exit the menu using .

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

GB

PICTURE

Return

BrightnessColourContrastSharpness

Contrast expandTone

NeutralCold

Select the line marked Return to return to the previousmenu.

SOUND

Return

Sound typeSound mode

Balance L/RTrebleBassSurround effect

AutomaticNormal

Broadcastmonostereodual

NICAM-3AV

Choiceautomatic - mono

mono - stereosound 1 - sound 2

sound 1 - sound 2 - sound 3stereo - sound 1 - sound 2

Mode Effect

Normal : reproduces the original sound (mono or stereo).

Wide : gives a stereo effect on mono sounds.Stereo wide : accentuates the stereo effect.Magic : accentuates the stereo effects and

adds echo.Dolby Virtual : Virtual Dolby Surround.

Virtual Surround Dolby is based on Dolby Pro Logicdecoding for the reproduction of the Left, Right, Centre andVirtual Surround sound channels using two loudspeakers.“”Dolby”, “”Pro Logic” and the double -D symbol are trademarks of theDolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation.

Manufactured under licence from Dolby Laboratories LicensingCorporation.

Daily viewing

12

Daily viewing

Picture Adjustment

Display the SUMMARY using the key onthe remote control. Select Picture. Validateusing . The PICTURE menu is displayed.

Select and set the proposed options. Usethe information below to help you.

Brightness, Colour, Contrast, Sharpness:Select each of these lines one after the other andset as required.Contrast expand :Select this line then choose the desired Contrastexpand setting (High or Low).Tone :Select this line then choose the desired colourtone (Warm, Neutral or Cold).Exit the menu using .

Sound Settings

Display the SUMMARY using the key onthe remote control. Select the line markedSound. Validate using . The SOUND menuis displayed.

Select and set the proposed options. Usethe information below to help you.

Sound type :The choices available to you depend onyour television model and the broadcast.Stereo, Dual or NICAM reception and thecorresponding choices are only availableon Stereo or NICAM Stereo televisions.

Select this line, then select the type of sound youdesire.Sound mode :Select this line, then choose the desired modeusing the Left/Right keys.

The choices available to you depend onyour television model and the type ofsound. Magic and Dolby Virtual modesare only available in stereo on TV’sequipped with Virtual Dolby Surround.Stereo wide is only available on Stereo orNicam televisions not equipped withVirtual Dolby Surround.

Balance L/R :Select this line, then balance the sound betweenthe Left and Right loudspeakers.Treble, Bass :Select each of these lines and adjust to suit you.Surround effect :

This line appears only if you have selectedDolby Virtual on the Sound mode line.

Select this line and adjust the surround effect tosuit you.Exit the menu using .

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

GB

TIMEReturn

Sleep timer

Current time

Wake-up timerWake-up timeProgramme numberDaily

Select the line marked Return to return to the previousmenu.

00 : 00

11 : 28

07 : 0701 BBC1

Daily viewing

13

Time

You can use this menu to switch yourtelevision on or off automatically at a settime.

Display the SUMMARY using the key onthe remote control. Select the line markedTime. Validate using . The TIME menu isdisplayed.

Sleep timer :Use the Left/Right keys to choose how long youwish to view before the television switches off.The television will switch off automatically at theend of this period. To cancel, set to 00:00.

One minute before switching off, a message willinform you that the television is about to go off.If you wish to keep it on, press any key on theremote control or the local keyboard.The television switches to Child lock mode afteran automatic stop. It can only be switched onagain from the remote control.

Current time :The current time is given by the Teletext (see PERSONAL SETTINGS menu). You can also set the time manuallyusing the number keys (0 to 9) on your remote control.

Wake-up timer :

If you wish to be woken up by your television on the channel of your choice, you must first set the televisionclock to the correct time (see above).

Use the Left/Right keys to tick the box and display the Wake-up timer menu.

The lines Wake-up time, Programme number and Daily only appear if you have ticked the box on theline marked Wake-up timer.

Wake-up time :Use the number keys (0 to 9) on the remote control to set the time at which you wish to be woken.

Programme number :Select the programme you wish to be woken by.

Daily :Tick this box if you wish to be awakened at this time every day.

Exit the menu using .

Set the television to standby using the key on the remote control. The red indicator light on the televisionflashes.The television will come on automatically at the programmed time and will go off one hour later if you do not usethe remote control.

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

GB

LIST

Exit01 BBC 102 BBC 203 FR 304 CC1905 ARTE TV06 M607 CNN08 PREM09 EURO

Page -/+Programme: 0 - 9

Daily viewing

14

List of Channels

This list contains up to 10 pages. The number of pages depends onthe number of programmes memorized. For each programme, the listindicates the station name or type and the programme number. The3 AV programmes are listed on page 11.

To display the list, press the key on the remote controlorDisplay the SUMMARY using the key on the remote control. Select theline marked List. Validate using .

The page displayed is the page containing the programme you are watching.It is identified in the list by the symbol TV.To display the next page, press the Right key.To display the previous page, press the Left key.

If you wish to watch one of the programmes on the page displayed:Enter the last digit of the programme number (e.g. for 25 simply enter 5) on theremote control. The list disappears and your programme is selected.

Or,- Select the programme using the Up/Down keys.- Validate using .- Exit the menu using .

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

GB

Daily viewing

15

Selecting ProgrammesFor channels 1 to 9, press the number key corresponding to the desired channel on the remote control. Forprogramme numbers higher than 10, press the key on the remote control: ”- -” appears on the screen. Now usethe number keys on the remote control to enter first the tens digit then the units digit.

If you press while ”- -” is already displayed, the display returns to 0- , in which case you can only selectprogrammes 1 to 9.

Scrolling the Programmes

You can scroll through the programmes using the / keys.

Audio-visual (AV) Programmes

Press the key to call the last audio-visual (AV) programme watched. Press repeatedly to scroll the audio-visual(AV) programmes on the screen.

Volume Control

Use the volume +/- keys to increase or decrease the volume.

Muting the Sound

Press the key to mute the sound. Press again to restore the sound.

Zoom(16/9 models only)

This function is useful for 4/3 or letterbox pictures (black bands at the top and bottom of the screen).Use the Left/Right keys to select the desired zoom position:

ZOOM 0: 4/3 picture (black bands at the sides).FULL SCREEN: for a 4/3 picture that fills the screen.ZOOM 1: for letterbox pictures.

Displaying Information

Press the key to display the following information on the screen: channel number and name, time, zoom, typeof sound.

Television LockYou can use this function to prevent anyone from switching on the television using the buttons on thetelevision set.

The buttons on the television set are locked in the following cases:- If you switch off the set by pressing and holding the key on the remote control for more than 3 seconds,- After a programmed stop,- If the television is set to standby when the alarm has been set.

When the television is locked the red power will be light flashing.The television can now only be operated from the remote control.To release the lock, press any number key on the remote control.

Switching Off the TelevisionTo switch off the television, press the Standby key on the remote control or press the ON/OFF switch on thetelevision set.

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

GB

Teletext

16

Teletext

Certain channels broadcast an electronic news page service with a range of different information services.The presentation and use of the Teletext differ from one country to another and from one programme toanother (Teletext, Fastext or Toptext).

Press the key to display the Teletext Index (page 100).

A message will inform you if the programme you are watching has no Teletext service.To call up a page:Enter the 3 digits of the page number you wish to consult (for example, 150 or 170).After a moment, the page appears.Use the Left/Right keys to consult the next or the previous page.

Standard Functions

Rolling pages:Some information is displayed over several sub-pages. It is scrolled on your screen as it is received.To stop scrolling, select STOP using the Up/Down keys and validate using . Press again to continuescrolling.

Masked text:To reveal a hidden answer (for example in a quiz programme), select ??? using the Up/Down keys and validateusing . Press again to hide the answers.

Zoom :Select ZOOM using the Up/Down keys then press the key once to magnify the top of the screen, twice tomagnify the bottom of the screen (the page will scroll from top to bottom) and a third time to return to the normaldisplay.

Display:You can superpose the Teletext page over the TV picture. To do this, select MIX using the Up/Down keys thenvalidate by pressing the key. Press again to return to the normal display.

Sub-code:You can use this to access a sub-page directly.Select “- - - -” using the Up/Down keys. Then enter the four digits of the required sub-page number.

Certain programmes have Alarm pages that you can set to appear at the time you require. For example:for 15h30 enter 1530 as the sub-page number then press . You must of course leave the televisionon the programme which is to transmit the Alarm page.

Index:To call up the index page, select 100 using the Up/Down keys then validate using .

Direct access:You can use the yellow and blue keys to directly access the pages indicated in the bar at the bottom of the screen.

Fastext functions:If the Teletext you receive is Fastext, a sub-menu at the bottom of the screen appears which you can use to selectfrom the 4 headings according to its colour.To select a heading, press the key of the corresponding colour.

Toptext functions:If the Teletext you receive is TOPtext, the pages are arranged into headings and sub-headings by subject.You can select the first page of a heading directly by pressing the blue key, or the first page of a sub-heading bypressing the yellow key.

Other functions:With certain Teletext channels, it is possible to have sub-titles overlaid on the screen for certain broadcasts as wellas certain news flash updates.The corresponding page number is indicated in the Telextext index.Once you have found the page, the sub-title or the news flash will be overlaid onto the TV picture.The navigation status bar disappears after a few seconds. To display it again, press the key.

To exit Teletext, press or .

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

GB

* on models equipped with this function

* on models equipped with this function

Other Connections

17

Other Connections

The CINCH Video and Audio sockets (1)* are provided toconnect a VHS or 8mm camcorder.

The S and CINCH Audio sockets (1)* are provided to connecta S-VHS or Hi-8 camcorder.

To use the appliance you have connected, press thekey several times until the AV3 programme is

selected on the screen. When you switch off theconnected appliance, the television will remain onthe AV3 programme and you must use the numericalkeys on the remote control to select a programme.

The headphone socket (2)* is provided to connect aheadphone or earphones.

Connecting headphones mute the sound from thetelevision loudspeakers.

Other PossibilitiesCopying a cassette:Plug the VCR you wish to record to into the SCART socketAV2.Plug the appliance you wish to copy from as follows: intothe peripheral jack AV1 for a VCR; into the CINCH AV3 jacksfor a camcorder (see table below).

PLAY RECORD CALLAppliance SCART Socket Appliance SCART Socket

CALLPROGRAMME

VCRPeripheral

AV1

VCRou

CamcorderAV2 AV1

CamcorderCinches or

S-VideoAV3

VCRou

CamcorderAV2 AV3

Connecting a HiFi or AV amplifierIf you wish to connect a HiFi or AV amplifier, plug it into theperipheral jack AV2 using a SCART-CINCH type lead.

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG - MANUALE DI UTILIZZAZIONE - USER MANUAL

∆ΗΓΙΕ ΡΗΣΕΩ

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

10 cm

10 cm 5 cm

10 c

m

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

GB

1

About this manual

This document is common to several television models. Therefore, certain functions or settings may not apply tothe model you have purchased

About the switch

The position of the ON/OFF switch differs depending on the model. It may be located on the front or on theright-hand side of your set (see the drawing inside the cover page of your manual).

About safety

To ensure your own safety and safe operation of the equipment, observe the following instructionsthoroughly.

TV sets require sufficient ventilation to prevent their components from overheating, which will cause failure. Do notblock the ventilation openings at the rear. If you place your TV set in a special piece of furniture, make sure thereis enough space for unhindered air circulation. Do not place the TV set in the close vicinity of a heater.The TV set has been designed for use in dry rooms. Should you use it, in exceptionalcircumstances in the open air (example: on the balcony, in the veranda or tent), you must absolutely protect itagainst moisture (dew, rain, splash water). Before switching on a cold TV set in a warm room, you should wait untilany condensation in the screen has dried by itself.Maximum ambient temperature: 35°CMaximum humidity: 85%By the end of your TV evening or when away from home for a longer period, we recommend that you turn off theTV set with the On/Off-switch.Even when the On/Off-switch is in the Off-position, your TV set is not fully disconnected from the mains. Todisconnect the set completely, the mains plug must be pulled out.The mains plug must be easily accessible.In the following cases, we recommend that you pull out the mains connector:1. During a thunderstorm. In such a case, it is advisable that you also disconnect the TV set from the aerial socket.2. When odour or smoke emanates from the set.Never attempt to open your TV set yourself.Further information:The TV set shielding is sufficient to prevent X-radiation to the exterior.Any operation performed by a non skilled person, change of high voltage or replacement of the picture tube by amodel not complying with the manufacturer specification are likely to cause considerable increase in X-radiation.A TV set modified in such a way no longer complies with the manufacturers’ specification and must not be used.

About cleaning

The screen is to be cleaned with liquid glass cleaners.: Never use abrasive products.: Clean the cabinet with a soft cloth soaked with neutral cleaner. Do not use solvents, such as white spirit oralcohol-based cleaning products since they may damage your television.: At regular intervals, clean the ventilation grids at the rear of the TV set.

About degaussing

The terrestrial magnetic field may have an influence on your TV set. This influence is revealed by the colouredspots, which appear on the screen.Should this be the case:: Turn the equipment off by means of the On/Off-switch.: Wait about one hour before switching the set on again.This procedure performs automatic degaussing of the screen. Should there still be coloured spots on the screen,repeat the operation.

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

GB

Contents

2

Page 4

Using the remote controland fitting the batteries.

Page

How to call up a menuand how to select afunction, a setting or anoption.

5

Inst

alla

tio

n About this manual 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

About the switch 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

About safety 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

About cleaning 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

About degaussing 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Basic connections 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Remote control 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Navigation principles 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Calling up the Installation main menu 5. . .

Calling up the Settings summary 5. . . . . . .

Calling up a Menu 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Navigating within the Menus 5. . . . . . . . . . .

Installing your television for thefirst time 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Automatic installation 7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Programme organisation 8. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Manual programming 9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Personal settings 10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Preferences 11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Inst

ruct

ion

sfo

rU

se

Daily viewing 12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Picture Adjustment 12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Sound Settings 12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Time 13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

List of Channels 14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Selecting Programmes 15. . . . . . . . . . . . .

Scrolling the Programmes 15. . . . . . . . . . .

Audio-visual (AV) Programmes 15. . . . . .

Volume Control 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Muting the Sound 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Zoom (16/9 models only) 15. . . . . . . . . . .

Displaying Information 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Television Lock 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Switching Off the Television 15. . . . . . . . .

Teletext 16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Standard Functions 16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Other Connections 17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Other Possibilities 17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Connecting a HiFi or AV amplifier 17. . . .

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

GB

$

ContinentalEurope

United Kingdom

The plug is fitted with a fuse which protects yourtelevision. If your television does not work, the fuse maybe blown. In this case, replace it with an identical 5 AmpASTA or lr BSI (BS 1362) certified fuse.

Note: the mains lead of your television is fitted with amoulded plug. This lead contains all the safety equipment,so you are advised when replacing it not to use anon-specific commercially-available model.

2

Basic connections

3

Basic connections

The mains plug (1) supplies power to the television. Thetelevision must only be plugged in to a 220-240 V - 50 Hzpower supply. It must never be plugged in to a DC source. Ifthe plug comes away from the lead, never attempt to plug itin: this could cause electrocution.

The aerial socket (2), located on the rear of the television, canbe used to connect an external aerial or other applianceequipped with a modulator such as a VCR, satellite receiver,etc.

If you connect an appliance to the aerial jack, you must giveit a channel number. To do this, switch on the appliance, thenuse the television to find the modulator channel (see theappliance manual). Now give it a programme number andmemorise it (see Manual Programming of channels). Then,when you wish to use the appliance, simply select itsprogramme number on the television. This procedure is notrequired for VCR’s not equipped with a modulator.

The SCART socket AV1 (3), located on the rear of thetelevision, is intended to connect a VCR or a camcorder(VHS, 8 mm), a Canal+ decoder, a video games console orRGB-signal emitting appliances.

The SCART socket AV2 (3), located on the rear of thetelevision, is intended to connect a VCR or a camcorder(VHS, 8 mm, S-VHS or Hi-8).

We strongly recommend the use of this type of connection,which gives a better picture quality. To use the peripheralappliance that you have connected, press the AV key on yourremote control (press once to select AV1; twice to selectAV2; three times for AV3: see ”Other Connections”). Thisselection is automatic for some appliances. Pressing “”play”on a VCR, or switching on a satellite receiver connected toAV1 or AV2 will automatically switch on your television.

When you stop the VCR, if you have not changed channelswhile watching the VCR, the television automaticallyswitches back to the channel you were watching beforehand.If the television has been switched on from the VCR, itswitches to standby when the VCR is switched off. Thetelevision automatically switches to 16/9 format if theconnected appliance delivers the corresponding signal.

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

GB

This key is active only when usingthe Teletext (blue key)

Display of channel, time, sound (yellowbutton) (and zoom for models with zoom)

The red, green, yellow andblue keys are also used forthe Teletext.

Standby

Right/Left Selection withinmenus andZoom Function (for models withthis function)

Call up Teletext / Toptext /Fastext function (purple button)

Go to adjustment function MENU

Go to programmes and enternumerical values in menus

Move Up/Down in menus

Change programme

Volume adjustment

To leave a menu or Teletext

Sound mute

Call up programme list(green button)

Selecting appliancesconnected to the television

(AV1, AV2 ...)

Confirm an action or validate amenu option

Reminder of picturepreferences (red button)

For programme numbers higherthan 10, press the 0 key on theremote control: ”- -” appears onthe screen. Now use thenumber keys on the remotecontrol to enter first the tensdigit then the units digit.

8

Please respect the environment! Before throwing any batteries away, consult yourdistributor who may be able to take them back for specific recycling.

Remote control

4

Remote control

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

GB

INSTALLATION MAIN MENU

Exit

Manual programming

Auto installation

Programme organisation

Personal settings

SUMMARY

Exit

Teletext

Picture

Sound

List

Time

Preferences

Navigation principles

5

Navigation principles

Calling up the Installation main menu

If there is no menu displayed on the screen,press and hold the key on the remotecontrol. The settings SUMMARY is displayedfirst, followed by the INSTALLATION MAINMENU which you can use to operate yourtelevision.

Calling up the Settings summary

Press and release the key on theremote control to display the list of menusavailable for using your television functions oradjusting your television

Calling up a Menu

Select the menu you wish using the Up/Downkeys. Press the key to validate..

Navigating within the Menus

Use the Up/Down keys 1 to select a line.

Use the Left/Right keys 2 to:

- Increase or decrease a value:for example:Fine tuning

- Select an option:for example: Reception Aerial

Reception Cable- Activate or deactivate an option:

for example: Decoder- Access a sub-menu:

for example: Picture preferences

You can use the 3 key to:

- Activate or deactivate an option:for example: Decoder

- Access a sub-menu:for example: Picture preferences

- Validate an action:for example: Store on PR number

Use the 4 key to exit a menu.

MANUAL PROGRAMMING

Return

StandardReceptionAutosearchFine tuningStore on PR numberNameDecoderExternal sound path

EURO BGCableCH- -

- -- - - -

Enter channel number or startautosearch with < or >.

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

GB

EnglishFrançais OKDeutschItalianoEspañolPortuguêsNederlandsSvenskaDanskNorwisch

(Fig. 1)(Fig. 1)

(Fig. 2) COUNTRY SELECTION

ExitUnited KingdomEireFranceGermanyItalySpainPortugalHollandBelgium and LuxembourgSwitzerlandAustriaSwedenDenmarkNorway

Other

Select your country and press OK

SEARCHING

AUTO INSTALLATION

003 STATIONS FOUND

Searching for TV stations.Please wait. To cancel press EXIT.

(Fig. 3)

Installing your television for the first time

6

Installing your television for the first time

First plug the television into a mains power outlet and to the external aerial or a cable network, then switch on usingthe ON/OFF switch located on the front or the side of your set.When you switch on your television for the first time, the language selection menu* is displayed (Fig. 1). If this doesnot happen, set the television to standby then press and hold the key on the television until this menu appears.

Installation Instructions (start)

1. Use the Up/Down keys to select thelanguage in which you wish the menus to bedisplayed.

2. Then validate using .

3. A list of countries* is now displayed (Fig. 2).Select the country in which you live, or thecountry from which you wish to receive thebroadcasts if you live in a border area.

4. Then validate using .

5. A welcome message is displayed.

6. Run the automatic installation sequenceusing .

7. A message appears to inform you thatautomatic installation has started (Fig. 3).Wait for a few minutes.A new message will inform you whenautomatic installation is completed.

8. If you wish to check or modify the channelorganisation, press and see theProgramme organisation chapter.

If you do not wish to modify the channelorganisation, you can exit the menu bypressing then watch the channel ofyour choice. Choose the desired channelusing the number keys (1, 2, 3, ...) and the

/ keys.

If you have a decoder, see the Manualprogramming chapter.

Your television will only search for channelscorresponding to the country you haveselected. See the Manual channelprogramming chapter to install any channelsnot found.For cable networks, read the Automaticchannel installation chapter to install anychannels not found.

*The list of languages and countries may varyfrom one model to another.

Installation Instructions (end)

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

GB

INSTALLATION MAIN MENU

Exit

Manual programming

Auto installation

Programme organisation

Personal settings

SEARCHING

AUTO INSTALLATION

003 STATIONS FOUND

Searching for TV stations.Please wait. To cancel press EXIT.

Automatic installation

7

Automatic installation

The Automatic installation function is useful if you have to go through the installation procedure again, such aswhen moving house. This function deletes all previously memorised programmes. To install a new channel, youshould use the Manual programming function.

Before running AUTO INSTALLATION, check the PERSONAL SETTINGS menu to ensure that the countrydisplayed is correct.

Your television will only search for channels corresponding to the selected country, so see the Manualprogramming chapter to install any channels not found. For cable networks, if you have not found certainchannels, select Other instead of a country name in the PERSONAL SETTINGS menu, then run automaticinstallation again.

1. Press and hold the key on the remotecontrol to display the INSTALLATION MAINMENU (The SUMMARY appears first,followed by the INSTALLATION MAINMENU).

2. Select the Auto installation line.

3. Validate using .

A message will inform you that Automaticinstallation has begun.Wait for a few minutes.A new message will inform you whenAutomatic installation is completed.

If you wish to check or reorganize your channeldisplay, press the key and see theProgramme organisation chapter.

If you do not wish to reorganize yourprogrammes, you can exit this menu bypressing , then watch the programme ofyour choice. Choose the desired programmeusing the number keys (1, 2, 3, ...) and the/ keys.

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

GB

INSTALLATION MAIN MENU

Exit

Manual programming

Auto installation

Programme organisation

Personal settings

PROGRAMME ORGANISATION

Return

Select program.Swap with PR.Change pr. nameDelete program.

13- -EURO13

10 MTV11 FR212 TF113 EURO14 CH4015 CC0116 ARTE17 CART18 - - - -19 ARD

Select programme number usingPR-/PR+ or </> or 0 to 9 keys.

Select the line marked Return to return to the previousmenu.

Programme organisation

8

Programme organisation

During automatic installation, your television will search for the channel name and assign it a programme numberaccording to the selected country. You can use the PROGRAMME ORGANISATION menu to name any channelname not found, to change the order in which the channels are displayed, or to delete channels for which receptionis too poor. Follow the messages at the bottom of the screen. For further details, read the information below.

If you wish to access thePROGRAMME ORGANISATION,menu thereafter, first press and holdthe key on the remote control todisplay the INSTALLATION MAINMENU (the SUMMARY is displayedfirst, followed by the INSTALLATIONMAIN MENU) then select Programmeorganisation and validate using .

- To delete a programme for which receptionis too poor:1. Select the line marked Select program.2. Use the / or Left/Right keys to list

your channels.3. When you get to a channel you wish to delete,

select the line marked Delete program.4. Press to delete the programme.

5. .Validate using .

- To organize your channels to suit you:1. Select the line marked Select program..2. Use the / or Left/Right keys and

the programmes logos to find the programmeto which you wish to give the No.1.Its present number appears on the linemarked Select program..

3. Select the line marked Swap with PR.4. Enter 01.5. Press . The two programmes swap

position and the desired programmebecomes N°1.

6. Repeat the above procedure for the otherchannels.

- To name your channels:1. Select the line marked Change pr. name2. Select the character you wish to modify using

the Left/Right keys.3. Use the and keys to display the letter you

require.The name you have entered will bememorised when you move to another line orexit the menu.

If you wish to change the order in whichyour programmes are displayed or ifyou wish to name other programmes,repeat the procedures describedabove.

When you have finished organizing theprogrammes, exit the menu using .

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

GB

INSTALLATION MAIN MENU

Exit

Manual programming

Auto installation

Programme organisation

Personal settings

MANUAL PROGRAMMING

Return

StandardReceptionAutosearchFine tuningStore on PR numberNameDecoderExternal sound path

EURO BGCableCH- -

- -- - - -

Enter channel number or startautosearch with < or >.

Select the line marked Return to return to the previous

Manual programming

9

Manual programming

The manual installation function is useful if some programmes have not been installed even after AUTOMATICINSTALLATION.

1. Press and hold , the SUMMARY isdisplayed first, followed by theINSTALLATION MAIN MENU.

2. Select the line marked Manualprogramming.

3. Display the menu using .4. Now continue by following the messages at

the bottom of the screen. For further details,read the information below.

Standard :Select the standard using Left/Right keys thatcorresponds to your country from the list ofstandards.

The number of standards proposed will differfrom one model to another.

France for France and LuxemburgDKK’ eg. for Eastern Europe and

the Middle-EastI for the United Kingdom and

IrelandEuro BG for Western Europe

Reception :Your television can pick up channels either viaan aerial (RF channels) or via a cable network.Certain cable networks use the samefrequencies as the RF channels. If this is thecase, you must select Aerial instead of Cable.Autosearch :Enter the programme number if you know it. Ifnot, search using the Left/Right keys. Yourtelevision will stop at the first channel it tunesinto. If you wish to memorize it, go to the linemarked Store on PR number. If not, resumethe search using the Left/Right keys.

Fine tuning :You can use this to improve the picture if the transmitter frequency is out of adjustment. Use the Left/Right keysto obtain the best possible picture and sound.Store on PR number :Enter the programme number you wish to give the channel (e.g.: 01 for BBC1). Memorise using .Name :If the station has been identified by the transmitter, its name will be inscribed automatically. You can change theproposed name or enter it if it has not already been identified. Select the character you wish to modify using theLeft/Right keys. Use the or keys to display the character you desire.Decoder :Use the Left/Right keys to tick the box if the channel is coded and if a decoder is connected to the AV1 jack.External sound path :Switch on your decoder. If the sound is coded or if you have no sound, activate or deactivate the box as requiredusing the Left/Right keys.

Once you have made all the adjustments you wish to a programme, go to Store on PR number and pressto memorise these. Then move on to the next channel.

Once you have completed your Manual Programming, exit the menu using .

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

GB

INSTALLATION MAIN MENU

Exit

Manual programming

Auto installation

Programme organisation

Personal settings

Personal settings

10

Personal settings

1. Press and hold the key: theSUMMARY is displayed first, followed by theINSTALLATION MAIN MENU.

2. Select the line marked Personal settings.

3. Display the menu using .4. Continue by following the messages at the

bottom of the screen.

For further details, read the information below.

Menu language :Select the language in which the menus are tobe displayed.

Country :Indicate the country in which you are if you wishto rerun Automatic Programming.

For cable networks, if certain channelshave not been found, select Otherinstead of the country name before run-ning automatic installation again.You may find that the characters of cer-tain teletext languages are inaccess-ible for the selected country.

Auto volume level :This is a sound control function which aims toequalise the volume level between differentchannels, and between different programmeson the same channel.

Activate or deactivate the auto volume level asrequired.

On models equipped with Virtual DolbySurround, this function remainsinactive if Dolby Virtual has beenselected in the SOUND menu (seeVolume Control).

AV1, AV2, AV3 name :Use these to give a name to each of youraudio-visual programmes. Select the characteryou wish to modify using the Left/Right keys.Use the or keys to display the desiredcharacter.

Prog. to be used for reference time :To display the time using the key or to usethe alarm function, the television clock must beset to the correct time. Select the line markedProg. to be used for reference time and selecta channel which broadcasts teletext. The timeis set automatically and is displayed after thechannel number.

Exit the menu using .

13:15

PERSONAL SETTINGS

Return

Menu language

Country

Auto volume level

AV1 nameAV2 nameAV3 name

Prog. to be usedfor reference time

Select a station from which you wantto get the reference time.

English

UK

VCR- - - -CAMC

06

Select the line marked Return to return to the previousmenu.

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

GB

PREFERENCESReturn

Show program. numberAV2 video inputAV3 video inputFormat controlPicture preferences

VideoS-VideoAuto

PICTURE PREFERENCES

Return

SettingsBrightnessColourContrast

Personal

Select the line marked Return to return to the previousmenu.

Preferences

11

Preferences

1. Display the SUMMARY by pressing andreleasing the key on the remotecontrol .

2. Select the line marked Preferences.3. Display the menu using .

Make your choice from the proposedoptions. Use the information below to helpyou.

Show program. number :If you wish to permanently display the numberof the programme you are watching, tick the boxusing the Left/Right keys. Press the Left/Rightkeys again to deactivate this function.

AV2 video input :Use the Left/Right keys to select the type of video signal received at the AV2 SCART socket (Video or S-Video).

AV3 video input :Use the Left/Right keys to select the type of video signal received at the AV3 sockets (these sockets are locatedon the front or the side of the television).

Format control :Use the Left/Right keys to select the desired picture format:

Auto : if the transmitter (for 16/9 format TV’s) or the appliance connected to one of the peripheral jacks deliversthe switching signal, the television automatically adapts to the transmitted picture format.16/9 : manually selects widescreen picture format.4/3 : manually selects this picture format.

If you have selected 16/9 or 4/3, the television will switch back to Auto when you change channels or youswitch off.

Picture preferences :

To access the PICTURE PREFERENCESmenu, press .

If you wish, you can personalize certainpicture settings. Select and set theproposed options. Use the informationbelow to help you.

Settings :Select Standard or Personal.

Standard corresponds to the factory settings.Personal corresponds to the settings that youhave entered yourself.

The lines Brightness, Colour andContrast are displayed only if you haveselected Personal on the Settings line.

Select each line one after the other and enteryour required settings. You can recall thesepicture settings by pressing the red key on theremote control.

Exit the menu using .

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

GB

PICTURE

Return

BrightnessColourContrastSharpness

Contrast expandTone

NeutralCold

Select the line marked Return to return to the previousmenu.

SOUND

Return

Sound typeSound mode

Balance L/RTrebleBassSurround effect

AutomaticNormal

Broadcastmonostereodual

NICAM-3AV

Choiceautomatic - mono

mono - stereosound 1 - sound 2

sound 1 - sound 2 - sound 3stereo - sound 1 - sound 2

Mode Effect

Normal : reproduces the original sound (mono or stereo).

Wide : gives a stereo effect on mono sounds.Stereo wide : accentuates the stereo effect.Magic : accentuates the stereo effects and

adds echo.Dolby Virtual : Virtual Dolby Surround.

Virtual Surround Dolby is based on Dolby Pro Logicdecoding for the reproduction of the Left, Right, Centre andVirtual Surround sound channels using two loudspeakers.“”Dolby”, “”Pro Logic” and the double -D symbol are trademarks of theDolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation.

Manufactured under licence from Dolby Laboratories LicensingCorporation.

Daily viewing

12

Daily viewing

Picture Adjustment

Display the SUMMARY using the key onthe remote control. Select Picture. Validateusing . The PICTURE menu is displayed.

Select and set the proposed options. Usethe information below to help you.

Brightness, Colour, Contrast, Sharpness:Select each of these lines one after the other andset as required.Contrast expand :Select this line then choose the desired Contrastexpand setting (High or Low).Tone :Select this line then choose the desired colourtone (Warm, Neutral or Cold).Exit the menu using .

Sound Settings

Display the SUMMARY using the key onthe remote control. Select the line markedSound. Validate using . The SOUND menuis displayed.

Select and set the proposed options. Usethe information below to help you.

Sound type :The choices available to you depend onyour television model and the broadcast.Stereo, Dual or NICAM reception and thecorresponding choices are only availableon Stereo or NICAM Stereo televisions.

Select this line, then select the type of sound youdesire.Sound mode :Select this line, then choose the desired modeusing the Left/Right keys.

The choices available to you depend onyour television model and the type ofsound. Magic and Dolby Virtual modesare only available in stereo on TV’sequipped with Virtual Dolby Surround.Stereo wide is only available on Stereo orNicam televisions not equipped withVirtual Dolby Surround.

Balance L/R :Select this line, then balance the sound betweenthe Left and Right loudspeakers.Treble, Bass :Select each of these lines and adjust to suit you.Surround effect :

This line appears only if you have selectedDolby Virtual on the Sound mode line.

Select this line and adjust the surround effect tosuit you.Exit the menu using .

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

GB

TIMEReturn

Sleep timer

Current time

Wake-up timerWake-up timeProgramme numberDaily

Select the line marked Return to return to the previousmenu.

00 : 00

11 : 28

07 : 0701 BBC1

Daily viewing

13

Time

You can use this menu to switch yourtelevision on or off automatically at a settime.

Display the SUMMARY using the key onthe remote control. Select the line markedTime. Validate using . The TIME menu isdisplayed.

Sleep timer :Use the Left/Right keys to choose how long youwish to view before the television switches off.The television will switch off automatically at theend of this period. To cancel, set to 00:00.

One minute before switching off, a message willinform you that the television is about to go off.If you wish to keep it on, press any key on theremote control or the local keyboard.The television switches to Child lock mode afteran automatic stop. It can only be switched onagain from the remote control.

Current time :The current time is given by the Teletext (see PERSONAL SETTINGS menu). You can also set the time manuallyusing the number keys (0 to 9) on your remote control.

Wake-up timer :

If you wish to be woken up by your television on the channel of your choice, you must first set the televisionclock to the correct time (see above).

Use the Left/Right keys to tick the box and display the Wake-up timer menu.

The lines Wake-up time, Programme number and Daily only appear if you have ticked the box on theline marked Wake-up timer.

Wake-up time :Use the number keys (0 to 9) on the remote control to set the time at which you wish to be woken.

Programme number :Select the programme you wish to be woken by.

Daily :Tick this box if you wish to be awakened at this time every day.

Exit the menu using .

Set the television to standby using the key on the remote control. The red indicator light on the televisionflashes.The television will come on automatically at the programmed time and will go off one hour later if you do not usethe remote control.

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

GB

LIST

Exit01 BBC 102 BBC 203 FR 304 CC1905 ARTE TV06 M607 CNN08 PREM09 EURO

Page -/+Programme: 0 - 9

Daily viewing

14

List of Channels

This list contains up to 10 pages. The number of pages depends onthe number of programmes memorized. For each programme, the listindicates the station name or type and the programme number. The3 AV programmes are listed on page 11.

To display the list, press the key on the remote controlorDisplay the SUMMARY using the key on the remote control. Select theline marked List. Validate using .

The page displayed is the page containing the programme you are watching.It is identified in the list by the symbol TV.To display the next page, press the Right key.To display the previous page, press the Left key.

If you wish to watch one of the programmes on the page displayed:Enter the last digit of the programme number (e.g. for 25 simply enter 5) on theremote control. The list disappears and your programme is selected.

Or,- Select the programme using the Up/Down keys.- Validate using .- Exit the menu using .

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

GB

Daily viewing

15

Selecting ProgrammesFor channels 1 to 9, press the number key corresponding to the desired channel on the remote control. Forprogramme numbers higher than 10, press the key on the remote control: ”- -” appears on the screen. Now usethe number keys on the remote control to enter first the tens digit then the units digit.

If you press while ”- -” is already displayed, the display returns to 0- , in which case you can only selectprogrammes 1 to 9.

Scrolling the Programmes

You can scroll through the programmes using the / keys.

Audio-visual (AV) Programmes

Press the key to call the last audio-visual (AV) programme watched. Press repeatedly to scroll the audio-visual(AV) programmes on the screen.

Volume Control

Use the volume +/- keys to increase or decrease the volume.

Muting the Sound

Press the key to mute the sound. Press again to restore the sound.

Zoom(16/9 models only)

This function is useful for 4/3 or letterbox pictures (black bands at the top and bottom of the screen).Use the Left/Right keys to select the desired zoom position:

ZOOM 0: 4/3 picture (black bands at the sides).FULL SCREEN: for a 4/3 picture that fills the screen.ZOOM 1: for letterbox pictures.

Displaying Information

Press the key to display the following information on the screen: channel number and name, time, zoom, typeof sound.

Television LockYou can use this function to prevent anyone from switching on the television using the buttons on thetelevision set.

The buttons on the television set are locked in the following cases:- If you switch off the set by pressing and holding the key on the remote control for more than 3 seconds,- After a programmed stop,- If the television is set to standby when the alarm has been set.

When the television is locked the red power will be light flashing.The television can now only be operated from the remote control.To release the lock, press any number key on the remote control.

Switching Off the TelevisionTo switch off the television, press the Standby key on the remote control or press the ON/OFF switch on thetelevision set.

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

GB

Teletext

16

Teletext

Certain channels broadcast an electronic news page service with a range of different information services.The presentation and use of the Teletext differ from one country to another and from one programme toanother (Teletext, Fastext or Toptext).

Press the key to display the Teletext Index (page 100).

A message will inform you if the programme you are watching has no Teletext service.To call up a page:Enter the 3 digits of the page number you wish to consult (for example, 150 or 170).After a moment, the page appears.Use the Left/Right keys to consult the next or the previous page.

Standard Functions

Rolling pages:Some information is displayed over several sub-pages. It is scrolled on your screen as it is received.To stop scrolling, select STOP using the Up/Down keys and validate using . Press again to continuescrolling.

Masked text:To reveal a hidden answer (for example in a quiz programme), select ??? using the Up/Down keys and validateusing . Press again to hide the answers.

Zoom :Select ZOOM using the Up/Down keys then press the key once to magnify the top of the screen, twice tomagnify the bottom of the screen (the page will scroll from top to bottom) and a third time to return to the normaldisplay.

Display:You can superpose the Teletext page over the TV picture. To do this, select MIX using the Up/Down keys thenvalidate by pressing the key. Press again to return to the normal display.

Sub-code:You can use this to access a sub-page directly.Select “- - - -” using the Up/Down keys. Then enter the four digits of the required sub-page number.

Certain programmes have Alarm pages that you can set to appear at the time you require. For example:for 15h30 enter 1530 as the sub-page number then press . You must of course leave the televisionon the programme which is to transmit the Alarm page.

Index:To call up the index page, select 100 using the Up/Down keys then validate using .

Direct access:You can use the yellow and blue keys to directly access the pages indicated in the bar at the bottom of the screen.

Fastext functions:If the Teletext you receive is Fastext, a sub-menu at the bottom of the screen appears which you can use to selectfrom the 4 headings according to its colour.To select a heading, press the key of the corresponding colour.

Toptext functions:If the Teletext you receive is TOPtext, the pages are arranged into headings and sub-headings by subject.You can select the first page of a heading directly by pressing the blue key, or the first page of a sub-heading bypressing the yellow key.

Other functions:With certain Teletext channels, it is possible to have sub-titles overlaid on the screen for certain broadcasts as wellas certain news flash updates.The corresponding page number is indicated in the Telextext index.Once you have found the page, the sub-title or the news flash will be overlaid onto the TV picture.The navigation status bar disappears after a few seconds. To display it again, press the key.

To exit Teletext, press or .

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

GB

* on models equipped with this function

* on models equipped with this function

Other Connections

17

Other Connections

The CINCH Video and Audio sockets (1)* are provided toconnect a VHS or 8mm camcorder.

The S and CINCH Audio sockets (1)* are provided to connecta S-VHS or Hi-8 camcorder.

To use the appliance you have connected, press thekey several times until the AV3 programme is

selected on the screen. When you switch off theconnected appliance, the television will remain onthe AV3 programme and you must use the numericalkeys on the remote control to select a programme.

The headphone socket (2)* is provided to connect aheadphone or earphones.

Connecting headphones mute the sound from thetelevision loudspeakers.

Other PossibilitiesCopying a cassette:Plug the VCR you wish to record to into the SCART socketAV2.Plug the appliance you wish to copy from as follows: intothe peripheral jack AV1 for a VCR; into the CINCH AV3 jacksfor a camcorder (see table below).

PLAY RECORD CALLAppliance SCART Socket Appliance SCART Socket

CALLPROGRAMME

VCRPeripheral

AV1

VCRou

CamcorderAV2 AV1

CamcorderCinches or

S-VideoAV3

VCRou

CamcorderAV2 AV3

Connecting a HiFi or AV amplifierIf you wish to connect a HiFi or AV amplifier, plug it into theperipheral jack AV2 using a SCART-CINCH type lead.

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

M a n u e l

d’ u t i l i s a t i o n

B e d i e n u n g s -

a n l e i t u n g

M a n u a l e d i

u t i l i z z a z i o n e

U s e r

m a n u a l

M a n u a l d e

u t i l i z a c i ó n

G e b r u i k s -

a a n w i j z i n g

B r u k s a n -

v i s n i n g

B e t j e n i n g s -

v e j l e d n i n g

F o l h e t o d e

u t i l i z a ç ã o

2 1 D U 2 1 E 2 1 D U 2 3 E2 1 M T 2 1 E 2 4 W K 2 1 E2 5 D G 2 1 E 2 5 D H 2 1 E2 5 D T 2 1 E 2 5 D U 2 1 E2 5 D U 2 3 E 2 5 M H 2 1 E2 8 D G 2 1 E 2 8 D T 2 1 E2 8 W S 2 1 E 2 9 D H 2 1 E2 9 D L 2 1 E 2 9 D U 2 1 E2 9 M H 2 1 E 3 3 M S 2 1 E

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

10 cm

10 cm 5 cm

10 c

m

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

GB

1

About this manual

This document is common to several television models. Therefore, certain functions or settings may not apply tothe model you have purchased

About the switch

The position of the ON/OFF switch differs depending on the model. It may be located on the front or on theright-hand side of your set (see the drawing inside the cover page of your manual).

About safety

To ensure your own safety and safe operation of the equipment, observe the following instructionsthoroughly.

TV sets require sufficient ventilation to prevent their components from overheating, which will cause failure. Do notblock the ventilation openings at the rear. If you place your TV set in a special piece of furniture, make sure thereis enough space for unhindered air circulation. Do not place the TV set in the close vicinity of a heater.The TV set has been designed for use in dry rooms. Should you use it, in exceptionalcircumstances in the open air (example: on the balcony, in the veranda or tent), you must absolutely protect itagainst moisture (dew, rain, splash water). Before switching on a cold TV set in a warm room, you should wait untilany condensation in the screen has dried by itself.Maximum ambient temperature: 35°CMaximum humidity: 85%By the end of your TV evening or when away from home for a longer period, we recommend that you turn off theTV set with the On/Off-switch.Even when the On/Off-switch is in the Off-position, your TV set is not fully disconnected from the mains. Todisconnect the set completely, the mains plug must be pulled out.The mains plug must be easily accessible.In the following cases, we recommend that you pull out the mains connector:1. During a thunderstorm. In such a case, it is advisable that you also disconnect the TV set from the aerial socket.2. When odour or smoke emanates from the set.Never attempt to open your TV set yourself.Further information:The TV set shielding is sufficient to prevent X-radiation to the exterior.Any operation performed by a non skilled person, change of high voltage or replacement of the picture tube by amodel not complying with the manufacturer specification are likely to cause considerable increase in X-radiation.A TV set modified in such a way no longer complies with the manufacturers’ specification and must not be used.

About cleaning

The screen is to be cleaned with liquid glass cleaners.: Never use abrasive products.: Clean the cabinet with a soft cloth soaked with neutral cleaner. Do not use solvents, such as white spirit oralcohol-based cleaning products since they may damage your television.: At regular intervals, clean the ventilation grids at the rear of the TV set.

About degaussing

The terrestrial magnetic field may have an influence on your TV set. This influence is revealed by the colouredspots, which appear on the screen.Should this be the case:: Turn the equipment off by means of the On/Off-switch.: Wait about one hour before switching the set on again.This procedure performs automatic degaussing of the screen. Should there still be coloured spots on the screen,repeat the operation.

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

GB

Contents

2

Page 4

Using the remote controland fitting the batteries.

Page

How to call up a menuand how to select afunction, a setting or anoption.

5

Inst

alla

tio

n About this manual 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

About the switch 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

About safety 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

About cleaning 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

About degaussing 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Basic connections 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Remote control 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Navigation principles 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Calling up the Installation main menu 5. . .

Calling up the Settings summary 5. . . . . . .

Calling up a Menu 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Navigating within the Menus 5. . . . . . . . . . .

Installing your television for thefirst time 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Automatic installation 7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Programme organisation 8. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Manual programming 9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Personal settings 10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Preferences 11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Inst

ruct

ion

sfo

rU

se

Daily viewing 12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Picture Adjustment 12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Sound Settings 12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Time 13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

List of Channels 14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Selecting Programmes 15. . . . . . . . . . . . .

Scrolling the Programmes 15. . . . . . . . . . .

Audio-visual (AV) Programmes 15. . . . . .

Volume Control 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Muting the Sound 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Zoom (16/9 models only) 15. . . . . . . . . . .

Displaying Information 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Television Lock 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Switching Off the Television 15. . . . . . . . .

Teletext 16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Standard Functions 16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Other Connections 17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Other Possibilities 17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Connecting a HiFi or AV amplifier 17. . . .

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

GB

$

ContinentalEurope

United Kingdom

The plug is fitted with a fuse which protects yourtelevision. If your television does not work, the fuse maybe blown. In this case, replace it with an identical 5 AmpASTA or lr BSI (BS 1362) certified fuse.

Note: the mains lead of your television is fitted with amoulded plug. This lead contains all the safety equipment,so you are advised when replacing it not to use anon-specific commercially-available model.

2

Basic connections

3

Basic connections

The mains plug (1) supplies power to the television. Thetelevision must only be plugged in to a 220-240 V - 50 Hzpower supply. It must never be plugged in to a DC source. Ifthe plug comes away from the lead, never attempt to plug itin: this could cause electrocution.

The aerial socket (2), located on the rear of the television, canbe used to connect an external aerial or other applianceequipped with a modulator such as a VCR, satellite receiver,etc.

If you connect an appliance to the aerial jack, you must giveit a channel number. To do this, switch on the appliance, thenuse the television to find the modulator channel (see theappliance manual). Now give it a programme number andmemorise it (see Manual Programming of channels). Then,when you wish to use the appliance, simply select itsprogramme number on the television. This procedure is notrequired for VCR’s not equipped with a modulator.

The SCART socket AV1 (3), located on the rear of thetelevision, is intended to connect a VCR or a camcorder(VHS, 8 mm), a Canal+ decoder, a video games console orRGB-signal emitting appliances.

The SCART socket AV2 (3), located on the rear of thetelevision, is intended to connect a VCR or a camcorder(VHS, 8 mm, S-VHS or Hi-8).

We strongly recommend the use of this type of connection,which gives a better picture quality. To use the peripheralappliance that you have connected, press the AV key on yourremote control (press once to select AV1; twice to selectAV2; three times for AV3: see ”Other Connections”). Thisselection is automatic for some appliances. Pressing “”play”on a VCR, or switching on a satellite receiver connected toAV1 or AV2 will automatically switch on your television.

When you stop the VCR, if you have not changed channelswhile watching the VCR, the television automaticallyswitches back to the channel you were watching beforehand.If the television has been switched on from the VCR, itswitches to standby when the VCR is switched off. Thetelevision automatically switches to 16/9 format if theconnected appliance delivers the corresponding signal.

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

GB

This key is active only when usingthe Teletext (blue key)

Display of channel, time, sound (yellowbutton) (and zoom for models with zoom)

The red, green, yellow andblue keys are also used forthe Teletext.

Standby

Right/Left Selection withinmenus andZoom Function (for models withthis function)

Call up Teletext / Toptext /Fastext function (purple button)

Go to adjustment function MENU

Go to programmes and enternumerical values in menus

Move Up/Down in menus

Change programme

Volume adjustment

To leave a menu or Teletext

Sound mute

Call up programme list(green button)

Selecting appliancesconnected to the television

(AV1, AV2 ...)

Confirm an action or validate amenu option

Reminder of picturepreferences (red button)

For programme numbers higherthan 10, press the 0 key on theremote control: ”- -” appears onthe screen. Now use thenumber keys on the remotecontrol to enter first the tensdigit then the units digit.

8

Please respect the environment! Before throwing any batteries away, consult yourdistributor who may be able to take them back for specific recycling.

Remote control

4

Remote control

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

GB

INSTALLATION MAIN MENU

Exit

Manual programming

Auto installation

Programme organisation

Personal settings

SUMMARY

Exit

Teletext

Picture

Sound

List

Time

Preferences

Navigation principles

5

Navigation principles

Calling up the Installation main menu

If there is no menu displayed on the screen,press and hold the key on the remotecontrol. The settings SUMMARY is displayedfirst, followed by the INSTALLATION MAINMENU which you can use to operate yourtelevision.

Calling up the Settings summary

Press and release the key on theremote control to display the list of menusavailable for using your television functions oradjusting your television

Calling up a Menu

Select the menu you wish using the Up/Downkeys. Press the key to validate..

Navigating within the Menus

Use the Up/Down keys 1 to select a line.

Use the Left/Right keys 2 to:

- Increase or decrease a value:for example:Fine tuning

- Select an option:for example: Reception Aerial

Reception Cable- Activate or deactivate an option:

for example: Decoder- Access a sub-menu:

for example: Picture preferences

You can use the 3 key to:

- Activate or deactivate an option:for example: Decoder

- Access a sub-menu:for example: Picture preferences

- Validate an action:for example: Store on PR number

Use the 4 key to exit a menu.

MANUAL PROGRAMMING

Return

StandardReceptionAutosearchFine tuningStore on PR numberNameDecoderExternal sound path

EURO BGCableCH- -

- -- - - -

Enter channel number or startautosearch with < or >.

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

GB

EnglishFrançais OKDeutschItalianoEspañolPortuguêsNederlandsSvenskaDanskNorwisch

(Fig. 1)(Fig. 1)

(Fig. 2) COUNTRY SELECTION

ExitUnited KingdomEireFranceGermanyItalySpainPortugalHollandBelgium and LuxembourgSwitzerlandAustriaSwedenDenmarkNorway

Other

Select your country and press OK

SEARCHING

AUTO INSTALLATION

003 STATIONS FOUND

Searching for TV stations.Please wait. To cancel press EXIT.

(Fig. 3)

Installing your television for the first time

6

Installing your television for the first time

First plug the television into a mains power outlet and to the external aerial or a cable network, then switch on usingthe ON/OFF switch located on the front or the side of your set.When you switch on your television for the first time, the language selection menu* is displayed (Fig. 1). If this doesnot happen, set the television to standby then press and hold the key on the television until this menu appears.

Installation Instructions (start)

1. Use the Up/Down keys to select thelanguage in which you wish the menus to bedisplayed.

2. Then validate using .

3. A list of countries* is now displayed (Fig. 2).Select the country in which you live, or thecountry from which you wish to receive thebroadcasts if you live in a border area.

4. Then validate using .

5. A welcome message is displayed.

6. Run the automatic installation sequenceusing .

7. A message appears to inform you thatautomatic installation has started (Fig. 3).Wait for a few minutes.A new message will inform you whenautomatic installation is completed.

8. If you wish to check or modify the channelorganisation, press and see theProgramme organisation chapter.

If you do not wish to modify the channelorganisation, you can exit the menu bypressing then watch the channel ofyour choice. Choose the desired channelusing the number keys (1, 2, 3, ...) and the

/ keys.

If you have a decoder, see the Manualprogramming chapter.

Your television will only search for channelscorresponding to the country you haveselected. See the Manual channelprogramming chapter to install any channelsnot found.For cable networks, read the Automaticchannel installation chapter to install anychannels not found.

*The list of languages and countries may varyfrom one model to another.

Installation Instructions (end)

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

GB

INSTALLATION MAIN MENU

Exit

Manual programming

Auto installation

Programme organisation

Personal settings

SEARCHING

AUTO INSTALLATION

003 STATIONS FOUND

Searching for TV stations.Please wait. To cancel press EXIT.

Automatic installation

7

Automatic installation

The Automatic installation function is useful if you have to go through the installation procedure again, such aswhen moving house. This function deletes all previously memorised programmes. To install a new channel, youshould use the Manual programming function.

Before running AUTO INSTALLATION, check the PERSONAL SETTINGS menu to ensure that the countrydisplayed is correct.

Your television will only search for channels corresponding to the selected country, so see the Manualprogramming chapter to install any channels not found. For cable networks, if you have not found certainchannels, select Other instead of a country name in the PERSONAL SETTINGS menu, then run automaticinstallation again.

1. Press and hold the key on the remotecontrol to display the INSTALLATION MAINMENU (The SUMMARY appears first,followed by the INSTALLATION MAINMENU).

2. Select the Auto installation line.

3. Validate using .

A message will inform you that Automaticinstallation has begun.Wait for a few minutes.A new message will inform you whenAutomatic installation is completed.

If you wish to check or reorganize your channeldisplay, press the key and see theProgramme organisation chapter.

If you do not wish to reorganize yourprogrammes, you can exit this menu bypressing , then watch the programme ofyour choice. Choose the desired programmeusing the number keys (1, 2, 3, ...) and the/ keys.

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

GB

INSTALLATION MAIN MENU

Exit

Manual programming

Auto installation

Programme organisation

Personal settings

PROGRAMME ORGANISATION

Return

Select program.Swap with PR.Change pr. nameDelete program.

13- -EURO13

10 MTV11 FR212 TF113 EURO14 CH4015 CC0116 ARTE17 CART18 - - - -19 ARD

Select programme number usingPR-/PR+ or </> or 0 to 9 keys.

Select the line marked Return to return to the previousmenu.

Programme organisation

8

Programme organisation

During automatic installation, your television will search for the channel name and assign it a programme numberaccording to the selected country. You can use the PROGRAMME ORGANISATION menu to name any channelname not found, to change the order in which the channels are displayed, or to delete channels for which receptionis too poor. Follow the messages at the bottom of the screen. For further details, read the information below.

If you wish to access thePROGRAMME ORGANISATION,menu thereafter, first press and holdthe key on the remote control todisplay the INSTALLATION MAINMENU (the SUMMARY is displayedfirst, followed by the INSTALLATIONMAIN MENU) then select Programmeorganisation and validate using .

- To delete a programme for which receptionis too poor:1. Select the line marked Select program.2. Use the / or Left/Right keys to list

your channels.3. When you get to a channel you wish to delete,

select the line marked Delete program.4. Press to delete the programme.

5. .Validate using .

- To organize your channels to suit you:1. Select the line marked Select program..2. Use the / or Left/Right keys and

the programmes logos to find the programmeto which you wish to give the No.1.Its present number appears on the linemarked Select program..

3. Select the line marked Swap with PR.4. Enter 01.5. Press . The two programmes swap

position and the desired programmebecomes N°1.

6. Repeat the above procedure for the otherchannels.

- To name your channels:1. Select the line marked Change pr. name2. Select the character you wish to modify using

the Left/Right keys.3. Use the and keys to display the letter you

require.The name you have entered will bememorised when you move to another line orexit the menu.

If you wish to change the order in whichyour programmes are displayed or ifyou wish to name other programmes,repeat the procedures describedabove.

When you have finished organizing theprogrammes, exit the menu using .

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

GB

INSTALLATION MAIN MENU

Exit

Manual programming

Auto installation

Programme organisation

Personal settings

MANUAL PROGRAMMING

Return

StandardReceptionAutosearchFine tuningStore on PR numberNameDecoderExternal sound path

EURO BGCableCH- -

- -- - - -

Enter channel number or startautosearch with < or >.

Select the line marked Return to return to the previous

Manual programming

9

Manual programming

The manual installation function is useful if some programmes have not been installed even after AUTOMATICINSTALLATION.

1. Press and hold , the SUMMARY isdisplayed first, followed by theINSTALLATION MAIN MENU.

2. Select the line marked Manualprogramming.

3. Display the menu using .4. Now continue by following the messages at

the bottom of the screen. For further details,read the information below.

Standard :Select the standard using Left/Right keys thatcorresponds to your country from the list ofstandards.

The number of standards proposed will differfrom one model to another.

France for France and LuxemburgDKK’ eg. for Eastern Europe and

the Middle-EastI for the United Kingdom and

IrelandEuro BG for Western Europe

Reception :Your television can pick up channels either viaan aerial (RF channels) or via a cable network.Certain cable networks use the samefrequencies as the RF channels. If this is thecase, you must select Aerial instead of Cable.Autosearch :Enter the programme number if you know it. Ifnot, search using the Left/Right keys. Yourtelevision will stop at the first channel it tunesinto. If you wish to memorize it, go to the linemarked Store on PR number. If not, resumethe search using the Left/Right keys.

Fine tuning :You can use this to improve the picture if the transmitter frequency is out of adjustment. Use the Left/Right keysto obtain the best possible picture and sound.Store on PR number :Enter the programme number you wish to give the channel (e.g.: 01 for BBC1). Memorise using .Name :If the station has been identified by the transmitter, its name will be inscribed automatically. You can change theproposed name or enter it if it has not already been identified. Select the character you wish to modify using theLeft/Right keys. Use the or keys to display the character you desire.Decoder :Use the Left/Right keys to tick the box if the channel is coded and if a decoder is connected to the AV1 jack.External sound path :Switch on your decoder. If the sound is coded or if you have no sound, activate or deactivate the box as requiredusing the Left/Right keys.

Once you have made all the adjustments you wish to a programme, go to Store on PR number and pressto memorise these. Then move on to the next channel.

Once you have completed your Manual Programming, exit the menu using .

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

GB

INSTALLATION MAIN MENU

Exit

Manual programming

Auto installation

Programme organisation

Personal settings

Personal settings

10

Personal settings

1. Press and hold the key: theSUMMARY is displayed first, followed by theINSTALLATION MAIN MENU.

2. Select the line marked Personal settings.

3. Display the menu using .4. Continue by following the messages at the

bottom of the screen.

For further details, read the information below.

Menu language :Select the language in which the menus are tobe displayed.

Country :Indicate the country in which you are if you wishto rerun Automatic Programming.

For cable networks, if certain channelshave not been found, select Otherinstead of the country name before run-ning automatic installation again.You may find that the characters of cer-tain teletext languages are inaccess-ible for the selected country.

Auto volume level :This is a sound control function which aims toequalise the volume level between differentchannels, and between different programmeson the same channel.

Activate or deactivate the auto volume level asrequired.

On models equipped with Virtual DolbySurround, this function remainsinactive if Dolby Virtual has beenselected in the SOUND menu (seeVolume Control).

AV1, AV2, AV3 name :Use these to give a name to each of youraudio-visual programmes. Select the characteryou wish to modify using the Left/Right keys.Use the or keys to display the desiredcharacter.

Prog. to be used for reference time :To display the time using the key or to usethe alarm function, the television clock must beset to the correct time. Select the line markedProg. to be used for reference time and selecta channel which broadcasts teletext. The timeis set automatically and is displayed after thechannel number.

Exit the menu using .

13:15

PERSONAL SETTINGS

Return

Menu language

Country

Auto volume level

AV1 nameAV2 nameAV3 name

Prog. to be usedfor reference time

Select a station from which you wantto get the reference time.

English

UK

VCR- - - -CAMC

06

Select the line marked Return to return to the previousmenu.

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

GB

PREFERENCESReturn

Show program. numberAV2 video inputAV3 video inputFormat controlPicture preferences

VideoS-VideoAuto

PICTURE PREFERENCES

Return

SettingsBrightnessColourContrast

Personal

Select the line marked Return to return to the previousmenu.

Preferences

11

Preferences

1. Display the SUMMARY by pressing andreleasing the key on the remotecontrol .

2. Select the line marked Preferences.3. Display the menu using .

Make your choice from the proposedoptions. Use the information below to helpyou.

Show program. number :If you wish to permanently display the numberof the programme you are watching, tick the boxusing the Left/Right keys. Press the Left/Rightkeys again to deactivate this function.

AV2 video input :Use the Left/Right keys to select the type of video signal received at the AV2 SCART socket (Video or S-Video).

AV3 video input :Use the Left/Right keys to select the type of video signal received at the AV3 sockets (these sockets are locatedon the front or the side of the television).

Format control :Use the Left/Right keys to select the desired picture format:

Auto : if the transmitter (for 16/9 format TV’s) or the appliance connected to one of the peripheral jacks deliversthe switching signal, the television automatically adapts to the transmitted picture format.16/9 : manually selects widescreen picture format.4/3 : manually selects this picture format.

If you have selected 16/9 or 4/3, the television will switch back to Auto when you change channels or youswitch off.

Picture preferences :

To access the PICTURE PREFERENCESmenu, press .

If you wish, you can personalize certainpicture settings. Select and set theproposed options. Use the informationbelow to help you.

Settings :Select Standard or Personal.

Standard corresponds to the factory settings.Personal corresponds to the settings that youhave entered yourself.

The lines Brightness, Colour andContrast are displayed only if you haveselected Personal on the Settings line.

Select each line one after the other and enteryour required settings. You can recall thesepicture settings by pressing the red key on theremote control.

Exit the menu using .

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

GB

PICTURE

Return

BrightnessColourContrastSharpness

Contrast expandTone

NeutralCold

Select the line marked Return to return to the previousmenu.

SOUND

Return

Sound typeSound mode

Balance L/RTrebleBassSurround effect

AutomaticNormal

Broadcastmonostereodual

NICAM-3AV

Choiceautomatic - mono

mono - stereosound 1 - sound 2

sound 1 - sound 2 - sound 3stereo - sound 1 - sound 2

Mode Effect

Normal : reproduces the original sound (mono or stereo).

Wide : gives a stereo effect on mono sounds.Stereo wide : accentuates the stereo effect.Magic : accentuates the stereo effects and

adds echo.Dolby Virtual : Virtual Dolby Surround.

Virtual Surround Dolby is based on Dolby Pro Logicdecoding for the reproduction of the Left, Right, Centre andVirtual Surround sound channels using two loudspeakers.“”Dolby”, “”Pro Logic” and the double -D symbol are trademarks of theDolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation.

Manufactured under licence from Dolby Laboratories LicensingCorporation.

Daily viewing

12

Daily viewing

Picture Adjustment

Display the SUMMARY using the key onthe remote control. Select Picture. Validateusing . The PICTURE menu is displayed.

Select and set the proposed options. Usethe information below to help you.

Brightness, Colour, Contrast, Sharpness:Select each of these lines one after the other andset as required.Contrast expand :Select this line then choose the desired Contrastexpand setting (High or Low).Tone :Select this line then choose the desired colourtone (Warm, Neutral or Cold).Exit the menu using .

Sound Settings

Display the SUMMARY using the key onthe remote control. Select the line markedSound. Validate using . The SOUND menuis displayed.

Select and set the proposed options. Usethe information below to help you.

Sound type :The choices available to you depend onyour television model and the broadcast.Stereo, Dual or NICAM reception and thecorresponding choices are only availableon Stereo or NICAM Stereo televisions.

Select this line, then select the type of sound youdesire.Sound mode :Select this line, then choose the desired modeusing the Left/Right keys.

The choices available to you depend onyour television model and the type ofsound. Magic and Dolby Virtual modesare only available in stereo on TV’sequipped with Virtual Dolby Surround.Stereo wide is only available on Stereo orNicam televisions not equipped withVirtual Dolby Surround.

Balance L/R :Select this line, then balance the sound betweenthe Left and Right loudspeakers.Treble, Bass :Select each of these lines and adjust to suit you.Surround effect :

This line appears only if you have selectedDolby Virtual on the Sound mode line.

Select this line and adjust the surround effect tosuit you.Exit the menu using .

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

GB

TIMEReturn

Sleep timer

Current time

Wake-up timerWake-up timeProgramme numberDaily

Select the line marked Return to return to the previousmenu.

00 : 00

11 : 28

07 : 0701 BBC1

Daily viewing

13

Time

You can use this menu to switch yourtelevision on or off automatically at a settime.

Display the SUMMARY using the key onthe remote control. Select the line markedTime. Validate using . The TIME menu isdisplayed.

Sleep timer :Use the Left/Right keys to choose how long youwish to view before the television switches off.The television will switch off automatically at theend of this period. To cancel, set to 00:00.

One minute before switching off, a message willinform you that the television is about to go off.If you wish to keep it on, press any key on theremote control or the local keyboard.The television switches to Child lock mode afteran automatic stop. It can only be switched onagain from the remote control.

Current time :The current time is given by the Teletext (see PERSONAL SETTINGS menu). You can also set the time manuallyusing the number keys (0 to 9) on your remote control.

Wake-up timer :

If you wish to be woken up by your television on the channel of your choice, you must first set the televisionclock to the correct time (see above).

Use the Left/Right keys to tick the box and display the Wake-up timer menu.

The lines Wake-up time, Programme number and Daily only appear if you have ticked the box on theline marked Wake-up timer.

Wake-up time :Use the number keys (0 to 9) on the remote control to set the time at which you wish to be woken.

Programme number :Select the programme you wish to be woken by.

Daily :Tick this box if you wish to be awakened at this time every day.

Exit the menu using .

Set the television to standby using the key on the remote control. The red indicator light on the televisionflashes.The television will come on automatically at the programmed time and will go off one hour later if you do not usethe remote control.

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

GB

LIST

Exit01 BBC 102 BBC 203 FR 304 CC1905 ARTE TV06 M607 CNN08 PREM09 EURO

Page -/+Programme: 0 - 9

Daily viewing

14

List of Channels

This list contains up to 10 pages. The number of pages depends onthe number of programmes memorized. For each programme, the listindicates the station name or type and the programme number. The3 AV programmes are listed on page 11.

To display the list, press the key on the remote controlorDisplay the SUMMARY using the key on the remote control. Select theline marked List. Validate using .

The page displayed is the page containing the programme you are watching.It is identified in the list by the symbol TV.To display the next page, press the Right key.To display the previous page, press the Left key.

If you wish to watch one of the programmes on the page displayed:Enter the last digit of the programme number (e.g. for 25 simply enter 5) on theremote control. The list disappears and your programme is selected.

Or,- Select the programme using the Up/Down keys.- Validate using .- Exit the menu using .

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

GB

Daily viewing

15

Selecting ProgrammesFor channels 1 to 9, press the number key corresponding to the desired channel on the remote control. Forprogramme numbers higher than 10, press the key on the remote control: ”- -” appears on the screen. Now usethe number keys on the remote control to enter first the tens digit then the units digit.

If you press while ”- -” is already displayed, the display returns to 0- , in which case you can only selectprogrammes 1 to 9.

Scrolling the Programmes

You can scroll through the programmes using the / keys.

Audio-visual (AV) Programmes

Press the key to call the last audio-visual (AV) programme watched. Press repeatedly to scroll the audio-visual(AV) programmes on the screen.

Volume Control

Use the volume +/- keys to increase or decrease the volume.

Muting the Sound

Press the key to mute the sound. Press again to restore the sound.

Zoom(16/9 models only)

This function is useful for 4/3 or letterbox pictures (black bands at the top and bottom of the screen).Use the Left/Right keys to select the desired zoom position:

ZOOM 0: 4/3 picture (black bands at the sides).FULL SCREEN: for a 4/3 picture that fills the screen.ZOOM 1: for letterbox pictures.

Displaying Information

Press the key to display the following information on the screen: channel number and name, time, zoom, typeof sound.

Television LockYou can use this function to prevent anyone from switching on the television using the buttons on thetelevision set.

The buttons on the television set are locked in the following cases:- If you switch off the set by pressing and holding the key on the remote control for more than 3 seconds,- After a programmed stop,- If the television is set to standby when the alarm has been set.

When the television is locked the red power will be light flashing.The television can now only be operated from the remote control.To release the lock, press any number key on the remote control.

Switching Off the TelevisionTo switch off the television, press the Standby key on the remote control or press the ON/OFF switch on thetelevision set.

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

GB

Teletext

16

Teletext

Certain channels broadcast an electronic news page service with a range of different information services.The presentation and use of the Teletext differ from one country to another and from one programme toanother (Teletext, Fastext or Toptext).

Press the key to display the Teletext Index (page 100).

A message will inform you if the programme you are watching has no Teletext service.To call up a page:Enter the 3 digits of the page number you wish to consult (for example, 150 or 170).After a moment, the page appears.Use the Left/Right keys to consult the next or the previous page.

Standard Functions

Rolling pages:Some information is displayed over several sub-pages. It is scrolled on your screen as it is received.To stop scrolling, select STOP using the Up/Down keys and validate using . Press again to continuescrolling.

Masked text:To reveal a hidden answer (for example in a quiz programme), select ??? using the Up/Down keys and validateusing . Press again to hide the answers.

Zoom :Select ZOOM using the Up/Down keys then press the key once to magnify the top of the screen, twice tomagnify the bottom of the screen (the page will scroll from top to bottom) and a third time to return to the normaldisplay.

Display:You can superpose the Teletext page over the TV picture. To do this, select MIX using the Up/Down keys thenvalidate by pressing the key. Press again to return to the normal display.

Sub-code:You can use this to access a sub-page directly.Select “- - - -” using the Up/Down keys. Then enter the four digits of the required sub-page number.

Certain programmes have Alarm pages that you can set to appear at the time you require. For example:for 15h30 enter 1530 as the sub-page number then press . You must of course leave the televisionon the programme which is to transmit the Alarm page.

Index:To call up the index page, select 100 using the Up/Down keys then validate using .

Direct access:You can use the yellow and blue keys to directly access the pages indicated in the bar at the bottom of the screen.

Fastext functions:If the Teletext you receive is Fastext, a sub-menu at the bottom of the screen appears which you can use to selectfrom the 4 headings according to its colour.To select a heading, press the key of the corresponding colour.

Toptext functions:If the Teletext you receive is TOPtext, the pages are arranged into headings and sub-headings by subject.You can select the first page of a heading directly by pressing the blue key, or the first page of a sub-heading bypressing the yellow key.

Other functions:With certain Teletext channels, it is possible to have sub-titles overlaid on the screen for certain broadcasts as wellas certain news flash updates.The corresponding page number is indicated in the Telextext index.Once you have found the page, the sub-title or the news flash will be overlaid onto the TV picture.The navigation status bar disappears after a few seconds. To display it again, press the key.

To exit Teletext, press or .

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

GB

* on models equipped with this function

* on models equipped with this function

Other Connections

17

Other Connections

The CINCH Video and Audio sockets (1)* are provided toconnect a VHS or 8mm camcorder.

The S and CINCH Audio sockets (1)* are provided to connecta S-VHS or Hi-8 camcorder.

To use the appliance you have connected, press thekey several times until the AV3 programme is

selected on the screen. When you switch off theconnected appliance, the television will remain onthe AV3 programme and you must use the numericalkeys on the remote control to select a programme.

The headphone socket (2)* is provided to connect aheadphone or earphones.

Connecting headphones mute the sound from thetelevision loudspeakers.

Other PossibilitiesCopying a cassette:Plug the VCR you wish to record to into the SCART socketAV2.Plug the appliance you wish to copy from as follows: intothe peripheral jack AV1 for a VCR; into the CINCH AV3 jacksfor a camcorder (see table below).

PLAY RECORD CALLAppliance SCART Socket Appliance SCART Socket

CALLPROGRAMME

VCRPeripheral

AV1

VCRou

CamcorderAV2 AV1

CamcorderCinches or

S-VideoAV3

VCRou

CamcorderAV2 AV3

Connecting a HiFi or AV amplifierIf you wish to connect a HiFi or AV amplifier, plug it into theperipheral jack AV2 using a SCART-CINCH type lead.

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

B e d i e n u n g s -

a n l e i t u n g ·

M a n u a l e d i

u t i l i z z a z i o n e ·

U

m a n u a l ·

DF321C / DF421C / MF221C

δ η γ ι ε ς

ρ η σ ε ω ς ·

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

10 cm

10 cm 5 cm

10 c

m

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

GB

1

About this manual

This document is common to several television models. Therefore, certain functions or settings may not apply tothe model you have purchased

About the switch

The position of the ON/OFF switch differs depending on the model. It may be located on the front or on theright-hand side of your set (see the drawing inside the cover page of your manual).

About safety

To ensure your own safety and safe operation of the equipment, observe the following instructionsthoroughly.

TV sets require sufficient ventilation to prevent their components from overheating, which will cause failure. Do notblock the ventilation openings at the rear. If you place your TV set in a special piece of furniture, make sure thereis enough space for unhindered air circulation. Do not place the TV set in the close vicinity of a heater.The TV set has been designed for use in dry rooms. Should you use it, in exceptionalcircumstances in the open air (example: on the balcony, in the veranda or tent), you must absolutely protect itagainst moisture (dew, rain, splash water). Before switching on a cold TV set in a warm room, you should wait untilany condensation in the screen has dried by itself.Maximum ambient temperature: 35°CMaximum humidity: 85%By the end of your TV evening or when away from home for a longer period, we recommend that you turn off theTV set with the On/Off-switch.Even when the On/Off-switch is in the Off-position, your TV set is not fully disconnected from the mains. Todisconnect the set completely, the mains plug must be pulled out.The mains plug must be easily accessible.In the following cases, we recommend that you pull out the mains connector:1. During a thunderstorm. In such a case, it is advisable that you also disconnect the TV set from the aerial socket.2. When odour or smoke emanates from the set.Never attempt to open your TV set yourself.Further information:The TV set shielding is sufficient to prevent X-radiation to the exterior.Any operation performed by a non skilled person, change of high voltage or replacement of the picture tube by amodel not complying with the manufacturer specification are likely to cause considerable increase in X-radiation.A TV set modified in such a way no longer complies with the manufacturers’ specification and must not be used.

About cleaning

The screen is to be cleaned with liquid glass cleaners.: Never use abrasive products.: Clean the cabinet with a soft cloth soaked with neutral cleaner. Do not use solvents, such as white spirit oralcohol-based cleaning products since they may damage your television.: At regular intervals, clean the ventilation grids at the rear of the TV set.

About degaussing

The terrestrial magnetic field may have an influence on your TV set. This influence is revealed by the colouredspots, which appear on the screen.Should this be the case:: Turn the equipment off by means of the On/Off-switch.: Wait about one hour before switching the set on again.This procedure performs automatic degaussing of the screen. Should there still be coloured spots on the screen,repeat the operation.

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

GB

Contents

2

Page 4

Using the remote controland fitting the batteries.

Page

How to call up a menuand how to select afunction, a setting or anoption.

5

Inst

alla

tio

n About this manual 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

About the switch 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

About safety 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

About cleaning 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

About degaussing 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Basic connections 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Remote control 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Navigation principles 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Calling up the INSTALLATIONMAIN MENU 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Calling up the SUMMARY 5. . . . . . . . . . . . .

Calling up a Menu 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Navigating within the Menus 5. . . . . . . . . . .

Installing your television forthe first time 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Automatic installation 7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Programme organisation 8. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Manual programming 9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Personal settings 10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Preferences 11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Inst

ruct

ion

sfo

rU

se

Daily viewing 12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Picture Adjustment 12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Sound Settings 12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Time 13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

List of Channels 14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Selecting Programmes 15. . . . . . . . . . . . .

Scrolling the Programmes 15. . . . . . . . . . .

Audio-visual (AV) Programmes 15. . . . . .

Volume Control 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Muting the Sound 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Zoom (16/9 models only) 15. . . . . . . . . . .

Displaying Information 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Television Lock 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Switching Off the Television 15. . . . . . . . .

Teletext 16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Standard Functions 16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Other Connections 17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Other Possibilities 17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Connecting a HiFi or AV amplifier 17. . . .C

17/

BA

SIC

/40

00/

GB

-TB

A/

I6.3

/B

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

GB

$

ContinentalEurope

United Kingdom

The plug is fitted with a fuse which protects yourtelevision. If your television does not work, the fuse maybe blown. In this case, replace it with an identical 5 AmpASTA or lr BSI (BS 1362) certified fuse.

Note: the mains lead of your television is fitted with amoulded plug. This lead contains all the safety equipment,so you are advised when replacing it not to use anon-specific commercially-available model.

2

Basic connections

3

Basic connections

The mains plug (1) supplies power to the television. Thetelevision must only be plugged in to a 220-240 V - 50 Hzpower supply. It must never be plugged in to a DC source. Ifthe plug comes away from the lead, never attempt to plug itin: this could cause electrocution.

The aerial socket (2), located on the rear of the television, canbe used to connect an external aerial or other applianceequipped with a modulator such as a VCR, satellite receiver,etc.

If you connect an appliance to the aerial jack, you must giveit a channel number. To do this, switch on the appliance, thenuse the television to find the modulator channel (see theappliance manual). Now give it a programme number andmemorise it (see Manual Programming of channels). Then,when you wish to use the appliance, simply select itsprogramme number on the television. This procedure is notrequired for VCR’s not equipped with a modulator.

The SCART socket AV1 (3), located on the rear of thetelevision, is intended to connect a VCR or a camcorder(VHS, 8 mm), a Canal+ decoder, a video games console orRGB-signal emitting appliances.

The SCART socket AV2 (3), located on the rear of thetelevision, is intended to connect a VCR or a camcorder(VHS, 8 mm, S-VHS or Hi-8).

We strongly recommend the use of this type of connection,which gives a better picture quality. To use the peripheralappliance that you have connected, press the AV key on yourremote control (press once to select AV1; twice to selectAV2; three times for AV3: see ”Other Connections”). Thisselection is automatic for some appliances. Pressing “”play”on a VCR, or switching on a satellite receiver connected toAV1 or AV2 will automatically switch on your television.

When you stop the VCR, if you have not changed channelswhile watching the VCR, the television automaticallyswitches back to the channel you were watching beforehand.If the television has been switched on from the VCR, itswitches to standby when the VCR is switched off. Thetelevision automatically switches to 16/9 format if theconnected appliance delivers the corresponding signal.

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

GB

This key is active only whenusing the Teletext (blue key)

Confirm an action or validatea menu option

Right/Left Selection withinmenus andZoom Function (for models withthis function)

Call up Teletext / Toptext /Fastext function (purple button)

Go to adjustment function MENUVolume adjustment

Standby

Illumination of remote controlbuttons

Sound mute

Change programme

Move Up/Down in menus

Call up programme list(green button)

Selecting appliancesconnected to the television

(AV1, AV2 ...)

Display of channel, time, sound(yellow button) (and zoom for models

with zoom)

Reminder of picturepreferences (red button)

To leave a menu or Teletext

Go to programmes and enternumerical values in menus

For programme numbers higherthan 10, press the 0 key on theremote control: ”- -” appears onthe screen. Now use thenumber keys on the remotecontrol to enter first the tensdigit then the units digit.

The red, green, yellow andblue keys are also used forthe Teletext.

Please respect the environment! Before throwing any batteries away, consult yourdistributor who may be able to take them back for specific recycling.

Remote control

Remote control

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

GB

INSTALLATION MAIN MENU

Exit

Manual programming

Auto installation

Programme organisation

Personal settings

SUMMARY

Exit

Teletext

Picture

Sound

List

Time

Preferences

Navigation principles

5

Navigation principles

Calling up the Installation main menu

If there is no menu displayed on the screen,press and hold the key on the remotecontrol. The settings SUMMARY is displayedfirst, followed by the INSTALLATION MAINMENU which you can use to operate yourtelevision.

Calling up the Settings summary

Press and release the key on theremote control to display the list of menusavailable for using your television functions oradjusting your television

Calling up a Menu

Select the menu you wish using the Up/Downkeys. Press the key to validate..

Navigating within the Menus

Use the Up/Down keys 1 to select a line.

Use the Left/Right keys 2 to:

- Increase or decrease a value:for example:Fine tuning

- Select an option:for example: Reception Aerial

Reception Cable- Activate or deactivate an option:

for example: Decoder- Access a sub-menu:

for example: Picture preferences

You can use the 3 key to:

- Activate or deactivate an option:for example: Decoder

- Access a sub-menu:for example: Picture preferences

- Validate an action:for example: Store on PR number

Use the 4 key to exit a menu.

MANUAL PROGRAMMING

Return

StandardReceptionAutosearchFine tuningStore on PR numberNameDecoderExternal sound path

EURO BGCableCH- -

- -- - - -

Enter channel number or startautosearch with < or >.

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

GB

EnglishFrançais OKDeutschItalianoEspañolPortuguêsNederlandsSvenskaDanskNorwisch

(Fig. 1)(Fig. 1)

(Fig. 2) COUNTRY SELECTION

ExitUnited KingdomEireFranceGermanyItalySpainPortugalHollandBelgium and LuxembourgSwitzerlandAustriaSwedenDenmarkNorway

Other

Select your country and press OK

SEARCHING

AUTO INSTALLATION

003 STATIONS FOUND

Searching for TV stations.Please wait. To cancel press EXIT.

(Fig. 3)

Installing your television for the first time

6

Installing your television for the first time

First plug the television into a mains power outlet and to the external aerial or a cable network, then switch on usingthe ON/OFF switch located on the front or the side of your set.When you switch on your television for the first time, the language selection menu* is displayed (Fig. 1). If this doesnot happen, set the television to standby then press and hold the key on the television until this menu appears.

Installation Instructions (start)

1. Use the Up/Down keys to select thelanguage in which you wish the menus to bedisplayed.

2. Then validate using .

3. A list of countries* is now displayed (Fig. 2).Select the country in which you live, or thecountry from which you wish to receive thebroadcasts if you live in a border area.

4. Then validate using .

5. A welcome message is displayed.

6. Run the automatic installation sequenceusing .

7. A message appears to inform you thatautomatic installation has started (Fig. 3).Wait for a few minutes.A new message will inform you whenautomatic installation is completed.

8. If you wish to check or modify the channelorganisation, press and see theProgramme organisation chapter.

If you do not wish to modify the channelorganisation, you can exit the menu bypressing then watch the channel ofyour choice. Choose the desired channelusing the number keys (1, 2, 3, ...) and the

/ keys.

If you have a decoder, see the Manualprogramming chapter.

Your television will only search for channelscorresponding to the country you haveselected. See the Manual channelprogramming chapter to install any channelsnot found.For cable networks, read the Automaticchannel installation chapter to install anychannels not found.

*The list of languages and countries may varyfrom one model to another.

Installation Instructions (end)

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

GB

INSTALLATION MAIN MENU

Exit

Manual programming

Auto installation

Programme organisation

Personal settings

SEARCHING

AUTO INSTALLATION

003 STATIONS FOUND

Searching for TV stations.Please wait. To cancel press EXIT.

Automatic installation

7

Automatic installation

The Automatic installation function is useful if you have to go through the installation procedure again, such aswhen moving house. This function deletes all previously memorised programmes. To install a new channel, youshould use the Manual programming function.

Before running AUTO INSTALLATION, check the PERSONAL SETTINGS menu to ensure that the countrydisplayed is correct.

Your television will only search for channels corresponding to the selected country, so see the Manualprogramming chapter to install any channels not found. For cable networks, if you have not found certainchannels, select Other instead of a country name in the PERSONAL SETTINGS menu, then run automaticinstallation again.

1. Press and hold the key on the remotecontrol to display the INSTALLATION MAINMENU (The SUMMARY appears first,followed by the INSTALLATION MAINMENU).

2. Select the Auto installation line.

3. Validate using .

A message will inform you that Automaticinstallation has begun.Wait for a few minutes.A new message will inform you whenAutomatic installation is completed.

If you wish to check or reorganize your channeldisplay, press the key and see theProgramme organisation chapter.

If you do not wish to reorganize yourprogrammes, you can exit this menu bypressing , then watch the programme ofyour choice. Choose the desired programmeusing the number keys (1, 2, 3, ...) and the/ keys.

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

GB

INSTALLATION MAIN MENU

Exit

Manual programming

Auto installation

Programme organisation

Personal settings

PROGRAMME ORGANISATION

Return

Select program.Swap with PR.Change pr. nameDelete program.

13- -EURO13

10 MTV11 FR212 TF113 EURO14 CH4015 CC0116 ARTE17 CART18 - - - -19 ARD

Select programme number usingPR-/PR+ or </> or 0 to 9 keys.

Select the line marked Return to return to the previousmenu.

Programme organisation

8

Programme organisation

During automatic installation, your television will search for the channel name and assign it a programme numberaccording to the selected country. You can use the PROGRAMME ORGANISATION menu to name any channelname not found, to change the order in which the channels are displayed, or to delete channels for which receptionis too poor. Follow the messages at the bottom of the screen. For further details, read the information below.

If you wish to access thePROGRAMME ORGANISATION,menu thereafter, first press and holdthe key on the remote control todisplay the INSTALLATION MAINMENU (the SUMMARY is displayedfirst, followed by the INSTALLATIONMAIN MENU) then select Programmeorganisation and validate using .

- To delete a programme for which receptionis too poor:1. Select the line marked Select program.2. Use the / or Left/Right keys to list

your channels.3. When you get to a channel you wish to delete,

select the line marked Delete program.4. Press to delete the programme.

5. .Validate using .

- To organize your channels to suit you:1. Select the line marked Select program..2. Use the / or Left/Right keys and

the programmes logos to find the programmeto which you wish to give the No.1.Its present number appears on the linemarked Select program..

3. Select the line marked Swap with PR.4. Enter 01.5. Press . The two programmes swap

position and the desired programmebecomes N°1.

6. Repeat the above procedure for the otherchannels.

- To name your channels:1. Select the line marked Change pr. name2. Select the character you wish to modify using

the Left/Right keys.3. Use the and keys to display the letter you

require.The name you have entered will bememorised when you move to another line orexit the menu.

If you wish to change the order in whichyour programmes are displayed or ifyou wish to name other programmes,repeat the procedures describedabove.

When you have finished organizing theprogrammes, exit the menu using .

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

GB

INSTALLATION MAIN MENU

Exit

Manual programming

Auto installation

Programme organisation

Personal settings

MANUAL PROGRAMMING

Return

StandardReceptionAutosearchFine tuningStore on PR numberNameDecoderExternal sound path

EURO BGCableCH- -

- -- - - -

Enter channel number or startautosearch with < or >.

Select the line marked Return to return to the previous

Manual programming

9

Manual programming

The manual installation function is useful if some programmes have not been installed even after AUTOMATICINSTALLATION.

1. Press and hold , the SUMMARY isdisplayed first, followed by theINSTALLATION MAIN MENU.

2. Select the line marked Manualprogramming.

3. Display the menu using .4. Now continue by following the messages at

the bottom of the screen. For further details,read the information below.

Standard :Select the standard using Left/Right keys thatcorresponds to your country from the list ofstandards.

The number of standards proposed will differfrom one model to another.

France for France and LuxemburgDKK’ eg. for Eastern Europe and

the Middle-EastI for the United Kingdom and

IrelandEuro BG for Western Europe

Reception :Your television can pick up channels either viaan aerial (RF channels) or via a cable network.Certain cable networks use the samefrequencies as the RF channels. If this is thecase, you must select Aerial instead of Cable.Autosearch :Enter the programme number if you know it. Ifnot, search using the Left/Right keys. Yourtelevision will stop at the first channel it tunesinto. If you wish to memorize it, go to the linemarked Store on PR number. If not, resumethe search using the Left/Right keys.

Fine tuning :You can use this to improve the picture if the transmitter frequency is out of adjustment. Use the Left/Right keysto obtain the best possible picture and sound.Store on PR number :Enter the programme number you wish to give the channel (e.g.: 01 for BBC1). Memorise using .Name :If the station has been identified by the transmitter, its name will be inscribed automatically. You can change theproposed name or enter it if it has not already been identified. Select the character you wish to modify using theLeft/Right keys. Use the or keys to display the character you desire.Decoder :Use the Left/Right keys to tick the box if the channel is coded and if a decoder is connected to the AV1 jack.External sound path :Switch on your decoder. If the sound is coded or if you have no sound, activate or deactivate the box as requiredusing the Left/Right keys.

Once you have made all the adjustments you wish to a programme, go to Store on PR number and pressto memorise these. Then move on to the next channel.

Once you have completed your Manual Programming, exit the menu using .

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

GB

INSTALLATION MAIN MENU

Exit

Manual programming

Auto installation

Programme organisation

Personal settings

Personal settings

10

Personal settings

1. Press and hold the key: theSUMMARY is displayed first, followed by theINSTALLATION MAIN MENU.

2. Select the line marked Personal settings.

3. Display the menu using .4. Continue by following the messages at the

bottom of the screen.

For further details, read the information below.

Menu language :Select the language in which the menus are tobe displayed.

Country :Indicate the country in which you are if you wishto rerun Automatic Programming.

For cable networks, if certain channelshave not been found, select Otherinstead of the country name before run-ning automatic installation again.You may find that the characters of cer-tain teletext languages are inaccess-ible for the selected country.

Auto volume level :This is a sound control function which aims toequalise the volume level between differentchannels, and between different programmeson the same channel.

Activate or deactivate the auto volume level asrequired.

On models equipped with Virtual DolbySurround, this function remainsinactive if Dolby Virtual has beenselected in the SOUND menu (seeVolume Control).

AV1, AV2, AV3 name :Use these to give a name to each of youraudio-visual programmes. Select the characteryou wish to modify using the Left/Right keys.Use the or keys to display the desiredcharacter.

Prog. to be used for reference time :To display the time using the key or to usethe alarm function, the television clock must beset to the correct time. Select the line markedProg. to be used for reference time and selecta channel which broadcasts teletext. The timeis set automatically and is displayed after thechannel number.

Exit the menu using .

13:15

PERSONAL SETTINGS

Return

Menu language

Country

Auto volume level

AV1 nameAV2 nameAV3 name

Prog. to be usedfor reference time

Select a station from which you wantto get the reference time.

English

UK

VCR- - - -CAMC

06

Select the line marked Return to return to the previousmenu.

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

GB

PREFERENCESReturn

Show program. numberAV2 video inputAV3 video inputFormat controlPicture preferences

VideoS-VideoAuto

PICTURE PREFERENCES

Return

SettingsBrightnessColourContrast

Personal

Select the line marked Return to return to the previousmenu.

Preferences

11

Preferences

1. Display the SUMMARY by pressing andreleasing the key on the remotecontrol .

2. Select the line marked Preferences.3. Display the menu using .

Make your choice from the proposedoptions. Use the information below to helpyou.

Show program. number :If you wish to permanently display the numberof the programme you are watching, tick the boxusing the Left/Right keys. Press the Left/Rightkeys again to deactivate this function.

AV2 video input :Use the Left/Right keys to select the type of video signal received at the AV2 SCART socket (Video or S-Video).

AV3 video input :Use the Left/Right keys to select the type of video signal received at the AV3 sockets (these sockets are locatedon the front or the side of the television).

Format control :Use the Left/Right keys to select the desired picture format:

Auto : if the transmitter (for 16/9 format TV’s) or the appliance connected to one of the peripheral jacks deliversthe switching signal, the television automatically adapts to the transmitted picture format.16/9 : manually selects widescreen picture format.4/3 : manually selects this picture format.

If you have selected 16/9 or 4/3, the television will switch back to Auto when you change channels or youswitch off.

Picture preferences :

To access the PICTURE PREFERENCESmenu, press .

If you wish, you can personalize certainpicture settings. Select and set theproposed options. Use the informationbelow to help you.

Settings :Select Standard or Personal.

Standard corresponds to the factory settings.Personal corresponds to the settings that youhave entered yourself.

The lines Brightness, Colour andContrast are displayed only if you haveselected Personal on the Settings line.

Select each line one after the other and enteryour required settings. You can recall thesepicture settings by pressing the red key on theremote control.

Exit the menu using .

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

GB

PICTURE

Return

BrightnessColourContrastSharpness

Contrast expandTone

NeutralCold

Select the line marked Return to return to the previousmenu.

SOUND

Return

Sound typeSound mode

Balance L/RTrebleBassSurround effect

AutomaticNormal

Broadcastmonostereodual

NICAM-3AV

Choiceautomatic - mono

mono - stereosound 1 - sound 2

sound 1 - sound 2 - sound 3stereo - sound 1 - sound 2

Mode Effect

Normal : reproduces the original sound (mono or stereo).

Wide : gives a stereo effect on mono sounds.Stereo wide : accentuates the stereo effect.Magic : accentuates the stereo effects and

adds echo.Dolby Virtual : Virtual Dolby Surround.

Virtual Surround Dolby is based on Dolby Pro Logicdecoding for the reproduction of the Left, Right, Centre andVirtual Surround sound channels using two loudspeakers.“”Dolby”, “”Pro Logic” and the double -D symbol are trademarks of theDolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation.

Manufactured under licence from Dolby Laboratories LicensingCorporation.

Daily viewing

12

Daily viewing

Picture Adjustment

Display the SUMMARY using the key onthe remote control. Select Picture. Validateusing . The PICTURE menu is displayed.

Select and set the proposed options. Usethe information below to help you.

Brightness, Colour, Contrast, Sharpness:Select each of these lines one after the other andset as required.Contrast expand :Select this line then choose the desired Contrastexpand setting (High or Low).Tone :Select this line then choose the desired colourtone (Warm, Neutral or Cold).Exit the menu using .

Sound Settings

Display the SUMMARY using the key onthe remote control. Select the line markedSound. Validate using . The SOUND menuis displayed.

Select and set the proposed options. Usethe information below to help you.

Sound type :The choices available to you depend onyour television model and the broadcast.Stereo, Dual or NICAM reception and thecorresponding choices are only availableon Stereo or NICAM Stereo televisions.

Select this line, then select the type of sound youdesire.Sound mode :Select this line, then choose the desired modeusing the Left/Right keys.

The choices available to you depend onyour television model and the type ofsound. Magic and Dolby Virtual modesare only available in stereo on TV’sequipped with Virtual Dolby Surround.Stereo wide is only available on Stereo orNicam televisions not equipped withVirtual Dolby Surround.

Balance L/R :Select this line, then balance the sound betweenthe Left and Right loudspeakers.Treble, Bass :Select each of these lines and adjust to suit you.Surround effect :

This line appears only if you have selectedDolby Virtual on the Sound mode line.

Select this line and adjust the surround effect tosuit you.Exit the menu using .

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

GB

TIMEReturn

Sleep timer

Current time

Wake-up timerWake-up timeProgramme numberDaily

Select the line marked Return to return to the previousmenu.

00 : 00

11 : 28

07 : 0701 BBC1

Daily viewing

13

Time

You can use this menu to switch yourtelevision on or off automatically at a settime.

Display the SUMMARY using the key onthe remote control. Select the line markedTime. Validate using . The TIME menu isdisplayed.

Sleep timer :Use the Left/Right keys to choose how long youwish to view before the television switches off.The television will switch off automatically at theend of this period. To cancel, set to 00:00.

One minute before switching off, a message willinform you that the television is about to go off.If you wish to keep it on, press any key on theremote control or the local keyboard.The television switches to Child lock mode afteran automatic stop. It can only be switched onagain from the remote control.

Current time :The current time is given by the Teletext (see PERSONAL SETTINGS menu). You can also set the time manuallyusing the number keys (0 to 9) on your remote control.

Wake-up timer :

If you wish to be woken up by your television on the channel of your choice, you must first set the televisionclock to the correct time (see above).

Use the Left/Right keys to tick the box and display the Wake-up timer menu.

The lines Wake-up time, Programme number and Daily only appear if you have ticked the box on theline marked Wake-up timer.

Wake-up time :Use the number keys (0 to 9) on the remote control to set the time at which you wish to be woken.

Programme number :Select the programme you wish to be woken by.

Daily :Tick this box if you wish to be awakened at this time every day.

Exit the menu using .

Set the television to standby using the key on the remote control. The red indicator light on the televisionflashes.The television will come on automatically at the programmed time and will go off one hour later if you do not usethe remote control.

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

GB

LIST

Exit01 BBC 102 BBC 203 FR 304 CC1905 ARTE TV06 M607 CNN08 PREM09 EURO

Page -/+Programme: 0 - 9

Daily viewing

14

List of Channels

This list contains up to 10 pages. The number of pages depends onthe number of programmes memorized. For each programme, the listindicates the station name or type and the programme number. The3 AV programmes are listed on page 11.

To display the list, press the key on the remote controlorDisplay the SUMMARY using the key on the remote control. Select theline marked List. Validate using .

The page displayed is the page containing the programme you are watching.It is identified in the list by the symbol TV.To display the next page, press the Right key.To display the previous page, press the Left key.

If you wish to watch one of the programmes on the page displayed:Enter the last digit of the programme number (e.g. for 25 simply enter 5) on theremote control. The list disappears and your programme is selected.

Or,- Select the programme using the Up/Down keys.- Validate using .- Exit the menu using .

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

GB

Daily viewing

15

Selecting ProgrammesFor channels 1 to 9, press the number key corresponding to the desired channel on the remote control. Forprogramme numbers higher than 10, press the key on the remote control: ”- -” appears on the screen. Now usethe number keys on the remote control to enter first the tens digit then the units digit.

If you press while ”- -” is already displayed, the display returns to 0- , in which case you can only selectprogrammes 1 to 9.

Scrolling the Programmes

You can scroll through the programmes using the / keys.

Audio-visual (AV) Programmes

Press the key to call the last audio-visual (AV) programme watched. Press repeatedly to scroll the audio-visual(AV) programmes on the screen.

Volume Control

Use the volume +/- keys to increase or decrease the volume.

Muting the Sound

Press the key to mute the sound. Press again to restore the sound.

Zoom(16/9 models only)

This function is useful for 4/3 or letterbox pictures (black bands at the top and bottom of the screen).Use the Left/Right keys to select the desired zoom position:

ZOOM 0: 4/3 picture (black bands at the sides).FULL SCREEN: for a 4/3 picture that fills the screen.ZOOM 1: for letterbox pictures.

Displaying Information

Press the key to display the following information on the screen: channel number and name, time, zoom, typeof sound.

Television LockYou can use this function to prevent anyone from switching on the television using the buttons on thetelevision set.

The buttons on the television set are locked in the following cases:- If you switch off the set by pressing and holding the key on the remote control for more than 3 seconds,- After a programmed stop,- If the television is set to standby when the alarm has been set.

When the television is locked the red power will be light flashing.The television can now only be operated from the remote control.To release the lock, press any number key on the remote control.

Switching Off the TelevisionTo switch off the television, press the Standby key on the remote control or press the ON/OFF switch on thetelevision set.

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

GB

Teletext

16

Teletext

Certain channels broadcast an electronic news page service with a range of different information services.The presentation and use of the Teletext differ from one country to another and from one programme toanother (Teletext, Fastext or Toptext).

Press the key to display the Teletext Index (page 100).

A message will inform you if the programme you are watching has no Teletext service.To call up a page:Enter the 3 digits of the page number you wish to consult (for example, 150 or 170).After a moment, the page appears.Use the Left/Right keys to consult the next or the previous page.

Standard Functions

Rolling pages:Some information is displayed over several sub-pages. It is scrolled on your screen as it is received.To stop scrolling, select STOP using the Up/Down keys and validate using . Press again to continuescrolling.

Masked text:To reveal a hidden answer (for example in a quiz programme), select ??? using the Up/Down keys and validateusing . Press again to hide the answers.

Zoom :Select ZOOM using the Up/Down keys then press the key once to magnify the top of the screen, twice tomagnify the bottom of the screen (the page will scroll from top to bottom) and a third time to return to the normaldisplay.

Display:You can superpose the Teletext page over the TV picture. To do this, select MIX using the Up/Down keys thenvalidate by pressing the key. Press again to return to the normal display.

Sub-code:You can use this to access a sub-page directly.Select “- - - -” using the Up/Down keys. Then enter the four digits of the required sub-page number.

Certain programmes have Alarm pages that you can set to appear at the time you require. For example:for 15h30 enter 1530 as the sub-page number then press . You must of course leave the televisionon the programme which is to transmit the Alarm page.

Index:To call up the index page, select 100 using the Up/Down keys then validate using .

Direct access:You can use the yellow and blue keys to directly access the pages indicated in the bar at the bottom of the screen.

Fastext functions:If the Teletext you receive is Fastext, a sub-menu at the bottom of the screen appears which you can use to selectfrom the 4 headings according to its colour.To select a heading, press the key of the corresponding colour.

Toptext functions:If the Teletext you receive is TOPtext, the pages are arranged into headings and sub-headings by subject.You can select the first page of a heading directly by pressing the blue key, or the first page of a sub-heading bypressing the yellow key.

Other functions:With certain Teletext channels, it is possible to have sub-titles overlaid on the screen for certain broadcasts as wellas certain news flash updates.The corresponding page number is indicated in the Telextext index.Once you have found the page, the sub-title or the news flash will be overlaid onto the TV picture.The navigation status bar disappears after a few seconds. To display it again, press the key.

To exit Teletext, press or .

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

GB

* on models equipped with this function

* on models equipped with this function

Other Connections

17

Other Connections

The CINCH Video and Audio sockets (1)* are provided toconnect a VHS or 8mm camcorder.

The S and CINCH Audio sockets (1)* are provided to connecta S-VHS or Hi-8 camcorder.

To use the appliance you have connected, press thekey several times until the AV3 programme is

selected on the screen. When you switch off theconnected appliance, the television will remain onthe AV3 programme and you must use the numericalkeys on the remote control to select a programme.

The headphone socket (2)* is provided to connect aheadphone or earphones.

Connecting headphones mute the sound from thetelevision loudspeakers.

Other PossibilitiesCopying a cassette:Plug the VCR you wish to record to into the SCART socketAV2.Plug the appliance you wish to copy from as follows: intothe peripheral jack AV1 for a VCR; into the CINCH AV3 jacksfor a camcorder (see table below).

PLAY RECORD CALLAppliance SCART Socket Appliance SCART Socket

CALLPROGRAMME

VCRPeripheral

AV1

VCRou

CamcorderAV2 AV1

CamcorderCinches or

S-VideoAV3

VCRou

CamcorderAV2 AV3

Connecting a HiFi or AV amplifierIf you wish to connect a HiFi or AV amplifier, plug it into theperipheral jack AV2 using a SCART-CINCH type lead.

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

M a n u e l

d’ u t i l i s a t i o n ·B e d i e n u n g s -

a n l e i t u n g ·M a n u a l e d i

u t i l i z z a z i o n e ·U s e r

m a n u a l ·

M a n u a l d e

u t i l i z a c i ó n ·G e b r u i k s -

a a n w i j z i n g ·B r u k s a n -

v i s n i n g ·B e t j e n i n g s -

v e j l e d n i n g ·

DF321E / DF421E

F o l h e t o d e

u t i l i z a ç ã o ·www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

10 cm

10 cm 5 cm

10 c

m

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

GB

1

About this manual

This document is common to several television models. Therefore, certain functions or settings may not apply tothe model you have purchased

About the switch

The position of the ON/OFF switch differs depending on the model. It may be located on the front or on theright-hand side of your set (see the drawing inside the cover page of your manual).

About safety

To ensure your own safety and safe operation of the equipment, observe the following instructionsthoroughly.

TV sets require sufficient ventilation to prevent their components from overheating, which will cause failure. Do notblock the ventilation openings at the rear. If you place your TV set in a special piece of furniture, make sure thereis enough space for unhindered air circulation. Do not place the TV set in the close vicinity of a heater.The TV set has been designed for use in dry rooms. Should you use it, in exceptionalcircumstances in the open air (example: on the balcony, in the veranda or tent), you must absolutely protect itagainst moisture (dew, rain, splash water). Before switching on a cold TV set in a warm room, you should wait untilany condensation in the screen has dried by itself.Maximum ambient temperature: 35°CMaximum humidity: 85%By the end of your TV evening or when away from home for a longer period, we recommend that you turn off theTV set with the On/Off-switch.Even when the On/Off-switch is in the Off-position, your TV set is not fully disconnected from the mains. Todisconnect the set completely, the mains plug must be pulled out.The mains plug must be easily accessible.In the following cases, we recommend that you pull out the mains connector:1. During a thunderstorm. In such a case, it is advisable that you also disconnect the TV set from the aerial socket.2. When odour or smoke emanates from the set.Never attempt to open your TV set yourself.Further information:The TV set shielding is sufficient to prevent X-radiation to the exterior.Any operation performed by a non skilled person, change of high voltage or replacement of the picture tube by amodel not complying with the manufacturer specification are likely to cause considerable increase in X-radiation.A TV set modified in such a way no longer complies with the manufacturers’ specification and must not be used.

About cleaning

The screen is to be cleaned with liquid glass cleaners.: Never use abrasive products.: Clean the cabinet with a soft cloth soaked with neutral cleaner. Do not use solvents, such as white spirit oralcohol-based cleaning products since they may damage your television.: At regular intervals, clean the ventilation grids at the rear of the TV set.

About degaussing

The terrestrial magnetic field may have an influence on your TV set. This influence is revealed by the colouredspots, which appear on the screen.Should this be the case:: Turn the equipment off by means of the On/Off-switch.: Wait about one hour before switching the set on again.This procedure performs automatic degaussing of the screen. Should there still be coloured spots on the screen,repeat the operation.

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

GB

Contents

2

Page 4

Using the remote controland fitting the batteries.

Page

How to call up a menuand how to select afunction, a setting or anoption.

5

Inst

alla

tio

n About this manual 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

About the switch 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

About safety 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

About cleaning 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

About degaussing 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Basic connections 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Remote control 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Navigation principles 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Calling up the Installation main menu 5. . .

Calling up the Settings summary 5. . . . . . .

Calling up a Menu 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Navigating within the Menus 5. . . . . . . . . . .

Installing your television for thefirst time 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Automatic installation 7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Programme organisation 8. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Manual programming 9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Personal settings 10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Preferences 11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Inst

ruct

ion

sfo

rU

se

Daily viewing 12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Picture Adjustment 12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Sound Settings 12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Time 13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

List of Channels 14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Selecting Programmes 15. . . . . . . . . . . . .

Scrolling the Programmes 15. . . . . . . . . . .

Audio-visual (AV) Programmes 15. . . . . .

Volume Control 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Muting the Sound 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Zoom (16/9 models only) 15. . . . . . . . . . .

Displaying Information 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Television Lock 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Switching Off the Television 15. . . . . . . . .

Teletext 16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Standard Functions 16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Other Connections 17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Other Possibilities 17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Connecting a HiFi or AV amplifier 17. . . .

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

GB

$

ContinentalEurope

United Kingdom

The plug is fitted with a fuse which protects yourtelevision. If your television does not work, the fuse maybe blown. In this case, replace it with an identical 5 AmpASTA or lr BSI (BS 1362) certified fuse.

Note: the mains lead of your television is fitted with amoulded plug. This lead contains all the safety equipment,so you are advised when replacing it not to use anon-specific commercially-available model.

2

Basic connections

3

Basic connections

The mains plug (1) supplies power to the television. Thetelevision must only be plugged in to a 220-240 V - 50 Hzpower supply. It must never be plugged in to a DC source. Ifthe plug comes away from the lead, never attempt to plug itin: this could cause electrocution.

The aerial socket (2), located on the rear of the television, canbe used to connect an external aerial or other applianceequipped with a modulator such as a VCR, satellite receiver,etc.

If you connect an appliance to the aerial jack, you must giveit a channel number. To do this, switch on the appliance, thenuse the television to find the modulator channel (see theappliance manual). Now give it a programme number andmemorise it (see Manual Programming of channels). Then,when you wish to use the appliance, simply select itsprogramme number on the television. This procedure is notrequired for VCR’s not equipped with a modulator.

The SCART socket AV1 (3), located on the rear of thetelevision, is intended to connect a VCR or a camcorder(VHS, 8 mm), a Canal+ decoder, a video games console orRGB-signal emitting appliances.

The SCART socket AV2 (3), located on the rear of thetelevision, is intended to connect a VCR or a camcorder(VHS, 8 mm, S-VHS or Hi-8).

We strongly recommend the use of this type of connection,which gives a better picture quality. To use the peripheralappliance that you have connected, press the AV key on yourremote control (press once to select AV1; twice to selectAV2; three times for AV3: see ”Other Connections”). Thisselection is automatic for some appliances. Pressing “”play”on a VCR, or switching on a satellite receiver connected toAV1 or AV2 will automatically switch on your television.

When you stop the VCR, if you have not changed channelswhile watching the VCR, the television automaticallyswitches back to the channel you were watching beforehand.If the television has been switched on from the VCR, itswitches to standby when the VCR is switched off. Thetelevision automatically switches to 16/9 format if theconnected appliance delivers the corresponding signal.

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

GB

This key is active only when usingthe Teletext (blue key)

Display of channel, time, sound (yellowbutton) (and zoom for models with zoom)

The red, green, yellow andblue keys are also used forthe Teletext.

Standby

Right/Left Selection withinmenus andZoom Function (for models withthis function)

Call up Teletext / Toptext /Fastext function (purple button)

Go to adjustment function MENU

Go to programmes and enternumerical values in menus

Move Up/Down in menus

Change programme

Volume adjustment

To leave a menu or Teletext

Sound mute

Call up programme list(green button)

Selecting appliancesconnected to the television

(AV1, AV2 ...)

Confirm an action or validate amenu option

Reminder of picturepreferences (red button)

For programme numbers higherthan 10, press the 0 key on theremote control: ”- -” appears onthe screen. Now use thenumber keys on the remotecontrol to enter first the tensdigit then the units digit.

8

Please respect the environment! Before throwing any batteries away, consult yourdistributor who may be able to take them back for specific recycling.

Remote control

4

Remote control

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

GB

INSTALLATION MAIN MENU

Exit

Manual programming

Auto installation

Programme organisation

Personal settings

SUMMARY

Exit

Teletext

Picture

Sound

List

Time

Preferences

Navigation principles

5

Navigation principles

Calling up the Installation main menu

If there is no menu displayed on the screen,press and hold the key on the remotecontrol. The settings SUMMARY is displayedfirst, followed by the INSTALLATION MAINMENU which you can use to operate yourtelevision.

Calling up the Settings summary

Press and release the key on theremote control to display the list of menusavailable for using your television functions oradjusting your television

Calling up a Menu

Select the menu you wish using the Up/Downkeys. Press the key to validate..

Navigating within the Menus

Use the Up/Down keys 1 to select a line.

Use the Left/Right keys 2 to:

- Increase or decrease a value:for example:Fine tuning

- Select an option:for example: Reception Aerial

Reception Cable- Activate or deactivate an option:

for example: Decoder- Access a sub-menu:

for example: Picture preferences

You can use the 3 key to:

- Activate or deactivate an option:for example: Decoder

- Access a sub-menu:for example: Picture preferences

- Validate an action:for example: Store on PR number

Use the 4 key to exit a menu.

MANUAL PROGRAMMING

Return

StandardReceptionAutosearchFine tuningStore on PR numberNameDecoderExternal sound path

EURO BGCableCH- -

- -- - - -

Enter channel number or startautosearch with < or >.

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

GB

EnglishFrançais OKDeutschItalianoEspañolPortuguêsNederlandsSvenskaDanskNorwisch

(Fig. 1)(Fig. 1)

(Fig. 2) COUNTRY SELECTION

ExitUnited KingdomEireFranceGermanyItalySpainPortugalHollandBelgium and LuxembourgSwitzerlandAustriaSwedenDenmarkNorway

Other

Select your country and press OK

SEARCHING

AUTO INSTALLATION

003 STATIONS FOUND

Searching for TV stations.Please wait. To cancel press EXIT.

(Fig. 3)

Installing your television for the first time

6

Installing your television for the first time

First plug the television into a mains power outlet and to the external aerial or a cable network, then switch on usingthe ON/OFF switch located on the front or the side of your set.When you switch on your television for the first time, the language selection menu* is displayed (Fig. 1). If this doesnot happen, set the television to standby then press and hold the key on the television until this menu appears.

Installation Instructions (start)

1. Use the Up/Down keys to select thelanguage in which you wish the menus to bedisplayed.

2. Then validate using .

3. A list of countries* is now displayed (Fig. 2).Select the country in which you live, or thecountry from which you wish to receive thebroadcasts if you live in a border area.

4. Then validate using .

5. A welcome message is displayed.

6. Run the automatic installation sequenceusing .

7. A message appears to inform you thatautomatic installation has started (Fig. 3).Wait for a few minutes.A new message will inform you whenautomatic installation is completed.

8. If you wish to check or modify the channelorganisation, press and see theProgramme organisation chapter.

If you do not wish to modify the channelorganisation, you can exit the menu bypressing then watch the channel ofyour choice. Choose the desired channelusing the number keys (1, 2, 3, ...) and the

/ keys.

If you have a decoder, see the Manualprogramming chapter.

Your television will only search for channelscorresponding to the country you haveselected. See the Manual channelprogramming chapter to install any channelsnot found.For cable networks, read the Automaticchannel installation chapter to install anychannels not found.

*The list of languages and countries may varyfrom one model to another.

Installation Instructions (end)

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

GB

INSTALLATION MAIN MENU

Exit

Manual programming

Auto installation

Programme organisation

Personal settings

SEARCHING

AUTO INSTALLATION

003 STATIONS FOUND

Searching for TV stations.Please wait. To cancel press EXIT.

Automatic installation

7

Automatic installation

The Automatic installation function is useful if you have to go through the installation procedure again, such aswhen moving house. This function deletes all previously memorised programmes. To install a new channel, youshould use the Manual programming function.

Before running AUTO INSTALLATION, check the PERSONAL SETTINGS menu to ensure that the countrydisplayed is correct.

Your television will only search for channels corresponding to the selected country, so see the Manualprogramming chapter to install any channels not found. For cable networks, if you have not found certainchannels, select Other instead of a country name in the PERSONAL SETTINGS menu, then run automaticinstallation again.

1. Press and hold the key on the remotecontrol to display the INSTALLATION MAINMENU (The SUMMARY appears first,followed by the INSTALLATION MAINMENU).

2. Select the Auto installation line.

3. Validate using .

A message will inform you that Automaticinstallation has begun.Wait for a few minutes.A new message will inform you whenAutomatic installation is completed.

If you wish to check or reorganize your channeldisplay, press the key and see theProgramme organisation chapter.

If you do not wish to reorganize yourprogrammes, you can exit this menu bypressing , then watch the programme ofyour choice. Choose the desired programmeusing the number keys (1, 2, 3, ...) and the/ keys.

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

GB

INSTALLATION MAIN MENU

Exit

Manual programming

Auto installation

Programme organisation

Personal settings

PROGRAMME ORGANISATION

Return

Select program.Swap with PR.Change pr. nameDelete program.

13- -EURO13

10 MTV11 FR212 TF113 EURO14 CH4015 CC0116 ARTE17 CART18 - - - -19 ARD

Select programme number usingPR-/PR+ or </> or 0 to 9 keys.

Select the line marked Return to return to the previousmenu.

Programme organisation

8

Programme organisation

During automatic installation, your television will search for the channel name and assign it a programme numberaccording to the selected country. You can use the PROGRAMME ORGANISATION menu to name any channelname not found, to change the order in which the channels are displayed, or to delete channels for which receptionis too poor. Follow the messages at the bottom of the screen. For further details, read the information below.

If you wish to access thePROGRAMME ORGANISATION,menu thereafter, first press and holdthe key on the remote control todisplay the INSTALLATION MAINMENU (the SUMMARY is displayedfirst, followed by the INSTALLATIONMAIN MENU) then select Programmeorganisation and validate using .

- To delete a programme for which receptionis too poor:1. Select the line marked Select program.2. Use the / or Left/Right keys to list

your channels.3. When you get to a channel you wish to delete,

select the line marked Delete program.4. Press to delete the programme.

5. .Validate using .

- To organize your channels to suit you:1. Select the line marked Select program..2. Use the / or Left/Right keys and

the programmes logos to find the programmeto which you wish to give the No.1.Its present number appears on the linemarked Select program..

3. Select the line marked Swap with PR.4. Enter 01.5. Press . The two programmes swap

position and the desired programmebecomes N°1.

6. Repeat the above procedure for the otherchannels.

- To name your channels:1. Select the line marked Change pr. name2. Select the character you wish to modify using

the Left/Right keys.3. Use the and keys to display the letter you

require.The name you have entered will bememorised when you move to another line orexit the menu.

If you wish to change the order in whichyour programmes are displayed or ifyou wish to name other programmes,repeat the procedures describedabove.

When you have finished organizing theprogrammes, exit the menu using .

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

GB

INSTALLATION MAIN MENU

Exit

Manual programming

Auto installation

Programme organisation

Personal settings

MANUAL PROGRAMMING

Return

StandardReceptionAutosearchFine tuningStore on PR numberNameDecoderExternal sound path

EURO BGCableCH- -

- -- - - -

Enter channel number or startautosearch with < or >.

Select the line marked Return to return to the previous

Manual programming

9

Manual programming

The manual installation function is useful if some programmes have not been installed even after AUTOMATICINSTALLATION.

1. Press and hold , the SUMMARY isdisplayed first, followed by theINSTALLATION MAIN MENU.

2. Select the line marked Manualprogramming.

3. Display the menu using .4. Now continue by following the messages at

the bottom of the screen. For further details,read the information below.

Standard :Select the standard using Left/Right keys thatcorresponds to your country from the list ofstandards.

The number of standards proposed will differfrom one model to another.

France for France and LuxemburgDKK’ eg. for Eastern Europe and

the Middle-EastI for the United Kingdom and

IrelandEuro BG for Western Europe

Reception :Your television can pick up channels either viaan aerial (RF channels) or via a cable network.Certain cable networks use the samefrequencies as the RF channels. If this is thecase, you must select Aerial instead of Cable.Autosearch :Enter the programme number if you know it. Ifnot, search using the Left/Right keys. Yourtelevision will stop at the first channel it tunesinto. If you wish to memorize it, go to the linemarked Store on PR number. If not, resumethe search using the Left/Right keys.

Fine tuning :You can use this to improve the picture if the transmitter frequency is out of adjustment. Use the Left/Right keysto obtain the best possible picture and sound.Store on PR number :Enter the programme number you wish to give the channel (e.g.: 01 for BBC1). Memorise using .Name :If the station has been identified by the transmitter, its name will be inscribed automatically. You can change theproposed name or enter it if it has not already been identified. Select the character you wish to modify using theLeft/Right keys. Use the or keys to display the character you desire.Decoder :Use the Left/Right keys to tick the box if the channel is coded and if a decoder is connected to the AV1 jack.External sound path :Switch on your decoder. If the sound is coded or if you have no sound, activate or deactivate the box as requiredusing the Left/Right keys.

Once you have made all the adjustments you wish to a programme, go to Store on PR number and pressto memorise these. Then move on to the next channel.

Once you have completed your Manual Programming, exit the menu using .

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

GB

INSTALLATION MAIN MENU

Exit

Manual programming

Auto installation

Programme organisation

Personal settings

Personal settings

10

Personal settings

1. Press and hold the key: theSUMMARY is displayed first, followed by theINSTALLATION MAIN MENU.

2. Select the line marked Personal settings.

3. Display the menu using .4. Continue by following the messages at the

bottom of the screen.

For further details, read the information below.

Menu language :Select the language in which the menus are tobe displayed.

Country :Indicate the country in which you are if you wishto rerun Automatic Programming.

For cable networks, if certain channelshave not been found, select Otherinstead of the country name before run-ning automatic installation again.You may find that the characters of cer-tain teletext languages are inaccess-ible for the selected country.

Auto volume level :This is a sound control function which aims toequalise the volume level between differentchannels, and between different programmeson the same channel.

Activate or deactivate the auto volume level asrequired.

On models equipped with Virtual DolbySurround, this function remainsinactive if Dolby Virtual has beenselected in the SOUND menu (seeVolume Control).

AV1, AV2, AV3 name :Use these to give a name to each of youraudio-visual programmes. Select the characteryou wish to modify using the Left/Right keys.Use the or keys to display the desiredcharacter.

Prog. to be used for reference time :To display the time using the key or to usethe alarm function, the television clock must beset to the correct time. Select the line markedProg. to be used for reference time and selecta channel which broadcasts teletext. The timeis set automatically and is displayed after thechannel number.

Exit the menu using .

13:15

PERSONAL SETTINGS

Return

Menu language

Country

Auto volume level

AV1 nameAV2 nameAV3 name

Prog. to be usedfor reference time

Select a station from which you wantto get the reference time.

English

UK

VCR- - - -CAMC

06

Select the line marked Return to return to the previousmenu.

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

GB

PREFERENCESReturn

Show program. numberAV2 video inputAV3 video inputFormat controlPicture preferences

VideoS-VideoAuto

PICTURE PREFERENCES

Return

SettingsBrightnessColourContrast

Personal

Select the line marked Return to return to the previousmenu.

Preferences

11

Preferences

1. Display the SUMMARY by pressing andreleasing the key on the remotecontrol .

2. Select the line marked Preferences.3. Display the menu using .

Make your choice from the proposedoptions. Use the information below to helpyou.

Show program. number :If you wish to permanently display the numberof the programme you are watching, tick the boxusing the Left/Right keys. Press the Left/Rightkeys again to deactivate this function.

AV2 video input :Use the Left/Right keys to select the type of video signal received at the AV2 SCART socket (Video or S-Video).

AV3 video input :Use the Left/Right keys to select the type of video signal received at the AV3 sockets (these sockets are locatedon the front or the side of the television).

Format control :Use the Left/Right keys to select the desired picture format:

Auto : if the transmitter (for 16/9 format TV’s) or the appliance connected to one of the peripheral jacks deliversthe switching signal, the television automatically adapts to the transmitted picture format.16/9 : manually selects widescreen picture format.4/3 : manually selects this picture format.

If you have selected 16/9 or 4/3, the television will switch back to Auto when you change channels or youswitch off.

Picture preferences :

To access the PICTURE PREFERENCESmenu, press .

If you wish, you can personalize certainpicture settings. Select and set theproposed options. Use the informationbelow to help you.

Settings :Select Standard or Personal.

Standard corresponds to the factory settings.Personal corresponds to the settings that youhave entered yourself.

The lines Brightness, Colour andContrast are displayed only if you haveselected Personal on the Settings line.

Select each line one after the other and enteryour required settings. You can recall thesepicture settings by pressing the red key on theremote control.

Exit the menu using .

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

GB

PICTURE

Return

BrightnessColourContrastSharpness

Contrast expandTone

NeutralCold

Select the line marked Return to return to the previousmenu.

SOUND

Return

Sound typeSound mode

Balance L/RTrebleBassSurround effect

AutomaticNormal

Broadcastmonostereodual

NICAM-3AV

Choiceautomatic - mono

mono - stereosound 1 - sound 2

sound 1 - sound 2 - sound 3stereo - sound 1 - sound 2

Mode Effect

Normal : reproduces the original sound (mono or stereo).

Wide : gives a stereo effect on mono sounds.Stereo wide : accentuates the stereo effect.Magic : accentuates the stereo effects and

adds echo.Dolby Virtual : Virtual Dolby Surround.

Virtual Surround Dolby is based on Dolby Pro Logicdecoding for the reproduction of the Left, Right, Centre andVirtual Surround sound channels using two loudspeakers.“”Dolby”, “”Pro Logic” and the double -D symbol are trademarks of theDolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation.

Manufactured under licence from Dolby Laboratories LicensingCorporation.

Daily viewing

12

Daily viewing

Picture Adjustment

Display the SUMMARY using the key onthe remote control. Select Picture. Validateusing . The PICTURE menu is displayed.

Select and set the proposed options. Usethe information below to help you.

Brightness, Colour, Contrast, Sharpness:Select each of these lines one after the other andset as required.Contrast expand :Select this line then choose the desired Contrastexpand setting (High or Low).Tone :Select this line then choose the desired colourtone (Warm, Neutral or Cold).Exit the menu using .

Sound Settings

Display the SUMMARY using the key onthe remote control. Select the line markedSound. Validate using . The SOUND menuis displayed.

Select and set the proposed options. Usethe information below to help you.

Sound type :The choices available to you depend onyour television model and the broadcast.Stereo, Dual or NICAM reception and thecorresponding choices are only availableon Stereo or NICAM Stereo televisions.

Select this line, then select the type of sound youdesire.Sound mode :Select this line, then choose the desired modeusing the Left/Right keys.

The choices available to you depend onyour television model and the type ofsound. Magic and Dolby Virtual modesare only available in stereo on TV’sequipped with Virtual Dolby Surround.Stereo wide is only available on Stereo orNicam televisions not equipped withVirtual Dolby Surround.

Balance L/R :Select this line, then balance the sound betweenthe Left and Right loudspeakers.Treble, Bass :Select each of these lines and adjust to suit you.Surround effect :

This line appears only if you have selectedDolby Virtual on the Sound mode line.

Select this line and adjust the surround effect tosuit you.Exit the menu using .

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

GB

TIMEReturn

Sleep timer

Current time

Wake-up timerWake-up timeProgramme numberDaily

Select the line marked Return to return to the previousmenu.

00 : 00

11 : 28

07 : 0701 BBC1

Daily viewing

13

Time

You can use this menu to switch yourtelevision on or off automatically at a settime.

Display the SUMMARY using the key onthe remote control. Select the line markedTime. Validate using . The TIME menu isdisplayed.

Sleep timer :Use the Left/Right keys to choose how long youwish to view before the television switches off.The television will switch off automatically at theend of this period. To cancel, set to 00:00.

One minute before switching off, a message willinform you that the television is about to go off.If you wish to keep it on, press any key on theremote control or the local keyboard.The television switches to Child lock mode afteran automatic stop. It can only be switched onagain from the remote control.

Current time :The current time is given by the Teletext (see PERSONAL SETTINGS menu). You can also set the time manuallyusing the number keys (0 to 9) on your remote control.

Wake-up timer :

If you wish to be woken up by your television on the channel of your choice, you must first set the televisionclock to the correct time (see above).

Use the Left/Right keys to tick the box and display the Wake-up timer menu.

The lines Wake-up time, Programme number and Daily only appear if you have ticked the box on theline marked Wake-up timer.

Wake-up time :Use the number keys (0 to 9) on the remote control to set the time at which you wish to be woken.

Programme number :Select the programme you wish to be woken by.

Daily :Tick this box if you wish to be awakened at this time every day.

Exit the menu using .

Set the television to standby using the key on the remote control. The red indicator light on the televisionflashes.The television will come on automatically at the programmed time and will go off one hour later if you do not usethe remote control.

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

GB

LIST

Exit01 BBC 102 BBC 203 FR 304 CC1905 ARTE TV06 M607 CNN08 PREM09 EURO

Page -/+Programme: 0 - 9

Daily viewing

14

List of Channels

This list contains up to 10 pages. The number of pages depends onthe number of programmes memorized. For each programme, the listindicates the station name or type and the programme number. The3 AV programmes are listed on page 11.

To display the list, press the key on the remote controlorDisplay the SUMMARY using the key on the remote control. Select theline marked List. Validate using .

The page displayed is the page containing the programme you are watching.It is identified in the list by the symbol TV.To display the next page, press the Right key.To display the previous page, press the Left key.

If you wish to watch one of the programmes on the page displayed:Enter the last digit of the programme number (e.g. for 25 simply enter 5) on theremote control. The list disappears and your programme is selected.

Or,- Select the programme using the Up/Down keys.- Validate using .- Exit the menu using .

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

GB

Daily viewing

15

Selecting ProgrammesFor channels 1 to 9, press the number key corresponding to the desired channel on the remote control. Forprogramme numbers higher than 10, press the key on the remote control: ”- -” appears on the screen. Now usethe number keys on the remote control to enter first the tens digit then the units digit.

If you press while ”- -” is already displayed, the display returns to 0- , in which case you can only selectprogrammes 1 to 9.

Scrolling the Programmes

You can scroll through the programmes using the / keys.

Audio-visual (AV) Programmes

Press the key to call the last audio-visual (AV) programme watched. Press repeatedly to scroll the audio-visual(AV) programmes on the screen.

Volume Control

Use the volume +/- keys to increase or decrease the volume.

Muting the Sound

Press the key to mute the sound. Press again to restore the sound.

Zoom(16/9 models only)

This function is useful for 4/3 or letterbox pictures (black bands at the top and bottom of the screen).Use the Left/Right keys to select the desired zoom position:

ZOOM 0: 4/3 picture (black bands at the sides).FULL SCREEN: for a 4/3 picture that fills the screen.ZOOM 1: for letterbox pictures.

Displaying Information

Press the key to display the following information on the screen: channel number and name, time, zoom, typeof sound.

Television LockYou can use this function to prevent anyone from switching on the television using the buttons on thetelevision set.

The buttons on the television set are locked in the following cases:- If you switch off the set by pressing and holding the key on the remote control for more than 3 seconds,- After a programmed stop,- If the television is set to standby when the alarm has been set.

When the television is locked the red power will be light flashing.The television can now only be operated from the remote control.To release the lock, press any number key on the remote control.

Switching Off the TelevisionTo switch off the television, press the Standby key on the remote control or press the ON/OFF switch on thetelevision set.

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

GB

Teletext

16

Teletext

Certain channels broadcast an electronic news page service with a range of different information services.The presentation and use of the Teletext differ from one country to another and from one programme toanother (Teletext, Fastext or Toptext).

Press the key to display the Teletext Index (page 100).

A message will inform you if the programme you are watching has no Teletext service.To call up a page:Enter the 3 digits of the page number you wish to consult (for example, 150 or 170).After a moment, the page appears.Use the Left/Right keys to consult the next or the previous page.

Standard Functions

Rolling pages:Some information is displayed over several sub-pages. It is scrolled on your screen as it is received.To stop scrolling, select STOP using the Up/Down keys and validate using . Press again to continuescrolling.

Masked text:To reveal a hidden answer (for example in a quiz programme), select ??? using the Up/Down keys and validateusing . Press again to hide the answers.

Zoom :Select ZOOM using the Up/Down keys then press the key once to magnify the top of the screen, twice tomagnify the bottom of the screen (the page will scroll from top to bottom) and a third time to return to the normaldisplay.

Display:You can superpose the Teletext page over the TV picture. To do this, select MIX using the Up/Down keys thenvalidate by pressing the key. Press again to return to the normal display.

Sub-code:You can use this to access a sub-page directly.Select “- - - -” using the Up/Down keys. Then enter the four digits of the required sub-page number.

Certain programmes have Alarm pages that you can set to appear at the time you require. For example:for 15h30 enter 1530 as the sub-page number then press . You must of course leave the televisionon the programme which is to transmit the Alarm page.

Index:To call up the index page, select 100 using the Up/Down keys then validate using .

Direct access:You can use the yellow and blue keys to directly access the pages indicated in the bar at the bottom of the screen.

Fastext functions:If the Teletext you receive is Fastext, a sub-menu at the bottom of the screen appears which you can use to selectfrom the 4 headings according to its colour.To select a heading, press the key of the corresponding colour.

Toptext functions:If the Teletext you receive is TOPtext, the pages are arranged into headings and sub-headings by subject.You can select the first page of a heading directly by pressing the blue key, or the first page of a sub-heading bypressing the yellow key.

Other functions:With certain Teletext channels, it is possible to have sub-titles overlaid on the screen for certain broadcasts as wellas certain news flash updates.The corresponding page number is indicated in the Telextext index.Once you have found the page, the sub-title or the news flash will be overlaid onto the TV picture.The navigation status bar disappears after a few seconds. To display it again, press the key.

To exit Teletext, press or .

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

GB

* on models equipped with this function

* on models equipped with this function

Other Connections

17

Other Connections

The CINCH Video and Audio sockets (1)* are provided toconnect a VHS or 8mm camcorder.

The S and CINCH Audio sockets (1)* are provided to connecta S-VHS or Hi-8 camcorder.

To use the appliance you have connected, press thekey several times until the AV3 programme is

selected on the screen. When you switch off theconnected appliance, the television will remain onthe AV3 programme and you must use the numericalkeys on the remote control to select a programme.

The headphone socket (2)* is provided to connect aheadphone or earphones.

Connecting headphones mute the sound from thetelevision loudspeakers.

Other PossibilitiesCopying a cassette:Plug the VCR you wish to record to into the SCART socketAV2.Plug the appliance you wish to copy from as follows: intothe peripheral jack AV1 for a VCR; into the CINCH AV3 jacksfor a camcorder (see table below).

PLAY RECORD CALLAppliance SCART Socket Appliance SCART Socket

CALLPROGRAMME

VCRPeripheral

AV1

VCRou

CamcorderAV2 AV1

CamcorderCinches or

S-VideoAV3

VCRou

CamcorderAV2 AV3

Connecting a HiFi or AV amplifierIf you wish to connect a HiFi or AV amplifier, plug it into theperipheral jack AV2 using a SCART-CINCH type lead.

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

M a n u e l

d’ u t i l i s a t i o n

B e d i e n u n g s -

a n l e i t u n g

M a n u a l e d i

u t i l i z z a z i o n e

U s e r

m a n u a l

M a n u a l d e

u t i l i z a c i ó n

G e b r u i k s -

a a n w i j z i n g

B r u k s a n -

v i s n i n g

B e t j e n i n g s -

v e j l e d n i n g

F o l h e t o d e

u t i l i z a ç ã o

2 8 W S 2 3 E

3 2 W S 2 3 E

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

10 cm

10 cm 5 cm

10 c

m

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

GB

1

About this manual

This document is common to several television models. Therefore, certain functions or settings may not apply tothe model you have purchased

About the switch

The position of the ON/OFF switch differs depending on the model. It may be located on the front or on theright-hand side of your set (see the drawing inside the cover page of your manual).

About safety

To ensure your own safety and safe operation of the equipment, observe the following instructionsthoroughly.

TV sets require sufficient ventilation to prevent their components from overheating, which will cause failure. Do notblock the ventilation openings at the rear. If you place your TV set in a special piece of furniture, make sure thereis enough space for unhindered air circulation. Do not place the TV set in the close vicinity of a heater.The TV set has been designed for use in dry rooms. Should you use it, in exceptionalcircumstances in the open air (example: on the balcony, in the veranda or tent), you must absolutely protect itagainst moisture (dew, rain, splash water). Before switching on a cold TV set in a warm room, you should wait untilany condensation in the screen has dried by itself.Maximum ambient temperature: 35°CMaximum humidity: 85%By the end of your TV evening or when away from home for a longer period, we recommend that you turn off theTV set with the On/Off-switch.Even when the On/Off-switch is in the Off-position, your TV set is not fully disconnected from the mains. Todisconnect the set completely, the mains plug must be pulled out.The mains plug must be easily accessible.In the following cases, we recommend that you pull out the mains connector:1. During a thunderstorm. In such a case, it is advisable that you also disconnect the TV set from the aerial socket.2. When odour or smoke emanates from the set.Never attempt to open your TV set yourself.Further information:The TV set shielding is sufficient to prevent X-radiation to the exterior.Any operation performed by a non skilled person, change of high voltage or replacement of the picture tube by amodel not complying with the manufacturer specification are likely to cause considerable increase in X-radiation.A TV set modified in such a way no longer complies with the manufacturers’ specification and must not be used.

About cleaning

The screen is to be cleaned with liquid glass cleaners.: Never use abrasive products.: Clean the cabinet with a soft cloth soaked with neutral cleaner. Do not use solvents, such as white spirit oralcohol-based cleaning products since they may damage your television.: At regular intervals, clean the ventilation grids at the rear of the TV set.

About degaussing

The terrestrial magnetic field may have an influence on your TV set. This influence is revealed by the colouredspots, which appear on the screen.Should this be the case:: Turn the equipment off by means of the On/Off-switch.: Wait about one hour before switching the set on again.This procedure performs automatic degaussing of the screen. Should there still be coloured spots on the screen,repeat the operation.

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

GB

Contents

2

Page 4

Using the remote controland fitting the batteries.

Page

How to call up a menuand how to select afunction, a setting or anoption.

5

Inst

alla

tio

n About this manual 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

About the switch 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

About safety 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

About cleaning 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

About degaussing 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Basic connections 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Remote control 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Navigation principles 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Calling up the INSTALLATIONMAIN MENU 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Calling up the SUMMARY 5. . . . . . . . . . . . .

Calling up a Menu 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Navigating within the Menus 5. . . . . . . . . . .

Installing your television forthe first time 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Automatic installation 7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Programme organisation 8. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Manual programming 9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Personal settings 10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Preferences 11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Inst

ruct

ion

sfo

rU

se

Daily viewing 12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Picture Adjustment 12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Sound Settings 12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Time 13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

List of Channels 14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Selecting Programmes 15. . . . . . . . . . . . .

Scrolling the Programmes 15. . . . . . . . . . .

Audio-visual (AV) Programmes 15. . . . . .

Volume Control 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Muting the Sound 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Zoom (16/9 models only) 15. . . . . . . . . . .

Displaying Information 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Television Lock 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Switching Off the Television 15. . . . . . . . .

Teletext 16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Standard Functions 16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Other Connections 17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Other Possibilities 17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Connecting a HiFi or AV amplifier 17. . . .C

17/

BA

SIC

/40

00/

GB

-TB

A/

I6.3

/B

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

GB

$

ContinentalEurope

United Kingdom

The plug is fitted with a fuse which protects yourtelevision. If your television does not work, the fuse maybe blown. In this case, replace it with an identical 5 AmpASTA or lr BSI (BS 1362) certified fuse.

Note: the mains lead of your television is fitted with amoulded plug. This lead contains all the safety equipment,so you are advised when replacing it not to use anon-specific commercially-available model.

2

Basic connections

3

Basic connections

The mains plug (1) supplies power to the television. Thetelevision must only be plugged in to a 220-240 V - 50 Hzpower supply. It must never be plugged in to a DC source. Ifthe plug comes away from the lead, never attempt to plug itin: this could cause electrocution.

The aerial socket (2), located on the rear of the television, canbe used to connect an external aerial or other applianceequipped with a modulator such as a VCR, satellite receiver,etc.

If you connect an appliance to the aerial jack, you must giveit a channel number. To do this, switch on the appliance, thenuse the television to find the modulator channel (see theappliance manual). Now give it a programme number andmemorise it (see Manual Programming of channels). Then,when you wish to use the appliance, simply select itsprogramme number on the television. This procedure is notrequired for VCR’s not equipped with a modulator.

The SCART socket AV1 (3), located on the rear of thetelevision, is intended to connect a VCR or a camcorder(VHS, 8 mm), a Canal+ decoder, a video games console orRGB-signal emitting appliances.

The SCART socket AV2 (3), located on the rear of thetelevision, is intended to connect a VCR or a camcorder(VHS, 8 mm, S-VHS or Hi-8).

We strongly recommend the use of this type of connection,which gives a better picture quality. To use the peripheralappliance that you have connected, press the AV key on yourremote control (press once to select AV1; twice to selectAV2; three times for AV3: see ”Other Connections”). Thisselection is automatic for some appliances. Pressing “”play”on a VCR, or switching on a satellite receiver connected toAV1 or AV2 will automatically switch on your television.

When you stop the VCR, if you have not changed channelswhile watching the VCR, the television automaticallyswitches back to the channel you were watching beforehand.If the television has been switched on from the VCR, itswitches to standby when the VCR is switched off. Thetelevision automatically switches to 16/9 format if theconnected appliance delivers the corresponding signal.

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

GB

This key is active only whenusing the Teletext (blue key)

Confirm an action or validatea menu option

Right/Left Selection withinmenus andZoom Function (for models withthis function)

Call up Teletext / Toptext /Fastext function (purple button)

Go to adjustment function MENUVolume adjustment

Standby

Illumination of remote controlbuttons

Sound mute

Change programme

Move Up/Down in menus

Call up programme list(green button)

Selecting appliancesconnected to the television

(AV1, AV2 ...)

Display of channel, time, sound(yellow button) (and zoom for models

with zoom)

Reminder of picturepreferences (red button)

To leave a menu or Teletext

Go to programmes and enternumerical values in menus

For programme numbers higherthan 10, press the 0 key on theremote control: ”- -” appears onthe screen. Now use thenumber keys on the remotecontrol to enter first the tensdigit then the units digit.

The red, green, yellow andblue keys are also used forthe Teletext.

Please respect the environment! Before throwing any batteries away, consult yourdistributor who may be able to take them back for specific recycling.

Remote control

Remote control

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

GB

INSTALLATION MAIN MENU

Exit

Manual programming

Auto installation

Programme organisation

Personal settings

SUMMARY

Exit

Teletext

Picture

Sound

List

Time

Preferences

Navigation principles

5

Navigation principles

Calling up the Installation main menu

If there is no menu displayed on the screen,press and hold the key on the remotecontrol. The settings SUMMARY is displayedfirst, followed by the INSTALLATION MAINMENU which you can use to operate yourtelevision.

Calling up the Settings summary

Press and release the key on theremote control to display the list of menusavailable for using your television functions oradjusting your television

Calling up a Menu

Select the menu you wish using the Up/Downkeys. Press the key to validate..

Navigating within the Menus

Use the Up/Down keys 1 to select a line.

Use the Left/Right keys 2 to:

- Increase or decrease a value:for example:Fine tuning

- Select an option:for example: Reception Aerial

Reception Cable- Activate or deactivate an option:

for example: Decoder- Access a sub-menu:

for example: Picture preferences

You can use the 3 key to:

- Activate or deactivate an option:for example: Decoder

- Access a sub-menu:for example: Picture preferences

- Validate an action:for example: Store on PR number

Use the 4 key to exit a menu.

MANUAL PROGRAMMING

Return

StandardReceptionAutosearchFine tuningStore on PR numberNameDecoderExternal sound path

EURO BGCableCH- -

- -- - - -

Enter channel number or startautosearch with < or >.

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

GB

EnglishFrançais OKDeutschItalianoEspañolPortuguêsNederlandsSvenskaDanskNorwisch

(Fig. 1)(Fig. 1)

(Fig. 2) COUNTRY SELECTION

ExitUnited KingdomEireFranceGermanyItalySpainPortugalHollandBelgium and LuxembourgSwitzerlandAustriaSwedenDenmarkNorway

Other

Select your country and press OK

SEARCHING

AUTO INSTALLATION

003 STATIONS FOUND

Searching for TV stations.Please wait. To cancel press EXIT.

(Fig. 3)

Installing your television for the first time

6

Installing your television for the first time

First plug the television into a mains power outlet and to the external aerial or a cable network, then switch on usingthe ON/OFF switch located on the front or the side of your set.When you switch on your television for the first time, the language selection menu* is displayed (Fig. 1). If this doesnot happen, set the television to standby then press and hold the key on the television until this menu appears.

Installation Instructions (start)

1. Use the Up/Down keys to select thelanguage in which you wish the menus to bedisplayed.

2. Then validate using .

3. A list of countries* is now displayed (Fig. 2).Select the country in which you live, or thecountry from which you wish to receive thebroadcasts if you live in a border area.

4. Then validate using .

5. A welcome message is displayed.

6. Run the automatic installation sequenceusing .

7. A message appears to inform you thatautomatic installation has started (Fig. 3).Wait for a few minutes.A new message will inform you whenautomatic installation is completed.

8. If you wish to check or modify the channelorganisation, press and see theProgramme organisation chapter.

If you do not wish to modify the channelorganisation, you can exit the menu bypressing then watch the channel ofyour choice. Choose the desired channelusing the number keys (1, 2, 3, ...) and the

/ keys.

If you have a decoder, see the Manualprogramming chapter.

Your television will only search for channelscorresponding to the country you haveselected. See the Manual channelprogramming chapter to install any channelsnot found.For cable networks, read the Automaticchannel installation chapter to install anychannels not found.

*The list of languages and countries may varyfrom one model to another.

Installation Instructions (end)

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

GB

INSTALLATION MAIN MENU

Exit

Manual programming

Auto installation

Programme organisation

Personal settings

SEARCHING

AUTO INSTALLATION

003 STATIONS FOUND

Searching for TV stations.Please wait. To cancel press EXIT.

Automatic installation

7

Automatic installation

The Automatic installation function is useful if you have to go through the installation procedure again, such aswhen moving house. This function deletes all previously memorised programmes. To install a new channel, youshould use the Manual programming function.

Before running AUTO INSTALLATION, check the PERSONAL SETTINGS menu to ensure that the countrydisplayed is correct.

Your television will only search for channels corresponding to the selected country, so see the Manualprogramming chapter to install any channels not found. For cable networks, if you have not found certainchannels, select Other instead of a country name in the PERSONAL SETTINGS menu, then run automaticinstallation again.

1. Press and hold the key on the remotecontrol to display the INSTALLATION MAINMENU (The SUMMARY appears first,followed by the INSTALLATION MAINMENU).

2. Select the Auto installation line.

3. Validate using .

A message will inform you that Automaticinstallation has begun.Wait for a few minutes.A new message will inform you whenAutomatic installation is completed.

If you wish to check or reorganize your channeldisplay, press the key and see theProgramme organisation chapter.

If you do not wish to reorganize yourprogrammes, you can exit this menu bypressing , then watch the programme ofyour choice. Choose the desired programmeusing the number keys (1, 2, 3, ...) and the/ keys.

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

GB

INSTALLATION MAIN MENU

Exit

Manual programming

Auto installation

Programme organisation

Personal settings

PROGRAMME ORGANISATION

Return

Select program.Swap with PR.Change pr. nameDelete program.

13- -EURO13

10 MTV11 FR212 TF113 EURO14 CH4015 CC0116 ARTE17 CART18 - - - -19 ARD

Select programme number usingPR-/PR+ or </> or 0 to 9 keys.

Select the line marked Return to return to the previousmenu.

Programme organisation

8

Programme organisation

During automatic installation, your television will search for the channel name and assign it a programme numberaccording to the selected country. You can use the PROGRAMME ORGANISATION menu to name any channelname not found, to change the order in which the channels are displayed, or to delete channels for which receptionis too poor. Follow the messages at the bottom of the screen. For further details, read the information below.

If you wish to access thePROGRAMME ORGANISATION,menu thereafter, first press and holdthe key on the remote control todisplay the INSTALLATION MAINMENU (the SUMMARY is displayedfirst, followed by the INSTALLATIONMAIN MENU) then select Programmeorganisation and validate using .

- To delete a programme for which receptionis too poor:1. Select the line marked Select program.2. Use the / or Left/Right keys to list

your channels.3. When you get to a channel you wish to delete,

select the line marked Delete program.4. Press to delete the programme.

5. .Validate using .

- To organize your channels to suit you:1. Select the line marked Select program..2. Use the / or Left/Right keys and

the programmes logos to find the programmeto which you wish to give the No.1.Its present number appears on the linemarked Select program..

3. Select the line marked Swap with PR.4. Enter 01.5. Press . The two programmes swap

position and the desired programmebecomes N°1.

6. Repeat the above procedure for the otherchannels.

- To name your channels:1. Select the line marked Change pr. name2. Select the character you wish to modify using

the Left/Right keys.3. Use the and keys to display the letter you

require.The name you have entered will bememorised when you move to another line orexit the menu.

If you wish to change the order in whichyour programmes are displayed or ifyou wish to name other programmes,repeat the procedures describedabove.

When you have finished organizing theprogrammes, exit the menu using .

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

GB

INSTALLATION MAIN MENU

Exit

Manual programming

Auto installation

Programme organisation

Personal settings

MANUAL PROGRAMMING

Return

StandardReceptionAutosearchFine tuningStore on PR numberNameDecoderExternal sound path

EURO BGCableCH- -

- -- - - -

Enter channel number or startautosearch with < or >.

Select the line marked Return to return to the previous

Manual programming

9

Manual programming

The manual installation function is useful if some programmes have not been installed even after AUTOMATICINSTALLATION.

1. Press and hold , the SUMMARY isdisplayed first, followed by theINSTALLATION MAIN MENU.

2. Select the line marked Manualprogramming.

3. Display the menu using .4. Now continue by following the messages at

the bottom of the screen. For further details,read the information below.

Standard :Select the standard using Left/Right keys thatcorresponds to your country from the list ofstandards.

The number of standards proposed will differfrom one model to another.

France for France and LuxemburgDKK’ eg. for Eastern Europe and

the Middle-EastI for the United Kingdom and

IrelandEuro BG for Western Europe

Reception :Your television can pick up channels either viaan aerial (RF channels) or via a cable network.Certain cable networks use the samefrequencies as the RF channels. If this is thecase, you must select Aerial instead of Cable.Autosearch :Enter the programme number if you know it. Ifnot, search using the Left/Right keys. Yourtelevision will stop at the first channel it tunesinto. If you wish to memorize it, go to the linemarked Store on PR number. If not, resumethe search using the Left/Right keys.

Fine tuning :You can use this to improve the picture if the transmitter frequency is out of adjustment. Use the Left/Right keysto obtain the best possible picture and sound.Store on PR number :Enter the programme number you wish to give the channel (e.g.: 01 for BBC1). Memorise using .Name :If the station has been identified by the transmitter, its name will be inscribed automatically. You can change theproposed name or enter it if it has not already been identified. Select the character you wish to modify using theLeft/Right keys. Use the or keys to display the character you desire.Decoder :Use the Left/Right keys to tick the box if the channel is coded and if a decoder is connected to the AV1 jack.External sound path :Switch on your decoder. If the sound is coded or if you have no sound, activate or deactivate the box as requiredusing the Left/Right keys.

Once you have made all the adjustments you wish to a programme, go to Store on PR number and pressto memorise these. Then move on to the next channel.

Once you have completed your Manual Programming, exit the menu using .

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

GB

INSTALLATION MAIN MENU

Exit

Manual programming

Auto installation

Programme organisation

Personal settings

Personal settings

10

Personal settings

1. Press and hold the key: theSUMMARY is displayed first, followed by theINSTALLATION MAIN MENU.

2. Select the line marked Personal settings.

3. Display the menu using .4. Continue by following the messages at the

bottom of the screen.

For further details, read the information below.

Menu language :Select the language in which the menus are tobe displayed.

Country :Indicate the country in which you are if you wishto rerun Automatic Programming.

For cable networks, if certain channelshave not been found, select Otherinstead of the country name before run-ning automatic installation again.You may find that the characters of cer-tain teletext languages are inaccess-ible for the selected country.

Auto volume level :This is a sound control function which aims toequalise the volume level between differentchannels, and between different programmeson the same channel.

Activate or deactivate the auto volume level asrequired.

On models equipped with Virtual DolbySurround, this function remainsinactive if Dolby Virtual has beenselected in the SOUND menu (seeVolume Control).

AV1, AV2, AV3 name :Use these to give a name to each of youraudio-visual programmes. Select the characteryou wish to modify using the Left/Right keys.Use the or keys to display the desiredcharacter.

Prog. to be used for reference time :To display the time using the key or to usethe alarm function, the television clock must beset to the correct time. Select the line markedProg. to be used for reference time and selecta channel which broadcasts teletext. The timeis set automatically and is displayed after thechannel number.

Exit the menu using .

13:15

PERSONAL SETTINGS

Return

Menu language

Country

Auto volume level

AV1 nameAV2 nameAV3 name

Prog. to be usedfor reference time

Select a station from which you wantto get the reference time.

English

UK

VCR- - - -CAMC

06

Select the line marked Return to return to the previousmenu.

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

GB

PREFERENCESReturn

Show program. numberAV2 video inputAV3 video inputFormat controlPicture preferences

VideoS-VideoAuto

PICTURE PREFERENCES

Return

SettingsBrightnessColourContrast

Personal

Select the line marked Return to return to the previousmenu.

Preferences

11

Preferences

1. Display the SUMMARY by pressing andreleasing the key on the remotecontrol .

2. Select the line marked Preferences.3. Display the menu using .

Make your choice from the proposedoptions. Use the information below to helpyou.

Show program. number :If you wish to permanently display the numberof the programme you are watching, tick the boxusing the Left/Right keys. Press the Left/Rightkeys again to deactivate this function.

AV2 video input :Use the Left/Right keys to select the type of video signal received at the AV2 SCART socket (Video or S-Video).

AV3 video input :Use the Left/Right keys to select the type of video signal received at the AV3 sockets (these sockets are locatedon the front or the side of the television).

Format control :Use the Left/Right keys to select the desired picture format:

Auto : if the transmitter (for 16/9 format TV’s) or the appliance connected to one of the peripheral jacks deliversthe switching signal, the television automatically adapts to the transmitted picture format.16/9 : manually selects widescreen picture format.4/3 : manually selects this picture format.

If you have selected 16/9 or 4/3, the television will switch back to Auto when you change channels or youswitch off.

Picture preferences :

To access the PICTURE PREFERENCESmenu, press .

If you wish, you can personalize certainpicture settings. Select and set theproposed options. Use the informationbelow to help you.

Settings :Select Standard or Personal.

Standard corresponds to the factory settings.Personal corresponds to the settings that youhave entered yourself.

The lines Brightness, Colour andContrast are displayed only if you haveselected Personal on the Settings line.

Select each line one after the other and enteryour required settings. You can recall thesepicture settings by pressing the red key on theremote control.

Exit the menu using .

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

GB

PICTURE

Return

BrightnessColourContrastSharpness

Contrast expandTone

NeutralCold

Select the line marked Return to return to the previousmenu.

SOUND

Return

Sound typeSound mode

Balance L/RTrebleBassSurround effect

AutomaticNormal

Broadcastmonostereodual

NICAM-3AV

Choiceautomatic - mono

mono - stereosound 1 - sound 2

sound 1 - sound 2 - sound 3stereo - sound 1 - sound 2

Mode Effect

Normal : reproduces the original sound (mono or stereo).

Wide : gives a stereo effect on mono sounds.Stereo wide : accentuates the stereo effect.Magic : accentuates the stereo effects and

adds echo.Dolby Virtual : Virtual Dolby Surround.

Virtual Surround Dolby is based on Dolby Pro Logicdecoding for the reproduction of the Left, Right, Centre andVirtual Surround sound channels using two loudspeakers.“”Dolby”, “”Pro Logic” and the double -D symbol are trademarks of theDolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation.

Manufactured under licence from Dolby Laboratories LicensingCorporation.

Daily viewing

12

Daily viewing

Picture Adjustment

Display the SUMMARY using the key onthe remote control. Select Picture. Validateusing . The PICTURE menu is displayed.

Select and set the proposed options. Usethe information below to help you.

Brightness, Colour, Contrast, Sharpness:Select each of these lines one after the other andset as required.Contrast expand :Select this line then choose the desired Contrastexpand setting (High or Low).Tone :Select this line then choose the desired colourtone (Warm, Neutral or Cold).Exit the menu using .

Sound Settings

Display the SUMMARY using the key onthe remote control. Select the line markedSound. Validate using . The SOUND menuis displayed.

Select and set the proposed options. Usethe information below to help you.

Sound type :The choices available to you depend onyour television model and the broadcast.Stereo, Dual or NICAM reception and thecorresponding choices are only availableon Stereo or NICAM Stereo televisions.

Select this line, then select the type of sound youdesire.Sound mode :Select this line, then choose the desired modeusing the Left/Right keys.

The choices available to you depend onyour television model and the type ofsound. Magic and Dolby Virtual modesare only available in stereo on TV’sequipped with Virtual Dolby Surround.Stereo wide is only available on Stereo orNicam televisions not equipped withVirtual Dolby Surround.

Balance L/R :Select this line, then balance the sound betweenthe Left and Right loudspeakers.Treble, Bass :Select each of these lines and adjust to suit you.Surround effect :

This line appears only if you have selectedDolby Virtual on the Sound mode line.

Select this line and adjust the surround effect tosuit you.Exit the menu using .

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

GB

TIMEReturn

Sleep timer

Current time

Wake-up timerWake-up timeProgramme numberDaily

Select the line marked Return to return to the previousmenu.

00 : 00

11 : 28

07 : 0701 BBC1

Daily viewing

13

Time

You can use this menu to switch yourtelevision on or off automatically at a settime.

Display the SUMMARY using the key onthe remote control. Select the line markedTime. Validate using . The TIME menu isdisplayed.

Sleep timer :Use the Left/Right keys to choose how long youwish to view before the television switches off.The television will switch off automatically at theend of this period. To cancel, set to 00:00.

One minute before switching off, a message willinform you that the television is about to go off.If you wish to keep it on, press any key on theremote control or the local keyboard.The television switches to Child lock mode afteran automatic stop. It can only be switched onagain from the remote control.

Current time :The current time is given by the Teletext (see PERSONAL SETTINGS menu). You can also set the time manuallyusing the number keys (0 to 9) on your remote control.

Wake-up timer :

If you wish to be woken up by your television on the channel of your choice, you must first set the televisionclock to the correct time (see above).

Use the Left/Right keys to tick the box and display the Wake-up timer menu.

The lines Wake-up time, Programme number and Daily only appear if you have ticked the box on theline marked Wake-up timer.

Wake-up time :Use the number keys (0 to 9) on the remote control to set the time at which you wish to be woken.

Programme number :Select the programme you wish to be woken by.

Daily :Tick this box if you wish to be awakened at this time every day.

Exit the menu using .

Set the television to standby using the key on the remote control. The red indicator light on the televisionflashes.The television will come on automatically at the programmed time and will go off one hour later if you do not usethe remote control.

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

GB

LIST

Exit01 BBC 102 BBC 203 FR 304 CC1905 ARTE TV06 M607 CNN08 PREM09 EURO

Page -/+Programme: 0 - 9

Daily viewing

14

List of Channels

This list contains up to 10 pages. The number of pages depends onthe number of programmes memorized. For each programme, the listindicates the station name or type and the programme number. The3 AV programmes are listed on page 11.

To display the list, press the key on the remote controlorDisplay the SUMMARY using the key on the remote control. Select theline marked List. Validate using .

The page displayed is the page containing the programme you are watching.It is identified in the list by the symbol TV.To display the next page, press the Right key.To display the previous page, press the Left key.

If you wish to watch one of the programmes on the page displayed:Enter the last digit of the programme number (e.g. for 25 simply enter 5) on theremote control. The list disappears and your programme is selected.

Or,- Select the programme using the Up/Down keys.- Validate using .- Exit the menu using .

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

GB

Daily viewing

15

Selecting ProgrammesFor channels 1 to 9, press the number key corresponding to the desired channel on the remote control. Forprogramme numbers higher than 10, press the key on the remote control: ”- -” appears on the screen. Now usethe number keys on the remote control to enter first the tens digit then the units digit.

If you press while ”- -” is already displayed, the display returns to 0- , in which case you can only selectprogrammes 1 to 9.

Scrolling the Programmes

You can scroll through the programmes using the / keys.

Audio-visual (AV) Programmes

Press the key to call the last audio-visual (AV) programme watched. Press repeatedly to scroll the audio-visual(AV) programmes on the screen.

Volume Control

Use the volume +/- keys to increase or decrease the volume.

Muting the Sound

Press the key to mute the sound. Press again to restore the sound.

Zoom(16/9 models only)

This function is useful for 4/3 or letterbox pictures (black bands at the top and bottom of the screen).Use the Left/Right keys to select the desired zoom position:

ZOOM 0: 4/3 picture (black bands at the sides).FULL SCREEN: for a 4/3 picture that fills the screen.ZOOM 1: for letterbox pictures.

Displaying Information

Press the key to display the following information on the screen: channel number and name, time, zoom, typeof sound.

Television LockYou can use this function to prevent anyone from switching on the television using the buttons on thetelevision set.

The buttons on the television set are locked in the following cases:- If you switch off the set by pressing and holding the key on the remote control for more than 3 seconds,- After a programmed stop,- If the television is set to standby when the alarm has been set.

When the television is locked the red power will be light flashing.The television can now only be operated from the remote control.To release the lock, press any number key on the remote control.

Switching Off the TelevisionTo switch off the television, press the Standby key on the remote control or press the ON/OFF switch on thetelevision set.

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

GB

Teletext

16

Teletext

Certain channels broadcast an electronic news page service with a range of different information services.The presentation and use of the Teletext differ from one country to another and from one programme toanother (Teletext, Fastext or Toptext).

Press the key to display the Teletext Index (page 100).

A message will inform you if the programme you are watching has no Teletext service.To call up a page:Enter the 3 digits of the page number you wish to consult (for example, 150 or 170).After a moment, the page appears.Use the Left/Right keys to consult the next or the previous page.

Standard Functions

Rolling pages:Some information is displayed over several sub-pages. It is scrolled on your screen as it is received.To stop scrolling, select STOP using the Up/Down keys and validate using . Press again to continuescrolling.

Masked text:To reveal a hidden answer (for example in a quiz programme), select ??? using the Up/Down keys and validateusing . Press again to hide the answers.

Zoom :Select ZOOM using the Up/Down keys then press the key once to magnify the top of the screen, twice tomagnify the bottom of the screen (the page will scroll from top to bottom) and a third time to return to the normaldisplay.

Display:You can superpose the Teletext page over the TV picture. To do this, select MIX using the Up/Down keys thenvalidate by pressing the key. Press again to return to the normal display.

Sub-code:You can use this to access a sub-page directly.Select “- - - -” using the Up/Down keys. Then enter the four digits of the required sub-page number.

Certain programmes have Alarm pages that you can set to appear at the time you require. For example:for 15h30 enter 1530 as the sub-page number then press . You must of course leave the televisionon the programme which is to transmit the Alarm page.

Index:To call up the index page, select 100 using the Up/Down keys then validate using .

Direct access:You can use the yellow and blue keys to directly access the pages indicated in the bar at the bottom of the screen.

Fastext functions:If the Teletext you receive is Fastext, a sub-menu at the bottom of the screen appears which you can use to selectfrom the 4 headings according to its colour.To select a heading, press the key of the corresponding colour.

Toptext functions:If the Teletext you receive is TOPtext, the pages are arranged into headings and sub-headings by subject.You can select the first page of a heading directly by pressing the blue key, or the first page of a sub-heading bypressing the yellow key.

Other functions:With certain Teletext channels, it is possible to have sub-titles overlaid on the screen for certain broadcasts as wellas certain news flash updates.The corresponding page number is indicated in the Telextext index.Once you have found the page, the sub-title or the news flash will be overlaid onto the TV picture.The navigation status bar disappears after a few seconds. To display it again, press the key.

To exit Teletext, press or .

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr

GB

* on models equipped with this function

* on models equipped with this function

Other Connections

17

Other Connections

The CINCH Video and Audio sockets (1)* are provided toconnect a VHS or 8mm camcorder.

The S and CINCH Audio sockets (1)* are provided to connecta S-VHS or Hi-8 camcorder.

To use the appliance you have connected, press thekey several times until the AV3 programme is

selected on the screen. When you switch off theconnected appliance, the television will remain onthe AV3 programme and you must use the numericalkeys on the remote control to select a programme.

The headphone socket (2)* is provided to connect aheadphone or earphones.

Connecting headphones mute the sound from thetelevision loudspeakers.

Other PossibilitiesCopying a cassette:Plug the VCR you wish to record to into the SCART socketAV2.Plug the appliance you wish to copy from as follows: intothe peripheral jack AV1 for a VCR; into the CINCH AV3 jacksfor a camcorder (see table below).

PLAY RECORD CALLAppliance SCART Socket Appliance SCART Socket

CALLPROGRAMME

VCRPeripheral

AV1

VCRou

CamcorderAV2 AV1

CamcorderCinches or

S-VideoAV3

VCRou

CamcorderAV2 AV3

Connecting a HiFi or AV amplifierIf you wish to connect a HiFi or AV amplifier, plug it into theperipheral jack AV2 using a SCART-CINCH type lead.

www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr